AutoCAD 2012 for Mac Command Reference Guide July 2011
© 2011 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.
Contents Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using AutoCAD for Mac Documentation . Using This Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . Executing Commands . . . . . . . . References to Other Sections . . . . . Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 .1 .1 .2 .5 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3DPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 3DPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3DROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3DSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 3DSWIVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 3DZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 A Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 ABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B ED IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 BHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 BLEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 BLIPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 BMPOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CVHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 CVREBUILD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 CVREMOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 CVSHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 D Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 DBLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 DCALIGNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 DISTANTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 DIVIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 DONUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 DRAGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 DRAWINGRECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 DRAWINGRECOVERYHIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 DRAWORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GCVERTICAL . . . . . . . . . . . GEOMCONSTRAINT . . . . . . . . GRADIENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GROUPEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . H Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . HATCHGENERATEBOUNDARY . . HATCHSETBOUNDARY . . . . . . HATCHSETORIGIN . . . . . . . . HATCHTOBACK . . . . . . . . . . HELIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HIDE .
LAYOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 LAYULK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 LAYUNISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 LEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 LENGTHEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLEADERALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 MLEADERCOLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 MLEADEREDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 MLEADERSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 MLEDIT (-MLEDIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POINTLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 POLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 POLYSOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 PRESSPULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 PROJECTGEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829 PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 PROPERTIESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REVOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 REVSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905 ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907 ROTATE3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909 RSCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911 RULESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912 S Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914 SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SURFNETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018 SURFOFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019 SURFPATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 SURFSCULPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 SURFTRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024 SURFUNTRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026 SWEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 T Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VISUALSTYLES (-VISUALSTYLES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109 VPCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109 VPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110 VPMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113 VPMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113 VPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114 VPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115 VSCURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACADVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168 ACISOUTVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168 AFLAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168 ANGBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169 ANGDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169 ANNOALLVISIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170 ANNOAUTOSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170 ANNOTATIVEDWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAMFERC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189 CHAMFERD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 CHAMMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 CIRCLERAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190 CLASSICKEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191 CLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191 CLEANSCREENSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191 CLISTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEFPLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212 DELOBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213 DEMANDLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214 DIASTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215 DIMADEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215 DIMALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216 DIMALTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216 DIMALTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236 DIMLUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236 DIMLWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237 DIMLWE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237 DIMPOST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238 DIMRND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238 DIMSAH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239 DIMSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIVMESHCYLAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260 DIVMESHCYLBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261 DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262 DIVMESHPYRBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262 DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263 DIVMESHPYRLENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264 DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264 DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 DIVMESHTORUSPATH . . . . .
EXPLMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 EXTMAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287 EXTMIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287 EXTNAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287 F System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 FACETERDEVNORMAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 FACETERDEVSURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289 FACETERGRIDRATIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GRIPDYNCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 GRIPHOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 GRIPHOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 GRIPOBJLIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 GRIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 GRIPSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 GRIPSUBOBJMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HPSEPARATE . . . . . . . . . HPSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . HPTRANSPARENCY . . . . . . I System Variables . . . . . . . . . . ICONSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . IMAGEFRAME . . . . . . . . IMAGEHLT . . . . . . . . . . IMPLIEDFACE . . . . . . . . INDEXCTL . . . . . . . . . . INETLOCATION . . . . . . . INPUTHISTORYMODE . . . . INSBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . INSNAME . . . . . . . . . . . INSUNITS . . . . . . . . . . . INSUNITSDEFSOURCE . . . . INSUNITSDEFTARGET . . . . INTELLIGENTUPDATE . . . . INTERFERECOLOR . . .
LINEARBRIGHTNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355 LINEARCONTRAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355 LOCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355 LOCALROOTPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356 LOFTANG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356 LOFTANG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357 LOFTMAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357 LOFTMAG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAVVCUBELOCATION . . . . . . . NAVVCUBEOPACITY . . . . . . . . NAVVCUBEORIENT . . . . . . . . NAVVCUBESIZE . . . . . . . . . . NOMUTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORTHDIRECTION . . . . . . . . O System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . OBJECTISOLATIONMODE . . . . . OBSCUREDCOLOR . . . . . . . . . OBSCUREDLTYPE . . . . . . . . . OFFSETDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . OFFSETGAPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . OPMSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORTHOMODE . . . . . . . . . . . OSMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLQUIET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399 POLARADDANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399 POLARANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400 POLARDIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400 POLARMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 POLYSIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402 POPUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402 PREVIEWCREATIONTRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . .
REMEMBERFOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419 RENDERUSERLIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420 REPORTERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1420 ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421 RTDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421 S System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422 SAVEFIDELITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1422 SAVEFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNAPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1440 SNAPSTYL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 SNAPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 SNAPUNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 SOLIDCHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 SOLIDHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 SORTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443 SPACEPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEXTSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463 TEXTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463 THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463 TILEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464 TIMEZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464 TOOLSETSSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469 TOOLTIPMERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469 TOOLTIPSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VIEWSIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487 VIEWTWIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488 VISRETAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488 VPCONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489 VPCOORDDISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489 VPLAYEROVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490 VPLAYEROVERRIDESMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490 VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516 VSSHADOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518 VSSILHEDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1518 VSSILHWIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520 VTDURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1520 VTENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1521 VTFPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1522 W System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction 1 Introduction The Command Reference, a comprehensive guide to AutoCAD for Mac® commands, lists all AutoCAD for Mac commands in alphabetical order. In addition to the command listings, the Command Reference covers several topics in the appendixes: command aliases, system variables, dimension variables, utilities, standard libraries, graphical database objects, and Unicode fonts.
system variable governs whether you work in a dialog box or at the command prompt when you use certain commands. See appendix B, “System Variables”. Executing Commands The process of executing a command begins by starting the command, using one of several methods. For some commands, such as REGEN (page 877) , no further action is required. For other commands, you must respond by providing additional information or actions in order to complete the command.
Using Transparent Commands In many cases, you can start a command while using another command. The command you start is called a transparent command. For example, to turn on the grid while drawing a line, you can start the GRID (page 467) command transparently by preceding the command with an apostrophe. Two right angle brackets (>>) precede prompts for transparent commands.
options and values based on the option or value that you last specified, or based on the settings of certain system variables. Typically, the first word of a prompt indicates the type of action you can take. Most command prompts begin with the wordenter, select, or specify. These words indicate how you can respond to the prompt. Terminology in command prompts If the prompt starts with... You can... Select Select objects on the screen using your pointing device. Enter Enter text at the command prompt.
example, the POLYGON (page 821) command displays the following prompt, suggesting 4 as the number of sides for your polygon: Command: polygon Enter number of sides <4>: To accept the default value, press Enter or Spacebar. Using Wild-Card Characters at the Command Prompt When the prompt directions ask for a name list, such as a block name, variable name, named view, and so on, you can use wild-card characters to specify names. See the table in “Filter and Sort the List of Layers” in the User's Guide.
6
Commands 2 Commands You can start a command by using one of the following methods: ■Click the command name on a menu, status bar, or shortcut menu. ■Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt and press Enter or Spacebar. The acad.pgp file lists the command aliases. To access the acad.pgp, on the Tools menu, click Customize ➤ Edit Command Aliases (PGP).
Enter an option [Box (page ?)/Cone (page ?)/DIsh (page ?)/DOme (page ?)/Mesh (page ?)/Pyramid (page ?)/Sphere (page ?)/Torus (page ?)/Wedge (page ?)]: Box Creates a 3D box polyface mesh. Corner of Box Sets the first corner of the box. Length of Box Sets the first corner of the box. Width Specifies the width of the box. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to the corner point of the box. Height of Box Specifies the height of the box.
Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or relative to an angle you specify. The base point for the rotation is the first corner of the box. â– Reference Angle:Defines a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For example, you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object. After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to align with.
Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point, enter an angle, or press Enter You can define a reference angle by specifying two points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For example, you can rotate the box to align two specified points on the box with a point on another object. After defining a reference angle, specify a point for the reference angle to align with. The box then rotates around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation specified for the reference angle.
Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone.
Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0 produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a truncated cone. Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance Specify height of cone: Specify a distance Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Dish Creates the lower half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dome: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome <8>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter Defines the dome by its diameter.
Pyramid Creates a pyramid or a tetrahedron. Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (1) Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (2) Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (3) Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or [Tetrahedron]: Specify a point (4) or enter t Fourth Corner Point Defines the fourth corner point of the base of a pyramid.
Top Defines the top of the pyramid as a rectangle. If the top points cross, they create a self-intersecting polygon mesh. Specify first corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify second corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify third corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Specify fourth corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a point Tetrahedron Creates a tetrahedral polygon mesh.
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Diameter Defines the sphere by its diameter. Specify diameter of sphere: Specify a distance Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Torus Creates a toroidal polygon mesh that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.
Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Diameter of Torus Defines the torus by its diameter. Specify diameter of torus: Specify a distance Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d Radius of Tube Defines the tube by its radius.
Enter number of segments around torus circumference <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press Enter Wedge Creates a right-angle, wedge-shaped polygon mesh with a sloped face tapering along the X axis.
Summary You can specify one, two, or three points for the source object. Then, you can specify one, two, or three points for the destination. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Select the objects to align and press Enter Specify source plane and orientation . . . The selected object is moved and rotated so that the base points, and the X and Y axes of the source and destination align in 3D space.
Specify second source point or [eXit] : Specify a point for the X axis of the destination or press Enter The second point specifies a new X axis direction for the destination within a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. If you press Enter instead of specifying a second point, the X and Y axes of the destination are assumed to be parallel with the X and Y axes of the current UCS.
For 3D rectangular arrays, in addition to columns and rows, you also specify the number of levels in the Z direction. For 3D polar arrays, you specify the axis of rotation with any two points in space. The entire selection set is treated as a single element in the array. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Polar Array Copies objects about an axis of rotation. The specified angle determines how far the objects are arrayed about the axis of rotation. A positive number produces a counterclockwise array rotation. A negative number produces a clockwise array rotation. Entering y or pressing Enter rotates each array element. See also: Array Objects 3DCONFIG (-3DCONFIG) Sets options that affect 3D display performance. Summary Enter -3dconfig at the Command prompt to use this command.
Surface Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for surfaces in your drawing. A higher setting provides more detail but uses more tessellation lines and more memory. Curve Tessellation Determines the amount of detail for curves in your drawing. A higher setting provides more detail but uses more tessellation lines and more memory. Number of Tessellations to Cache Configures your system according to memory and performance requirements. The 3D cache always stores at least one tessellation.
â– â– Enhanced 3D Performance. Enables a more efficient use of the graphic card when working with 3D objects. NOTE If you experience problems with precision, turn this option off. â– Smooth display. Controls the status of the full screen anti-aliasing effect. This option removes the jagged effect on the display of diagonal line and curved edges. â– Advanced material effects. Controls the status of the advanced materials effect on screen. â– Gooch hardware shader. Enables the use of Gooch shading.
See also: Control Performance 3DDISTANCE Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Camera ➤ Adjust Distance Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Adjust Distance (4). Summary 3DDISTANCE changes the cursor to a line with one arrow pointing up and one pointing down.
The Grips on the Gizmo The 3D Edit Bar gizmo includes three grips: â– Triangle grip. Specifies the method for reshaping the selected object. â– Square grip. Reshapes the selected object by moving the base point or changing the tangent direction at the base point. Use the three axes to restrict the movement option to a specified axis. Similarly, the three squares that touch the square grip restrict the movement option to the specified planes.
■Tangent arrow grip. Changes the magnitude of the tangent at the base point. For example, lengthening the tangent arrow grip flattens the curvature of the surface at the point of tangency. The tangent arrow points in the direction of one of the surface’s U, V, or W axes, depending on the tangent direction specified in 3D Edit Bar Shortcut Menu (page 29).
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a NURBS surface or curve to edit Specifies the object to be modified. Valid objects include lines, arcs, circles, ellipses and elliptical arcs, polylines, helixes, splines, and NURBS surfaces. Objects other than surfaces can be converted to splines. Select point on curve or Select point on NURBS surface Specifies a base point on the selected curve or NURBS surface. Changes to the selected object are relative to this point.
See also: Modify Splines Edit NURBS Surfaces 3D Edit Bar Shortcut Menu Displays options to set the location of the base point, constraints, and tangency. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click on the 3D Edit Bar gizmo. Summary The 3D Edit Bar shortcut menu displays several options depending on whether a spline or a NURBS surface is selected, where you click, and which editing method, move or tangent, is current.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Move Point Location Reshapes the selected object by moving the base point. Move Tangent Direction Reshapes the selected object by changing the slope of the tangent at the base point. U Tangent Direction Locates the tangent arrow grip on the U axis. Changes to the tangency are constrained to the UW plane. V Tangent Direction Locates the tangent arrow grip on the V axis. Changes to the tangency are constrained to the VW plane.
Summary After entering the last two points for a 3D face, the command repeats automatically using the these two points as the first two points of the next 3D face. For example: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first point (page 31) or [Invisible (page 31)]: Specify a point (1) or enter i First Point Defines the start point for the 3D surface. After entering the first point, enter the remaining points in a natural clockwise or counterclockwise order to create a normal 3D face.
Specify second point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (2) or enter i Specify third point or [Invisible] : Specify a point (3), enter i, or press Enter Specify fourth point or [Invisible] : Specify a point (4), enter i, or press Enter The Third Point and Fourth Point prompts are repeated until you press Enter. Specify points 5 and 6 at these repeating prompts. When you finish entering points, press Enter.
Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Free Orbit (2). Summary Selecting one of more objects before starting this command limits the display to those objects only. While the command is active, right-click to display additional options from a shortcut menu. 3DFORBIT activates a 3D Free Orbit view in the current viewport.
3D Free Orbit Cursor Icons While using 3D Free Orbit, the cursor changes as it is moved to indicate how the model will be orbited when clicking and dragging. View rotation is determined by the placement and appearance of the cursor as follows: Sphere Encircled by Two Lines When you move the cursor inside the arcball, it changes to a small sphere encircled by two lines. If you click and drag in the drawing area you can move freely around the objects.
See also: 3D Navigation Tools 3DMESH Creates a free-form polygon mesh. Summary The mesh density controls the number of facets, and is defined in terms of a matrix of M and N vertices, similar to a grid consisting of columns and rows. 3DMESH is a legacy method for creating mesh, designed primarily for operation under program control rather than by manual entry. To take advantage of smoothing, creasing, and refinement capabilities, use the MESH (page 617) command.
The location of each vertex in the mesh is defined by m and n, the row and column indices of the vertex. Defining vertices begins with vertex (0,0). You must supply the coordinate locations for each vertex in row m before specifying vertices in row m + 1. Vertices may be any distance from each other. The M and N orientation of a mesh depends on the position of its vertices. 3DMESH polygon meshes are always open in both M and N directions. You can close a mesh with PEDIT (page 767).
If the default gizmo (DEFAULTGIZMO (page 1209)) is 3D Move, the 3D Move gizmo is displayed whenever you select an object in a view with a 3D visual style. If you are working in a viewport with 2D Wireframe set as the visual style, 3DMOVE temporarily changes the visual style to 3D Wireframe for the duration of the command. The 3D Move gizmo is displayed at the center of the selected 3D object or objects by default. You can use the shortcut menu to change its location.
When you have selected an object, the gizmo is displayed. You can constrain the movement by clicking one of the following locations on the gizmo: â– Move along an axis. Click an axis to constrain the movement to that axis. â– Move along a plane. Click the area between the axes to constrain the movement to that plane. Stretch point When you are specifying the move using the gizmo, sets the new location of the selected objects. Drag and click to move the objects dynamically.
3D Move Gizmo Shortcut Menu Displays options to set the constraint of a 3D object, switch gizmos, and move or align the gizmo. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Move gizmo List of Options The following options are displayed. Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo. Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo. Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo. Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis. â– X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis. â– XY, YX, or ZX.
Respect Dynamic UCS When relocating the gizmo, as you move the cursor, temporarily aligns the XY plane of the UCS with the faces or edges. See also: Move 3D Objects 3DORBIT Rotates the view in 3D space, but constrained to horizontal and vertical orbit only. Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ Orbit ➤ Constrained Orbit Pointing device: Press Shift and click the mouse wheel to temporarily enter 3D Orbit mode.
NOTE You cannot edit objects while the 3DORBIT command is active. While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area. See 3D Orbit Shortcut Menu (page 41). See also: Use 3D Navigation Tools 3D Orbit Shortcut Menu When the 3DORBIT command (or any 3D navigation command or mode) is active, you can access the options on the 3D Orbit shortcut menu. To access the 3D Orbit shortcut menu, right-click in the 3D Orbit view.
TIP You can switch to any mode by using the shortcut menu or by entering the number displayed after its name. Enable Orbit Auto Target Keeps the target point on the objects you are viewing rather than on the center of the viewport. This feature is turned on by default. Zoom Window Changes the cursor to a window icon so that you can select a specific area to zoom in on. When the cursor changes, click a starting point and end point to define the zoom window.
Preset Views Displays a list of predefined views such as Top, Bottom, and SW Isometric. Choose a view from the list to change the current view of your model. Named Views Displays a list of named views in the drawing. Choose a named view from the list to change the current view of your model. Visual Styles Provides methods for shading objects. For more information about visual styles, see Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model. The options are the same as the options in VSCURRENT (page 1124).
Summary Starts 3D Orbit view and uses a center of rotation that you specify with your pointing device. If you specify a point outside the current view, 3DORBITCTR ignores the specified point and uses the default center of rotation. 3DORBITCTR overrides the AutoTarget option in the 3DORBIT (page 40) command. See also: Use 3D Navigation Tools 3DOSNAP Sets the object snap modes for 3D objects.
Use Grips to Modify Solids and Surfaces Snap to Locations on Objects (Object Snaps) -3DOSNAP Uses command prompts to set running object snap modes for 3D objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter List of Object Snap Modes Specify one or more object snap modes by entering the first four characters of the name. If you enter more than one, separate the names with commas. â– ZVERtex. Snaps to a vertex or a control vertex. â– ZMIDpoint. Snaps to the midpoint on a face edge.
Summary Moves in the direction that you drag. You can drag the view vertically, horizontally, or diagonally. 3DPAN changes the cursor to a hand cursor. You can view your entire drawing or select objects before entering 3DPAN. See also: Use 3D Navigation Tools 3DPOLY Creates a 3D polyline.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point of polyline: Specify a point (1) Specify endpoint of line (page 47) or [Undo (page 47)]: Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Specify endpoint of line or [Close (page 47)/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option Endpoint of Line Draws a straight line from the previous point to the specified new point. The prompt is repeated until you press Enter to end the command.
3DROTATE In a 3D view, displays the 3D Rotate gizmo to aid in revolving 3D objects around a base point. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ 3D Rotate Summary With the 3D Rotate gizmo, you can rotate selected objects and subobjects freely or constrain the rotation to an axis. If you are working in a viewport with 2D Wireframe set as the visual style, 3DROTATE temporarily changes the visual style to 3D Wireframe for the duration of the command.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Specifies the objects that you want to rotate. Base point Sets the center point of the rotation. Pick a rotation axis On the 3D Scale gizmo, specifies the axis of rotation. Move the mouse until the axis path you want to select turns yellow, then click to select it. Specify angle start point or type an angle Sets the relative start point of the rotation. You can also enter an angle value.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Rotate gizmo List of Options The following options are displayed. Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo. Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo. Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo. Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis. â– X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis. Relocate Gizmo Moves the gizmo to the point you specify. Align Gizmo With Sets the alignment for the change.
When the 3D Scale gizmo is displayed, the 3D Scale Gizmo shortcut menu (page 52) offers options for aligning, moving, or changing to another gizmo. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Specifies the objects to be scaled. Specify base point Specifies the base point for the scaling. Pick a scale axis or plane Specifies whether the object is scaled uniformly or only along a specific axis or plane. You have the following choices: â– Scale uniformly.
Specify scale factor Specifies the amount of change. Drag to dynamically modify the size of the selected objects or enter a scale value. For example, enter 2 to double the size of the selection. Copy Creates and scales a copy of the selected objects. Reference Sets a scale based on a ratio. â– Reference length. Sets the relative amount that represents the current size in the scale ratio. â– New Length. Sets the relative value used to calculate the new size.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: Right-click the 3D Scale gizmo List of Options The following menu options are displayed when you right-click the 3D Scale gizmo. Move Activates the 3D Move gizmo. Rotate Activates the 3D Rotate gizmo. Scale Activates the 3D Scale gizmo. Set Constraint Sets whether the change is constrained to a specific axis. â– X, Y or Z. Restricts the change to the designated axis. â– XY, YX, or ZX. Restricts the change to a plane that is defined by the selected axes. â– XYZ.
3DSWIVEL Changes the target of the view in the direction that you drag. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Camera ➤ Swivel Shortcut menu: Start any 3D navigation command, right-click in the drawing area, and click Other Navigation Modes ➤ Swivel (5). Summary Simulates panning with a camera in the direction that you drag. The target of the view changes. You can swivel the view along the XY plane or along the Z axis. See also: Use 3D Navigation Tools 3DZOOM Zooms in and out in a perspective view.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed in a perspective view. Press Esc or Enter to exit, or right-click to display shortcut-menu. Enter option [All (page 55)/Extents (page 55)/Window (page 55)/Previous (page 55)/Object] : All Zooms to display the entire drawing. Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents and results in the largest possible display of all the objects Window Zooms to display an area specified by two points of a rectangular window.
license type and expiration date, and the text of the license agreement. You can save the product information as a text file. See also: Start a Drawing ACISIN Imports an ACIS (SAT) file and creates 3D solid, body, or region objects. Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ ACIS File Summary The Select ACIS File box is displayed. Select the file to import in the File Name list. The SAT (ASCII) ACIS file is imported into the drawing. NOTE ACISIN imports SAT files up to ACIS version 7.0.
See also: Export ACIS SAT Files ADDSELECTED Creates a new object based on the object type and general properties of a selected object. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a single object, right-click, and choose Add Selected. Summary Differs from COPY by duplicating only the general properties (page 833) of an object.
Object type Special properties supported by ADDSELECTED Multileader Multileader Style, Overall Scale Table Table Style Hatch Pattern, Scale, Rotation Block Reference, External Reference Name Underlays (Image) Name List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select object: Use an object selection method The prompts vary by object type. See also: Copy, Array, Offset, or Mirror Objects ALIGN Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D.
Summary Either one, two, or three pairs of source points and definition points can be specified to move, rotate, or tilt the selected objects, aligning them with points on another object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Select the objects to align and press Enter Specify either one (page 59), two (page 59), or three pairs (page 60) of source points and definition points to align the selected objects.
The first set of source and destination points defines the base point for the alignment (1, 2). The second set of points defines the angle of rotation (3, 4). After you enter the second set of points, you are prompted to scale the object. The distance between the first and second destination points (2, 4) is used as the reference length to which the object is scaled. Scaling is available only when you are aligning objects using two point pairs.
See also: Align Objects AMECONVERT Converts AME solid models to AutoCAD solid objects. Summary The objects you select must be Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) Release 2 or 2.1 regions or solids. All other objects are ignored. Because of increased accuracy in the new solid modeler, AME models may look slightly different after conversion.
ANALYSISCURVATURE Displays a color gradient onto a surface to evaluate different aspects of its curvature. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Analysis tool group ➤ Surface Analysis flyout ➤ Curvature Analysis Summary Allows you to visualize Gaussian, minimum, maximum, and mean U and V surface curvature. Maximum curvature and a positive Gaussian value display as green; minimum curvature and a negative Gaussian value display as blue.
ANALYSISDRAFT Displays a color gradient onto a 3D model to evaluate whether there is adequate space between a part and its mold. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Analysis tool group ➤ Surface Analysis flyout ➤ Draft Analysis Summary The color spectrum shows draft angle changes within a specified range. The maximum draft angle displays as red, and the minimum draft angle displays as blue.
ANALYSISOPTIONS Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Analysis tool group ➤ Surface Analysis flyout ➤ Analysis Options Summary The Analysis Options dialog box (page 64) is displayed. See also: Analyze Surfaces Analysis Options Dialog Box Sets the display options for zebra, curvature, and draft analysis.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Select Objects to Analyze Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box. Stripe Display Stripe Direction Specifies the display angle. (VSAZEBRADIRECTION (page 1495)) This option is only available when Type is set to Cylinder. If you are using the Chrome Ball type, change the stripe directions with the VSAZEBRADIRECTION (page 1495) system variable.
Select objects to analyze Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box. Color Mapping Display Style Specifies the display for color mapping (VSACURVATURETYPE (page 1492) system variable). Enter the maximum curvature value (VSACURVATUREHIGH (page 1492) system variable). When the surface curvature reaches this value, it displays as green. Enter the minimum curvature value (VSACURVATURELOW (page 1492) system variable).
Select objects to analyze Prompts you to select the surface objects to analyze. When you are done selecting objects, press Enter to return to the dialog box. Color Mapping Maps green to the highest draft angle, red to the medium draft angle, and blue to the lowest draft angle. Angle Sets the value for the high and low draft angles. The draft angle is the angle in degrees between the surface normal and the UCS plane. Enter a value for the highest angle allowed (VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH (page 1493)).
In this example, the surface continuity is G0 because the surface edges are coincident, but they are not tangent and they have different curvatures. The fact that the stripes are not aligned shows that the surfaces are not tangent. To change the zebra analysis display settings, use the Zebra Analysis tab (page 64) of the Analysis Options dialog box (page 64).
Summary The location of each scale representation of an annotative object can be adjusted using grips. For each selected annotative object, all alternate scale representations are returned to the location of the object’s current scale representation. See also: Add and Modify Scale Representations ANNOUPDATE Updates existing annotative objects to match the current properties of their styles.
Summary Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target box. The APBOX (page 1172) system variable controls whether the object snap target box is displayed. The number of pixels you enter using APERTURE controls the size of the object snap box. The higher the number, the larger the target box. You can also change this setting in the Application Preferences dialog box, Cursor & Selection tab.
Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at startup. Summary Loads and unloads applications and specifies applications to be loaded at startup. List of Options The following options are displayed. The options at the top of this dialog box are derived from the standard file selection dialog box (page 720).
Load Loads or reloads the applications that are currently selected either in the files list or on the History List tab. Load is unavailable until you select a file that you can load. ObjectARX and DBX applications are loaded immediately, but LSP and FAS applications are queued and then loaded when you close the Load/Unload Applications dialog box. If you select a file that is already loaded, Load reloads the application when applicable. You cannot reload ObjectARX applications.
NOTE Remove does not unload the selected application. The Remove option is also available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking an application on the History List tab. Startup Suite Contains a list of applications that are loaded each time you start AutoCAD for Mac. You can drag application files from the files list, or from any application with dragging capabilities such as Finder, into the Startup Suite area to add them to the Startup Suite.
List of Options The following options are displayed. List of Applications Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of the application files to load at startup. Add Displays the Add File to Startup Suite dialog box. You can use this dialog box to select files to add to the startup suite. Remove Removes selected files from the Startup Suite. See also: Overview of AutoLISP Automatic Loading ARC Creates an arc.
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group ➤ Arc flyout Menu: Draw ➤ Arc Summary To create an arc, you can specify combinations of center, endpoint, start point, radius, angle, chord length, and direction values. For example: The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius. The endpoint is determined by a line from the center that passes through the third point. The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point.
The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius. The other end of the arc is determined by specifying the length of a chord between the start point and the endpoint of the arc. The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point. The included angle between the endpoints of the arc determines the center and the radius of the arc. The tangent direction can be specified either by locating a point on the desired tangent line, or by entering an angle.
The direction of the bulge of the arc is determined by the order in which you specify its endpoints. You can specify the radius either by entering it or by specifying a point at the desired radius distance. The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius. The endpoint is determined by a line from the center that passes through the third point. The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point.
The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point. The distance between the start point and the center determines the radius. The other end of the arc is determined by specifying the length of a chord between the start point and the endpoint of the arc. The resulting arc is always created counterclockwise from the start point.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point (page ?)of arc or [Center (page ?)]: Specify a point, enter c, or press Enter to start tangent to last line, arc, or polyline (page ?) Start Point Specifies the starting point of the arc. NOTE If you press Enter without specifying a point, the endpoint of the last drawn line or arc is used and you are immediately prompted to specify the endpoint of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc, or polyline.
The arc does not necessarily pass through this third point, as shown in the illustration. Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) using a center point (2) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is drawn. Specify included angle: Specify an angle Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint.
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an endpoint (2), with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is drawn. Specify included angle: Enter an angle in degrees or specify an angle by moving the pointing device counterclockwise Direction Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction. It creates any arc, major or minor, clockwise or counterclockwise, beginning with the start point (1), and ending at an endpoint (2).
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2) using a center point (1) with a specified included angle. If the angle is negative, a clockwise arc is drawn. Specify included angle: Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the distance of a straight line between the start point and endpoint. If the chord length is positive, the minor arc is drawn counterclockwise from the start point. If the chord length is negative, the major arc is drawn counterclockwise.
AREA Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas. Summary Several commands are available to provide area information including AREA, MEASUREGEOM (page 613), and MASSPROP (page 597). Alternatively, use BOUNDARY (page 149) to create a closed polyline or region. Then use LIST (page 581) or the Properties Inspector (page 832) to find the area. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Object Calculates the area and perimeter of a selected object. You can calculate the area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and 3D solids. NOTE 2D solids (created with the SOLID (page 955) command) do not have an area reported. Select object: If you select an open polyline, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated that line length is ignored.
Specify points to define a polygon (3). The area to be added is highlighted in green. Press Enter. AREA calculates the area and perimeter and returns the total area of all the areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add mode was turned on. If you do not close the polygon, the area is calculated as if a line were drawn from the last point entered to the first. When the perimeter is calculated, that line length is added.
ARRAY Creates copies of objects arranged in a 2D or 3D pattern. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Array. Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Array flyout Summary You can create copies of objects in a regularly spaced rectangular, polar, or path array. The DELOBJ (page 1213) system variable controls whether the source objects of the array are deleted or retained after the array is created. If you enter -array at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 87).
Evenly distributes object copies along a path or a portion of a path. Polar (ARRAYPOLAR (page 100)) Evenly distributes object copies in a circular pattern around a center point or axis of rotation. See also: Array Objects -ARRAY Maintains legacy command line behavior for creating nonassociative, 2D rectangular or polar arrays. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
To add rows downward, specify a negative value for the distance between rows. ARRAY skips the next prompt if you specify two points for the opposite corners of a rectangle. Specify the distance between columns (|||): To add columns to the left, specify a negative value for the distance between columns. Rectangular arrays are constructed along a baseline defined by the current snap rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes.
Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Enter a positive integer for a counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation You can enter 0 for the angle to fill only if you specify the number of items.
Summary The Source option of ARRAYEDIT (page 90) activates an editing state in which you can edit the source objects of a selected array item. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Save changes to array [Yes (page ?)/No (page ?)] : Enter an option Save Changes Saves all changes made to the source object or to a replacement item of the array. Discard Changes Discards any changes made; the source object or replacement item in the array is returned to its original state.
When you select a single associative array object, one of the following visors is displayed: â– Path Array visor (page 93) â– Polar Array visor (page 94) â– Rectangular Array visor (page 95) List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select array: Use an object selection method The array type determines the remaining prompts.
Base Point Specifies a base point for the replacement objects. Item in Array Selects the item whose source objects are to be replaced, and continues to prompt for additional items. â– Source objects. Replaces the original set of source objects in the array, which updates all items that have not been previously replaced. Base Point Redefines the base point of the array. Path arrays are repositioned relative to the new base point.
Align Items (Path Arrays) Specifies whether to align each item to be tangent to the path direction. Alignment is relative to the orientation of the first item (ARRAYPATH, Orientation option). Z Direction (Path Arrays) Controls whether to maintain the original Z direction of the items or to naturally bank the items along a 3D path. Angle Between (Polar Arrays) Specifies the angle between items. Expression (page 92) Fill Angle (Polar Arrays) Specifies the angle between the first and last item in the array.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Base Point Redefines the base point of the array. Array Method Controls how to distribute items when the path or number of items is edited. Edit Source Activates an editing state in which you can edit the source objects (or replacement source objects) for a selected item. Replace Item Replaces the source objects for selected items or for all items referencing the original source objects.
Summary The Polar Array visor is displayed when you select an associative array created with the Polar option. The options on this visor can also be accessed using the ARRAYEDIT (page 90) command from the Command prompt. List of Options The following options are displayed. Base Point Redefines the base point of the array. Edit Source Activates an editing state in which you can edit the source objects (or replacement source objects) for a selected item.
accessed using the ARRAYEDIT (page 90) command from the Command prompt. List of Options The following options are displayed. Base Point Redefines the base point of the array. Edit Source Activates an editing state in which you can edit the source objects (or replacement source objects) for a selected item. Replace Item Replaces the source objects for selected items or for all items referencing the original source objects. Reset Array Restores erased items and removes any item overrides.
The path can be a line, polyline, 3D polyline, spline, helix, arc, circle, or ellipse. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
â– Normal. Objects are aligned to be normal to the starting direction of the path. NOTE The Align Items (page ?) option controls the whether to maintain the starting orientation or continue reorienting items along the path, relative to the starting orientation. Expression Derives a value using a mathematical formula or equation. Base Point Specifies a base point for the array.
Divide Divides items evenly along the entire length of the path. Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last items. Expression (page 98) Associative Specifies whether to create items in the array as an associative array object, or as independent objects. â– Yes. Contains array items in a single array object, similar to a block. This allows you to quickly propagate changes by editing the properties and source objects of the array. â– No. Creates array items as independent objects.
Z Direction Controls whether to maintain the items’ original Z direction or to naturally bank the items along a 3D path. Exit Exits the command. See also: Create Path Arrays ARRAYPOLAR Evenly distributes object copies in a circular pattern around a center point or axis of rotation. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Array ➤ Polar Array Command entry: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Array flyout ➤ Polar Array Summary This command is equivalent to the Polar option in ARRAY (page 86).
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
NOTE When defining the fill angle in an expression, the (+ or -) mathematical symbol in the resultant value does not affect the direction of the array. Angle Between Specifies the angle between items. Expression (page 101) Fill Angle Specifies the angle between the first and last item in the array. Expression (page 101) Associative Specifies whether to create items in the array as an associative array object, or as independent objects. â– Yes.
ARRAYRECT Distributes object copies into any combination of rows, columns, and levels. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ Array ➤ Rectangular Array Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Array flyout ➤ Rectangular Array Summary This command is equivalent to the Rectangular option in ARRAY (page 86). Creates an array of rows and columns of copies of the selected object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Count Specifies the row and column values individually. â– Expression (page 104) Space Items Specifies the row and column spacing. Use the preview grid to specify a point that reflects the desired configuration. Spacing Specifies the row and column spacing individually. â– Expression (page 104) Base Point Specifies a base point for the array. Key Point For associative arrays, specifies a valid constraint (or key point) on the source objects to use as the base point.
Expression (page 104) Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last columns. Levels Specifies the number and spacing of levels. Expression (page 104) Total Specifies the total distance between the first and last levels. Exit Exits the command. See also: Create Rectangular Arrays ARX Loads, unloads, and provides information about ObjectARX applications. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Load Displays the ObjectARX/DBX File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). This option loads the specified ObjectARX application. Unload Unloads the specified ObjectARX application. Enter ARX/DBX file name to unload: See also: Overview of ObjectARX ATTACH Inserts an external reference or raster image in the current drawing. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Attach Summary The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed.
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group ➤ Define Attributes Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Define Attributes Summary The Attribute Definition dialog box (page 107) is displayed. If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 111). An attribute is an object that is created and included with a block definition. Attributes can store data such as part numbers, product names, and so on.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Attribute Sets attribute data. Tag Identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. Enter the attribute tag using any combination of characters except spaces. Lowercase letters are automatically changed to uppercase. Prompt Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. If you do not enter a prompt, the attribute tag is used as a prompt.
Default Specifies the default attribute value. Insert Field Button Displays the Field dialog box (page 429). You can insert a field as all or part of the value for an attribute. This button is available when you are not creating a multiline attribute. If you are creating a multiline attribute, right-click in the multiline in-place text editor and choose Field. Multiline Editor Button When Multiple Line mode is selected, displays an in-place text editor with a text formatting toolbar and ruler.
Text Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Enter a value, or choose Rotation to specify a rotation angle with your pointing device. The rotation angle is measured from the origin to the location you specify. If you select Align or Fit in the Justification list, the Rotation option is not available. Multiline Text Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.
Multiple Lines Specifies that the attribute value can contain multiple lines of text. When this option is selected, you can specify a boundary width for the attribute. NOTE In a dynamic block, an attribute's position must be locked for it to be included in an action's selection set. Insertion Point Specifies the location for the attribute.
Enter an option to change [Invisible/Constant/Verify/Preset/Lock position/Annotative/Multiple lines] : Enter attribute tag name (page ?): Enter any characters except spaces or exclamation points Enter attribute value (page ?): Enter the appropriate text or press Enter (this prompt is displayed only if you turned on Constant mode) Enter attribute prompt (page ?): Enter the text for the prompt line or press Enter (this prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode) Enter default attribute value
Multiple Lines Specifies that the attribute value can contain multiple lines of text. When this option is selected, you can specify a boundary width for the attribute. Attribute Tag Name Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the drawing. The tag can contain any characters except spaces or exclamation marks (!). Lowercase letters are automatically changed to uppercase.
When Multiple Line mode is on, -ATTDEF then displays several of the prompts used by the MTEXT command. For a description of each option, see MTEXT (page 674). Attribute Value (Constant Mode) Specifies the value for a constant attribute. This prompt is displayed only if you turn on Constant mode. ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the attribute tag instead of requesting a text string. For a description of each option, see TEXT (page 1044).
Summary The drawing is regenerated after you change the visibility settings unless REGENAUTO (page 878), which controls automatic regeneration, is off. The current visibility of attributes is stored in the ATTMODE (page 1176) system variable. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal (page 115)/ON (page 115)/OFF (page 115)] : Normal Restores the visibility settings of each attribute. Visible attributes are displayed.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group ➤ Edit Attributes flyout ➤ Single Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single Summary The Edit Attributes dialog box (page 116) is displayed to edit attribute values for a specific block. If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 118) to edit attribute values and properties independent of a block.
Summary To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use -ATTEDIT. List of Options The following options are displayed. Block Name Indicates the name of the selected block. The value of each attribute contained in the block is displayed in this dialog box. List of Attributes Displays the first eight attributes contained in the block. Edit the attribute values. If the block contains additional attributes, click Prev or Next to navigate through the list.
-ATTEDIT List of Prompts If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. Edit attributes one at a time? [Yes (page ?)/No (page ?)] : Enter y or press Enter to edit attributes one at a time, or enter n to edit attributes globally The following prompts filter the attributes to be changed based on attribute tag, current value, or object selection. Yes Edits attributes one at a time. Attributes to be edited one at a time must be visible and parallel to the current UCS.
Value Changes or replaces an attribute value. Enter type of value modification [Change/Replace]: Enter c or r or press Enter Change Modifies a few characters of the attribute value. Either string can be null. The ? and * characters are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters. Replace Substitutes a new attribute value for the entire attribute value. If you press Enter, the attribute value is empty (null). Position Changes the text insertion point.
Style Changes the style setting. Layer Changes the layer. Color Changes the color. You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or number), a true color, or a color from a color book. You can enter a color name, a color number between 1 and 255, or bylayer or byblock. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object.
No Edits attributes whether they are visible or not. Changes to attributes are not reflected immediately. The drawing is regenerated at the end of the command unless REGENAUTO (page 878), which controls automatic regeneration, is off. Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty (null) attributes, which normally are not visible, enter a backslash (\). The attributes that match the specified block name, attribute tag, and attribute value are selected. Either string can be empty (null).
DXF: Drawing Interchange File Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange File format containing only block reference, attribute, and end-of-sequence objects. DXF-format extraction requires no template. The file name extension .dxx distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files. In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for the output file. The extract file's file name extension is .dxx for DXF format. Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract.
See also: Modify a Block Attribute Definition ATTREDEF Redefines a block and updates associated attributes. Summary New attributes assigned to existing block references use their default values. Old attributes in the new block definition retain their old values. Any old attributes that are not included in the new block definition are deleted. WARNING ATTREDEF removes any format or property changes made with the ATTEDIT or EATTEDIT commands.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group (expanded) ➤ Synchronize Attributes Summary You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the current attributes defined for the blocks. Use this command to update all instances of a block containing attributes that was redefined using the BLOCK or BEDIT commands. ATTSYNC does not change any values assigned to attributes in existing blocks. NOTE Use the ATTREDEF command to redefine and update blocks in one command.
Summary For the current space, Audit places objects for which it reports errors in the Previous selection set. If the AUDITCTL system variable is set to 1, a text file with an .adt file extension is created that describes the problems and the action taken. For easy access, AUDIT places all objects for which it reports errors in the Previous selection set. However, editing commands affect only the objects that belong to the current paper space or model space.
List Controls whether a list of valid commands and system variables is displayed as you type. Icon Controls whether the corresponding icon for a command is displayed in the list. The same icon is used for all system variables. System variables Controls whether system variables are also included with the Append and List features. Delay Sets a time delay in seconds before the Append and List features take effect. On Enables the operation of the AutoComplete features that are currently turned on.
The Settings option displays the Constraint Settings dialog box with the Autoconstrain tab (page ?) selected. See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints B Commands BASE Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group (expanded) ➤ Set Base Point Menu: Draw ➤ Block ➤ Base Command entry: base (or 'base for transparent use) Summary The base point is expressed as coordinates in the current UCS.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group (expanded) ➤ Manage Attributes Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Block Attribute Manager Summary The Block Attribute Manager (page 128) is displayed. If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes, a message is displayed. This command controls all attribute properties and settings of a selected block definition. Any changes to the attributes in a block definition are reflected in the block references.
Summary You can edit the attribute definitions in blocks, remove attributes from blocks, and change the order in which you are prompted for attribute values when inserting a block. Attributes of the selected block are displayed in the attribute list. By default, Tag, Prompt, Default, Mode, and Annotative attribute properties are displayed in the attribute list.
If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new block before you save the attribute changes you made, you are prompted to save the changes before selecting another block. Block Lists all block definitions in the current drawing that have attributes. Select the block whose attributes you want to modify. List of Attributes Displays the properties of each attribute in the selected block. Remove Removes the selected attribute from the block definition.
Summary The Attribute Editor dialog box contains the following tabs: â– Attribute (page ?) â– Text Options â– Properties (page ?) List of Options The following options are displayed. Block Name Displays the name of the block whose attributes are to be edited. Attribute Tab (Attribute Editor Dialog Box) Defines how a value is assigned to an attribute and whether or not the assigned value is visible in the drawing area, and sets the string that prompts users to enter a value.
Prompt Sets the text for the prompt that is displayed when you insert the block. Default Sets the default value assigned to the attribute when you insert the block. Options Mode options determine whether and how attribute text appears. Invisible Displays or hides the attribute in the drawing area. If selected, hides the attribute value in the drawing area. If cleared, displays the attribute value. Constant Identifies whether the attribute is set to its default value. You cannot change this property.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Width Factor Sets the character spacing for attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it. Multiline Text Width Specifies the maximum length of the lines of text in a multiple-line attribute before wrapping to the next line. A value of 0.
Upside Down Specifies whether or not the text is displayed upside down. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is annotative. Justification Specifies how attribute text is justified. Properties Tab (Attribute Editor Dialog Box) Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the color, lineweight, and linetype for the attribute's line. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab. Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on.
Specifies the lineweight of attribute text. Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY (page 1365) system variable is off. Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute. If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is not available. See also: Modify a Block Attribute Definition BATTORDER Specifies the order of attributes for a block.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Attribute Definitions Lists the attribute definitions in the current block. Drag an attribute definition up or down in the list to reorder it. See also: Attach Data to Blocks (Block Attributes) BCLOSE Closes the Block Editor.
Summary Closes the Block Editor (page 139). If you have modified the block definition since it was last saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes. See also: Define Blocks Modify Blocks BEDIT Opens the block definition in the Block Editor. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group (expanded) ➤ Edit Menu: Tools ➤ Block Editor Shortcut menu: Select a block reference. Right-click in the drawing area. Click Block Editor.
Edit Block Definition Dialog Box Select from a list of block definitions that are saved in the drawing to edit in the Block Editor. You can also enter a name for a new block definition to create in the Block Editor. Summary When you click Edit Block, the Edit Block Definition dialog box closes, and the Block Editor is displayed. â– If you selected a block definition from the list, that block definition is displayed and is available for editing in the Block Editor.
Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. When you select a block definition from the list, the name is displayed in the Name box. When you click Edit Block, this block definition is opened in the Block Editor. When you select , the current drawing is opened in the Block Editor. Preview Displays a preview of the selected block definition. A lightning bolt icon indicates that the block is a dynamic block.
Block Editor Visor Provides tools for adding attributes to the block open for edit, save changes to a block, and close the Block Editor. Define Attribute (ATTDEF (page 106)) Creates an attribute definition for storing data in a block. Save (BSAVE (page 158)) Saves the current block definition. Save New (BSAVEAS (page 159)) Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name. Close (BCLOSE (page 136)) Closes the Block Editor.
See also: Define Blocks Modify Blocks BHATCH Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill. Summary The BHATCH command has been renamed to HATCH. See also: Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills BLEND Creates a spline in the gap between two selected lines or curves. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Blend Menu: Modify ➤ Blend Summary Select each object near an endpoint.
Valid objects include lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, helixes, open polylines, and open splines. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select first object or [CONtinuity]: Select a line or open curve near the end where the spline should start Select second object: Select another line or open curve near the end where the spline should end Continuity Specify one of two types of blends. Tangent Creates a degree 3 spline with tangency (G1) continuity to the selected objects at their endpoints.
Access Methods Command entry: 'blipmode for transparent use Summary When Blip mode is on, a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign (+) appears where you specify a point. BLIPMODE is off by default. To remove marker blips, use REDRAW (page 869), REGEN (page 877), ZOOM (page 1153), PAN (page 763), or other commands that redraw or regenerate the drawing. See also: Customize Object Selection BLOCK Creates a block definition from selected objects.
If you enter -block at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 147). You create a block definition by selecting objects, specifying an insertion point, and giving it a name. See also: Define Blocks Define Block Dialog Box Defines and names a block. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Name Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the operating system or the program for other purposes. The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing. Preview If an existing block is selected under Name, displays a preview of the block.
Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can specify an insertion base point in the current drawing. X Specifies the X coordinate value. Y Specifies the Y coordinate value. Z Specifies the Z coordinate value. Block Behavior Specifies the behavior of the block. Scale Uniformly Specifies whether or not the block reference is prevented from being non-uniformly scaled. Annotative Specifies that the block is annotative.
See also: Define Blocks -BLOCK If you enter -block at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter block name (page ?) or [? (page ?)]: Enter a name or ? Block Name Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by the operating system and the program for other purposes if the system variable EXTNAMES (page 1287) is set to 1.
If you enter yes, the block becomes annotative. Match Orientation to Layout in Paper Space Viewports If you enter yes, the block’s orientation in paper space viewports will match the orientation of the layout. Select Objects If you specify the insertion base point, you are prompted to select the objects. The program defines a block using the objects selected, the insertion base point, and the name provided, and then erases the selected objects from the drawing.
BMPOUT Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format. Summary The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box. A bitmap file that contains the objects you select is created. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No.
Each point that you specify identifies the surrounding objects and creates a separate region or polyline. See also: Create and Combine Areas (Regions) Boundary Creation Dialog Box Defines the object type, boundary set, and island detection method for creating a region or polyline using a specified point within an area enclosed by objects.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point. Boundary Retention Defines the type of boundary object that will be created from the enclosed area and how enclosed areas are detected. Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object. boundary creates the boundary as a region or a polyline object.
Internal Point Creates a region or polyline from existing objects that form an enclosed area. Specify a point inside the area. Advanced Options Sets the method BOUNDARY uses to create the boundary. Enter an option [Boundary set/Island detection/Object type]: Enter an option or press Enter to return to the previous prompt Boundary Set Defines the set of objects boundary analyzes when it creates a boundary from a specified point.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner or [Center (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter c for center Specify other corner or [Cube (page ?)/Length (page ?)]: Specify the other corner of the box or enteran option If the other corner of the box is specified with a Z value that differs from the first corner, then no height prompt is displayed.
Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length. Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you specify. If you enter values, the length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. If you pick a point to specify the length, you also specify the rotation in the XY plane.
See also: Create a Solid Box BREAK Breaks the selected object between two points. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group (expanded) ➤ Break Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group (expanded) ➤ Break at Point Menu: Modify ➤ Break Summary You can create a gap between two specified points on an object, breaking it into two objects. If the points are off of an object, they are automatically projected on to the object.
The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. If you select the object by using your pointing device, the program both selects the object and treats the selection point as the first break point. At the next prompt, you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the first point. Specify second break point or [First point]: Specify the second break point (2) or enter f Second Break Point Specifies the second point to use to break the object.
You can also break selected objects at a single point with the Break at Point tool. Valid objects include lines, open polylines, and arcs. Closed objects such as circles cannot be broken at a single point. See also: Break and Join Objects BREP Removes the history from 3D solids and composite solids, and associativity from surfaces. Summary When a solid loses the history of the original parts from which it was created, the original parts can no longer be selected and modified.
See also: Display Original Forms of Composite Solids BROWSER Launches the default web browser defined in your system's registry. Summary Pressing Enter displays your web browser, which automatically connects to the location you specify. Because browser does not append “http://” to web locations, you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser. See also: Get Started with Internet Access BSAVE Saves the current block definition.
Summary Saves changes to the current block definition. You can only use the BSAVE command in the Block Editor (page 139). See also: Create Blocks Within a Drawing BSAVEAS Saves a copy of the current block definition under a new name. Access Methods Toolbar: Block Editor visor ➤ Save As Summary Displays the Save Block Definition As dialog box (page 159). You can only use the BSAVEAS command in the Block Editor (page 139).
List of Options The following options are displayed. Block Name Specifies a new name under which to save a copy of the current block definition. Save Block as Drawing Saves the geometry in the Block Editor as a drawing file. Selecting an existing drawing file on disk overwrites the file. By default, the block name specified is used as the drawing file name. Block List Displays a list of block definitions that are saved in the current drawing. Preview Displays a preview of the selected block definition.
C Commands CAL Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions. Access Methods Command entry: 'cal for transparent use Summary CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector), real, or integer expressions. The expressions can access existing geometry using the object snap functions such as CEN, END, and INS. ® You can insert AutoLISP variables into the arithmetic expression and assign the value of the expression back to an AutoLISP variable.
Numeric Expressions Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined with the operators in the following table. Numeric operators Operator Operation () Groups expressions ^ Indicates exponentiation *,/ Multiplies, divides +, - Adds, subtracts The following are examples of numeric expressions: 3 3 + 0.6 (5.8^2) + PI Vector Expressions A vector expression is a collection of points, vectors, numbers, and functions combined with the operators in the following table.
Vector operators Operator Operation *, / Multiplies, divides a vector by a real number a*[x,y,z] = [a*x,a*y,a*z] +,- Adds, subtracts vectors (points) [a,b,c] + [x,y,z] = [a+x,b+y,c+z] The following are examples of vector expressions: A+[1,2,3] provides the point located [1,2,3] units relative to point A. The expression [2<45<45] + [2<45<0] - [1.02, 3.5, 2] adds two points and subtracts a third point. The first two points are expressed in spherical coordinates.
WARNING With imperial units, CAL interprets a minus or a dash (-) as a unit separator rather than a subtraction operation. To specify subtraction, include at least one space before or after the minus sign. For example, to subtract 9” from 5', enter 5' -9” rather than 5'-9”. See also: Use the Command Line Calculator Format Angles The default units for angles are decimal degrees.
Some CAL functions, such as pld and plt, return a point. Other functions, such as nor and vec, return a vector. Formatting Points and Vectors A point or vector is a set of three real expressions enclosed in brackets ([ ]): [r1,r2,r3] The notation p1, p2, and so forth designates points. The notation v1, v2, and so forth designates vectors. In drawings, points are displayed as dots, and vectors are displayed as lines with arrows. CAL supports points expressed in all formats.
The following is a valid point that contains arithmetic expressions as its components: [2*(1.0+3.3),0.4-1.1,2*1.4] The following example uses the Endpoint object snap and the vector [2,0,3] to calculate a point that is offset from a selected endpoint: end + [2,,3] The calculated point is offset 2 units in the X direction and 3 units in the Z direction relative to the selected endpoint.
>> Expression: R1=dist(end,end)/3 >> Select entity for END snap: Select an object with an endpoint This example uses the values of variables P1 and R1: Command: circle Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: 'cal >> Expression: P1+[0,1] Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] : 'cal >> Expression: R1+0.5 See also: Use the Command Line Calculator Use System Variables in Calculations You can use the getvar function to read the value of a system variable.
cvunit(value, from_unit, to_unit) The following example converts the value 1 from inches to centimeters: cvunit(1,inch,cm) See also: Use the Command Line Calculator Use Standard Numeric Functions CAL supports the standard numeric functions in the following table.
Numeric functions Function Description sqrt(real) Square root of the number; the number must be nonnegative abs(real) Absolute value of the number round(real) Number rounded to the nearest integer trunc(real) Integer portion of the number r2d(angle) Angles in radians converted to degrees; for example, r2d(pi) converts the pi radians to 180 degrees d2r(angle) Angles in degrees converted to radians; for example, d2r(180) converts 180 degrees to radians and returns the value of pi pi The constan
Specify second point of displacement or
Obtain a Point by Cursor To enter a point using the pointing device, use the cur function. The program prompts you to specify a point and uses the coordinate values of the point in the expression. The point coordinate values are expressed in terms of the current UCS. The cur function sets the value of the LASTPOINT (page 1344) system variable. The following example adds the vector [3.6,2.4,0]—the result of 1.2*[3,2]—to the point you select.
Use Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions You can use Snap modes as parts of arithmetic expressions. The program prompts you to select an object and returns the coordinate of the appropriate snap point. Using arithmetic expressions with Snap modes greatly simplifies entering coordinates relative to other objects. When you use these Snap modes, enter only the three-character name. For example, when you use the Center Snap mode, enter cen.
CAL prompts for a circle or arc and an object. It then determines the midpoint between the center of the circle or arc and the end of the selected object.
Point-filter functions Function Description xof(p1) X component of a point; Y and Z components are set to 0.0 yof(p1) Y component of a point; X and Z components are set to 0.0 zof(p1) Z component of a point; X and Y components are set to 0.
The following are examples of the parameter t: If t=0 the point is p1 If t=0.5 the point is the midpoint between p1 and p2 If t=1 the point is p2 See also: Use the Command Line Calculator Rotate a Point About an Axis The rot function rotates a point about an axis and returns the resulting point.
See also: Use the Command Line Calculator Obtain an Intersection Point The ill and ilp functions determine intersection points. ill(p1,p2,p3,p4) Determines the intersection point between two lines (p1,p2) and (p3,p4). All points are considered three-dimensional. ilp(p1,p2,p3,p4,p5) Determines the intersection point between a line (p1,p2) and a plane passing through three points (p3,p4,p5).
The following example returns half the distance between the centers of two selected objects: dist(cen,cen)/2 The following example finds the distance between the point 3,2,4 and a plane you define by selecting three endpoints: dpp([3,2,4],end, end, end) See also: Use the Command Line Calculator Obtain a Radius The rad function determines the radius of a selected object. rad Determines the radius of a selected object. The object can be a circle, an arc, or a 2D polyline arc segment.
>> Select circle, arc or polyline segment for RAD function: Select the circle See also: Use the Command Line Calculator Obtain an Angle The ang function determines the angle between two lines. Angles are measured counterclockwise with respect to either the X axis, in the two-dimensional case, or to a user-specified axis, in the three-dimensional case. ang(v) Determines the angle between the X axis and vector v. The vector v is considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS.
You can determine the angle between the two sides of a triangle using the ang function, as shown in the following example: Command: cal >> Expression: ang(end,end,end) Select the apex of the angle, and then select the two opposite vertices. See also: Use the Command Line Calculator Calculate a Normal Vector The nor function calculates the unit normal vector (a vector perpendicular to a line or plane), not a point.
not a location in space. You can add this normal vector to a point to obtain another point. nor Determines the three-dimensional unit normal vector of a selected circle, arc, or polyline arc segment. This normal vector is the Z coordinate of the object coordinate system (OCS) of the selected object. nor(v) Determines the two-dimensional unit normal vector to vector v. Both vectors are considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current UCS.
The following example sets the view direction perpendicular to a selected object. The program displays the object in plan view and does not distort the object by the parallel projection.
Shortcut functions Function Shortcut for Description vee vec(end,end) Vector from two endpoints vee1 vec1(end,end) Unit vector from two endpoints See also: Use the Command Line Calculator CHAMFER Bevels the edges of objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Chamfer Menu: Modify ➤ Chamfer Summary The distances and angles that you specify are applied in the order that you select the objects. You can chamfer lines, polylines, rays, and xlines.
You can also chamfer 3D solids and surfaces. If you select a mesh to chamfer, you can choose to convert it to a solid or surface before completing the operation. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Loop Switches to Edge Loop mode. Edge Loop Selects all edges on the base surface. Undo Reverses the previous action in the command. Polyline Chamfers an entire 2D polyline. The intersecting polyline segments are chamfered at each vertex of the polyline. Chamfers become new segments of the polyline. If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered. Distance Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge.
Angle Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an angle for the second line. Trim Controls whether CHAMFER trims the selected edges to the chamfer line endpoints. NOTE Trim sets the TRIMMODE (page 1473) system variable to 1; No Trim sets TRIMMODE to 0. If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not intersect, CHAMFER extends or trims them so that they do.
CHAMFEREDGE Bevels the edges of 3D solids and surfaces. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group ➤ Chamfer Edge Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Chamfer Edges Summary You can select more than one edge at a time, as long as they belong to the same face. Enter a value for the chamfer distance or click and drag the chamfer grips. List of Prompts Select an Edge Selects a single solid or surface edge to chamfer.
Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the chamfer distance with a mathematical expression. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations. See also: Modify Edges on 3D Objects Create Chamfers CHANGE Changes the properties of existing objects.
Circles Changes the circle radius. If you selected more than one circle, the prompt is repeated for the next circle. Text Changes text location and other properties. Specify New Text Insertion Point Relocates the text. Attribute Definitions Changes the text and text properties of an attribute that is not part of a block. Blocks Changes the location or rotation of a block. Specifying a new location relocates the block. Pressing Enter leaves the block in its original location.
You can change the elevation of an object only if all its points have the same Z value. Layer Changes the layer of the selected objects. Ltype Changes the linetype of the selected objects. If the new linetype is not loaded, the program tries to load it from the standard linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE (page 575) to load the linetype. Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects. Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects.
See also: Display and Change the Properties of Objects CHPROP Changes the properties of an object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Enter property to change [Color (page ?)/LAyer (page ?)/LType (page ?)/ltScale (page ?)/LWeight (page ?)/Thickness (page ?)/TRansparency (page ?)/Material (page ?)/Annotative (page ?)]: NOTE The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot styles.
Ltscale Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects. Lweight Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are predefined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects. Thickness Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects. Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport object has no effect. Transparency Changes the transparency level of selected objects.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group ➤ Circle flyout Menu: Draw ➤ Circle ➤ Center, Radius List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify center point (page ?) for circle or [3P (page ?)/2P (page ?)/Ttr (tan tan radius) (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter an option Center Point Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius. Radius Defines the radius of the circle. Enter a value, or specify a point.
3P (Three Points) Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference. For example: Tan, Tan, Tan Creates a circle tangent to three objects. For example: 2P (Two Points) Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter.
TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes more than one circle matches the specified criteria. The program draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points. For example: See also: Draw Circles CLASSICGROUP Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
lectable (page ?)/Create (page ?)] : Enter an option or press Enter ?—List Groups Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing. Order Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the cut order for the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern. Position Number Specifies the position number of the object to reorder.
CLEANSCREENON Clears the screen of the menu bar and all palettes. Access Methods Button Menu: View ➤ Clean Screen Command entry: Cmd-0 Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Clean Screen Summary The screen displays only the drawing area. Use CLEANSCREENOFF (page 196) to restore the display of interface items that were hidden by CLEANSCREENON. See also: Set Up the Drawing Area CLEANSCREENOFF Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON was used.
Summary Restores the state of the display before CLEANSCREENON (page 196) was used. Use CLEANSCREENON (page 196) to clear the screen of most user interface elements. See also: Set Up the Drawing Area CLOSE Closes the current drawing. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Close Summary The current drawing is closed. If you modified the drawing since it was last saved, you are prompted to save or discard the changes.
See also: Open a Drawing COLOR Sets the color for new objects. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Color Command entry: 'color for transparent use Summary The Color Palette dialog box (page 198) is displayed. If you enter -color at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 205). See also: Set the Current Color Color Palette Dialog Box Defines the color of objects. Summary You can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.
See also: Set the Current Color Index Color Tab (Color Palette Dialog Box) Specifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors. List of Options The following options are displayed. AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) Palettes Specifies a color from the AutoCAD Color Index. If you hover over a color, the number of the color and its red, green, blue value are displayed below the palette. Click a color to select it, or enter the color number or name in the Color box.
Index Color Indicates the ACI color number when you hover over a color. Red, Green, Blue Indicates the RGB color value when you hover over a color. Bylayer Specifies that new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which you create them. When BYLAYER is selected, the color of the current layer is displayed in the Old and New color swatches.
Summary Specifies color settings using true colors (24-bit color) with either the Hue, Saturation, and Luminance (HSL) color model or the Red, Green, and Blue (RGB) color model. Over sixteen million colors are available when using true color functionality. The options available on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color model is specified. List of Options The following options are displayed. HSL Color Model Specifies the HSL color model for selecting colors.
Saturation (S) Specifies the purity of a color. High saturation causes a color to look more pure while low saturation causes a color to look washed-out. To specify color saturation, use the color spectrum or specify a value in the Saturation box. Adjusting this value affects the RGB value. Valid saturation values are from 0 to 100%. Luminance (L) Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color luminance, use the color slider or specify a value in the Luminance box.
Specifies the blue component of a color. Adjust the slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the Blue box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in the HSL color mode values. Color Specifies the RGB color value. This option is updated when changes are made to HSL or RGB options. You can also edit the RGB value directly using the following format: 000,000,000. True Color Stored as RGB Indicates the value for each RGB color component.
Summary Once a color book is selected, the Color Books tab displays the name of the selected color book. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Book Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors. The list consists of all the color books that are found in the Color Book Locations specified in the Application References dialog box, Application tab. Displays the pages of the selected color book and the colors and color names on each page.
Indicates the currently selected color book color. You can search for a specific color in a color book by entering the number of the color swatch and pressing Tab. This action updates the New color swatch with the requested color number. If the specified color is not found in the color book, the closest number match is displayed. Old Color Swatch Displays the previously selected color. New Color Swatch Displays the currently selected color.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object. Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas to specify a true color Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object. Enter the name of a color book that has been installed. If you enter a color book name, you are prompted to enter the color name in the color book.
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Command Line Menu: Window ➤ Command Line Command entry: Cmd-3 Summary Hides the Command Line. When the Command Line is hidden, you can still enter commands with dynamic prompts turned on. See also: The Command Line COMPILE Compiles shape files and PostScript font files into SHX files. Summary The Select Shape or Font File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed. Enter the SHP or PFB file name in the dialog box.
Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Cone Summary Creates a 3D solid with a circular or elliptical base that tapers symmetrically to a point or to a circular or elliptical planar face. You can control the smoothness of 3D curved solids, such as a cone, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable. Use the Top Radius option to create a cone frustum. Initially, the default base radius is not set to any value.
Specify center point of base or [3P (page ?)/2P (page ?)/Ttr (page ?)/Elliptical (page ?)]: Specify a point (1) or enter an option Specify base radius or [Diameter (page 209)] : Specify a base radius, enter d to specify a diameter, or press Enter to specify the default base radius value Specify height or [2Point (page 209)/Axis endpoint (page 209)/Top radius (page 209)] : Specify a height, enter an option, or press Enter to specify the default height value Center Point of Base 2Point Spec
â– Top Radius (page 209) 2P (Two Points) Defines the base diameter of the cone by specifying two points. â– 2Point (page 209) â– Axis Endpoint (page 209) â– Top Radius (page 209) TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Defines the base of the cone with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes, more than one base matches the specified criteria. The program draws the base of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points.
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Constraint Display flyout ➤ Show Geometric Constraints Menu: Parametric ➤ Constraints Bars ➤ Select Objects Summary Select an object to highlight the relevant geometric constraints. Constraint bars can be shown for all or any selection set of constrained geometries. The selection preview behavior for constraint bars is as follows: ■Placing the cursor over an icon on a constraint bar highlights related geometry.
See also: Display and Verify Geometric Constraints CONSTRAINTSETTINGS Controls the display of geometric constraints on constraint bars. Access Methods Menu: Parametric ➤ Constraint Settings Summary The Constraint Settings dialog box (page 212) is displayed. See also: Overview of Constraints Constraint Settings Dialog Box Allows you to control the geometric constraints, dimensional constraints, and autoconstrain settings.
List of Options The following options are displayed. The Constraint Settings dialog box includes the following: â– Geometric Tab (page ?) â– Dimensional Tab (page ?) â– Autoconstrain Tab (page ?) Geometric Tab Controls the display of constraint types on constraint bars. Infer Geometric Constraints Infers geometric constraints when creating and editing geometry. Displayed Constraints Controls the display of constraint bars or constraint point markers for objects in the drawing editor.
Display Constraints in the Current Plane Displays constraint bars for geometrically constrained objects only on the current plane. Icon Transparency Sets the transparency level of constraint bars in a drawing. Show Constraint Bars After Applying Constraints to Selected Objects Displays relevant constraint bars after you apply a constraint manually or when you use the AUTOCONSTRAIN (page 126) command.
Autoconstrain Headings ■Applied — Controls the constraints that are applied when applying constraints to multiple objects. ■Constraint Type — Controls the type of constraint applied to objects. Tolerances Sets the acceptable tolerance values to determine whether a constraint can be applied. ■Distance — Distance tolerance are applied to coincident, concentric, tangent, and collinear constraints.
CONTENT Opens the Content palette. Access Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block Tool group (expanded) ➤ Content Palette Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Content Menu: Window ➤ Content Command entry: Cmd-2 Summary The Content palette (page 216) allows you to insert blocks from the current drawing or a custom library of blocks. You create libraries to access and organize your blocks. Blocks that you use frequently can be added to the Favorites library.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Libraries List Displays the available libraries. Select a library to insert blocks from or select Manage Libraries to display the Manage Content Libraries dialog box (page 218). The following libraries are available by default: â– Favorites - Blocks that you have selected as favorites from the Blocks list. â– Blocks in Current Drawing - Lists the blocks in the current drawing that you can create new inserts from.
Enter a text string to control which blocks are displayed in the Blocks list. Only the names of the blocks that contain the text string are displayed in the Blocks list. Blocks List Shortcut Menu The following options are available when you right-click in an empty area of the Blocks list: â– Small Thumbnails - Small thumbnails for the blocks in the current library are displayed in the Blocks list.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Libraries List Lists the available libraries. The Favorites library is available by default. Select a library to manage the blocks contained in the library in the Blocks list. Double-click the name of a library to rename it. Create Library (+) Creates a new library and prompts you to enter a name in an in-place editor. Delete Library (-) Removes the selected library from the Libraries list. Blocks List Lists the blocks contained in the selected library.
CONTENTCLOSE Closes the Content palette. Summary Closes the Content palette that is displayed with the CONTENT (page 216) command. See also: The Content Palette CONVERT Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier. Sumary Hatches are not updated automatically when a drawing from a previous release is opened in Release 14 or later. Information about the rotation of a hatch pattern may not be updated properly if you have changed the UCS since creating the hatch.
Enter type of objects to convert [Hatch (page 221)/Polyline (page 221)/All (page 221)] : Enter h for hatches, p for polylines, or a for both Hatch Converts all hatches in the drawing. Polyline Converts all polylines in the drawing. All Converts all polylines and hatches in the drawing. See also: Use Drawings from Different Versions and Applications CONVTOMESH Converts 3D objects such as polygon meshes, surfaces, and solids to mesh objects.
The level of smoothness upon conversion depends on the mesh type setting (FACETERMESHTYPE (page 1291) system variable). If the mesh type is not set to be optimized, the converted object is not smoothed. To convert mesh objects to 3D surfaces or solids, use CONVTOSOLID (page 223) or CONVTOSURFACE (page 225) commands.
To convert meshes to NURBS surfaces, convert them to a solid or surface first with CONVTOSOLID (page 223) or CONVTOSURFACE (page 225) and then convert them to NURBS surfaces. See also: Create NURBS Surfaces CONVTOSOLID Converts 3D meshes and polylines and circles with thickness to 3D solids. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Convert to Solid Summary Take advantage of the solid modeling capabilities available for 3D solids.
The smoothness and number of faces of the resulting 3D solid are controlled by the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT (page 1437) system variable. Whereas the previous example shows a conversion to a smooth, optimized 3D solid, the following example shows a conversion to a faceted 3D solid in which the faces are not merged, or optimized. The following tables list the objects that can be converted to solid objects and some limitations on their conversion.
Object Description Separate objects that simulate a closed surface Cannot be a planar surface with contiguous edges or an exploded 3D solid box into six regions. However, you cannot convert those separate objects back to a solid with CONVTOSOLID. Planar surfaces with contiguous edges Cannot convert separate objects unless they enclose a volume without gaps. If the surfaces enclose a watertight area, you can convert to a solid with the SURFSCULPT (page 1023) command.
Summary As you convert objects to surfaces, you can specify whether the resulting object is smooth or faceted. When you convert a mesh, the smoothness and number of faces of the resulting surface are controlled by the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT (page 1437) system variable. Whereas the previous example shows a conversion to a smooth, optimized surface, the following example shows a conversion to a faceted surface in which the faces are not merged, or optimized.
Objects Open, zero-width polylines with thickness Lines with thickness Arcs with thickness Mesh objects Planar 3D faces objects converted to surfaces You can select the objects to convert before you start the command.
NOTE You can create surfaces from 3D solids with curved faces, such as a cylinder, with the EXPLODE (page 407) command. The DELOBJ (page 1213) system variable controls whether the geometry used to create 3D objects is automatically deleted when the new object is created or whether you are prompted to delete the objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects Specifies one or more objects to convert to surfaces.
Summary With the COPYMODE (page 1202) system variable, you can control whether multiple copies are created automatically. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Displacement Specifies a relative distance and direction using coordinates. The two points you specify define a vector that indicates how far from the original the copied objects are to be placed and in what direction. If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point prompt, the first point is interpreted as a relative X,Y,Z displacement.
Access Methods Menu: Edit ➤ Copy with Base Point Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Clipboard ➤ Copy with Base Point. Summary The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. ■Use PASTECLIP (page 766) to move the copied objects from the Clipboard to a location in the same document or to another document. ■When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE, it is placed relative to the specified base point.
that retains the most information is used. You can also use Copy and Paste to transfer objects between drawings. See also: Cut, Copy, and Paste with the Clipboard COPYHIST Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard. Summary The text is copied to the Clipboard. See also: View and Edit Within the Command History CUI Manages the customized user interface elements in the product. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Interface (CUI) Summary The Customize dialog box is displayed.
Customize Dialog Box Manages customized user interface elements for the menu bar and Tool Sets palette. List of Tabs The Customize User Interface Editor includes the following tabs: â– Commands (page 233) â– Menus (page 236) â– Tool Sets (page 237) For more information, see Customize the User Interface in the Customization Guide. List of Options The following options are displayed. Reset to Default Resets the commands and user interface elements back to their initial installed default settings.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Commands List Displays all the standard and custom commands available. â– Image - Thumbnail of the current image assigned to the command. â– Command - Name of the command. Displayed on the menu bar when the command is assigned to a menu or in a tooltip when the command is assigned to a tool group on the Tool Sets palette. â– Source - Name of the customization group that the command is stored in.
Options Displays a menu which allows you to manage existing commands in the Commands list. â– Duplicate - Creates a copy of the command currently selected in the Commands list. Duplicating a command allows you to modify an existing command without changing the original one. â– Delete - Removes the selected command from the Commands list. Commands that are currently assigned to a menu or Workflow cannot be deleted.
Menus Tab (Customize Dialog Box) Creates and manages the menus and menu items on the Mac OS menu bar. List of Options The following options are displayed. Commands List Displays a list of the standard and custom commands that can be added to menus and tool sets. You must be on the Commands tab (page 233) if you want to create or edit a command. Drag the command to the location in the menu you want it positioned and drop it. The location of the command is indicated by the horizontal bar.
Enter a text string to control which commands are displayed in the Commands list. Only the names of the commands that contain the text string are displayed in the Commands list. Menus List Lists the menus available on the Mac OS menu bar. Expand a menu to see the commands and sub-menus that are assigned to the menu. Create New Element(+) Displays a menu which allows you to create a new menu or sub-menu. â– Add Menu - Creates a new parent menu that is displayed directly on the Mac OS menu bar.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Commands List Displays a list of the standard and custom commands that can be added to menus and tool sets. You must be on the Commands tab (page 233) if you want to create or edit a command. Drag the command to the location in the menu you want it positioned and drop it. The location of the command is indicated by the horizontal bar. If you hover over a menu or sub-menu while dragging a command, the menu or sub-menu will expand after a short interval.
Tool Sets List Lists the tool sets available on the Tool Sets palette. Expand a tool set to see the commands, tool groups, and drop-downs (also known as flyouts) that are assigned to the tool set. Right-click over a tool set in the list and choose Specify Tool Set Image to display the Specify Tool Set Image dialog box (page 240). The image assigned appears next to the tool set name in the Tool Sets list on the Tool Sets palette.
Specify Tool Set Image Dialog Box Assigns an external image or internal resource to a tool set. List of Options The following options are displayed. Image Displays the name of the resource or external image file that is assigned to the tool set. Click […] to display the Select an Image File dialog box and specify the external image to assign to the tool set. Preview Displays a thumbnail of the selected image.
Summary CUTCLIP copies selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from the drawing. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document (see PASTECLIP (page 766)). When you want to use objects from a drawing file in another application, you can cut these objects to the Clipboard and then paste them into another application. You can also use Cut and Paste to transfer objects between drawings.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a NURBS surface or curve to add control vertices. Select a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Point Select a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Insert Knots Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you to place a point directly on a surface. This option only displays if you select a surface; it does not display for splines.
See also: Edit NURBS Surfaces CVREBUILD Rebuilds the shape of NURBS surfaces and curves. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ NURBS Surface Editing ➤ Rebuild Summary If you have difficulties editing the control vertices or there are too many control vertices, you can rebuild a surface or curve with less control vertices in the U or V direction. CVREBUILD also allows you to change the degree of the surface or curve.
If you select a surface, the Rebuild Surface dialog box (page 244) is displayed. If you select a spline, the Rebuild Curve dialog box (page 245) is displayed. See also: Edit NURBS Surfaces Rebuild Surface Dialog Box Rebuilds the CV hull of a NURBS surface. Summary Reshapes a NURBS surface by rebuilding the CV hull. List of Options The following options are displayed. Control Vertices Count Specifies the number of control vertices in the U and V directions.
In U Direction Specifies the degree of the NURBS surface in the U direction. (REBUILDDEGREEU (page 1415) system variable) In V Direction Specifies the degree of the NURBS surface in the V direction. (REBUILDDEGREEV (page 1415) system variable) Options Specifies the build options. (REBUILDOPTIONS (page 1416) system variable) Delete Input Geometry Specifies whether the original surface is retained along with the rebuilt surface.
Specifies the number of control vertices. (REBUILD2DCV (page 1413) system variable) Degree Specifies the degree of the NURBS curve. (REBUILD2DDEGREE (page 1414) system variable) Options Specifies the build options. (REBUILDOPTIONS (page 1416) system variable) Delete input geometry Specifies whether the original curve is retained along with the rebuilt curve. (REBUILD2DOPTION (page 1414) system variable) Maximum Deviation Displays the maximum deviation between the original curve and the new one.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a NURBS surface or curve to remove control vertices Select a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Point Specifies a valid NURBS surface or curve and press Enter. Remove Knots Turns off the display of control vertices and allows you to remove a point directly from the surface. This option only displays if you select a surface; it does not display for splines.
Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Surface Editing ➤ NURBS Surface Editing ➤ Show CV Summary Prompts you to select the NURBS surfaces and curves whose control vertices you want to display. Non-NURBS surfaces do not have control vertices. You can convert objects to NURBS surfaces with the CONVTONURBS command. See also: Edit NURBS Surfaces CYLINDER Creates a 3D solid cylinder.
Summary In the illustration, the cylinder was created using a center point (1), a point on the radius (2), and a point for the height (3). The base of the cylinder is always on a plane parallel with the workplane. You can control the smoothness of curved 3D solids, such as a cylinder, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable. During a drawing session, the default value for the base radius is always the previously entered base radius value.
2P (Two Points) Defines the base diameter of the cylinder by specifying two points. â– 2Point â– Axis endpoint TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Defines the base of the cylinder with a specified radius tangent to two objects. Sometimes more than one base matches the specified criteria. The program draws the base of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the selected points. â– 2Point â– Axis endpoint Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the cylinder.
See also: Create a Solid Cylinder D Commands DBLIST Lists database information for each object in the drawing. Summary The text window displays information about each object in the current drawing. The program pauses when the window fills with information. Press Enter to resume output, or press Esc to cancel. See also: Display and Change the Properties of Objects DCALIGNED Constrains the distance between two points on different objects.
The following table outlines the valid constraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects Line and constraint point Two lines â– When a line or an arc is selected, the distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained. â– When a line and a constraint point are selected, the distance between the point and the closest point on the line is constrained.
Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object. Object Selects an object instead of a constraint point. Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object. Point & Line Selects a point and a line object. The aligned constraint controls the distance between a point and the closest point on a line. Constraint Point Constraint Point (page ?) Line Selects a line object.
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional Contraints flyout ➤ Angular Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Angular Summary This command is equivalent to the Angular option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page 284). When you enter or edit an angle value that is either negative or is greater than 360 degrees, the number entered is stored for the expression (for example, 390), but the value displayed is based on the formatting of the units (for example, 30 if decimal degrees).
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select first line (page ?) or arc (page ?) or [3Point (page ?)] <3Point>: Pick a line, or an arc, or three points to be constrained Line Selects a line object. First Line Specifies the first line to be constrained. Second Line Specifies the second line to be constrained. Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object. Arc Selects an arc and constrains the angle.
See also: Apply Dimensional Constraints DCCONVERT Converts associative dimensions to dimensional constraints. Summary This command is equivalent to the Convert option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page 284). Objects other than associative dimensions are ignored and filtered from the selection set. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Diameter option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page 284). The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Circle Arc â– Constrains the diameter of the circle or arc. For example, List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or circle: Select an arc or a circle to be constrained Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Contraint Display flyout ➤ Show Dynamic Constraints Menu: Parametric ➤ Dynamic Dimensions ➤ Select Objects List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter constraint form [Annotational (page ?)/Dynamic (page ?)] : Select a constraint form Annotational Applies annotational dimensional constraints to objects. Dynamic Applies dynamic dimensional constraints to objects. See also: Apply Dimensional Constraints DCHORIZONTAL Constrains the X distance between points on an object, or between two points on different objects.
Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Two constraint points on objects For example, List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first constraint point (page ?) or [Object (page ?)]
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional Contraints flyout ➤ Linear Summary This command is equivalent to the Linear option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page 284). The following table outlines the valid contraint objects and points: Valid Objects or Points Characteristics Line Polyline segment Arc Two constraint points on objects ■When a line or an arc is selected, the horizontal or vertical distance between the endpoints of the object is constrained.
See also: Apply Dimensional Constraints DCRADIUS Constrains the radius of a circle or an arc. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Dimensional Constraints flyout ➤ Radius Menu: Parametric ➤ Dimensional Constraints ➤ Radius Summary This command is equivalent to the Radius option in DIMCONSTRAINT (page 284).
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select arc or circle: Select an arc or a circle to be constrained Dimension Line Location Determines where the dimension line is located on the constrained object. See also: Apply Dimensional Constraints DCVERTICAL Constrains the Y distance between points on an object, or between two points on different objects.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first constraint point (page ?) or [Object (page ?)]
Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and click Edit. Pointing device: Double-click a text object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select an annotation object or [Undo]: Object Selection Displays the appropriate editing method for the type of text you select: â– Text created using TEXT (page 1044) displays the In-Place Text Editor (page 675) without the Text Formatting toolbar and the ruler.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Tag Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies the attribute in the drawing. The tag can contain exclamation marks (!). The case change is not immediately displayed in the tag field. Prompt Specifies the attribute prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing this attribute definition. Default Specifies the default attribute value.
See also: Draw Reference Points Point Style Dialog Box Shows the current point style and size. Change the point style by selecting an icon. List of Options The following options are displayed. Point Size Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen or in absolute units. The point display size is stored in the PDSIZE (page 1389) system variable. Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value.
Point Style Specifies the image used to display point objects. The point style is stored in the PDMODE (page 1388) system variable. See also: Draw Reference Points DELAY Provides a timed pause within a script. Access Methods Command entry: 'delay for transparent use Summary Specifies the duration of a pause. Entering delay 1000 in your script delays the start of execution of the next command for about one second. The longest delay available is 32767, which is slightly less than 33 seconds.
Summary The number of constraints removed are displayed on the command line. Removes all geometric and dimensional constraints from the selected objects. See also: Modify Objects with Dimensional Constraints Applied DIM and DIM1 Accesses Dimensioning mode commands. Summary The Dim prompt indicates that you're in Dimensioning mode, in which you can use a special set of dimensioning commands (page ?). (DIM and DIM1 are provided only for compatibility with previous releases.
Dimensioning mode commands Command Description UNDO or U Erases the most recently created dimension objects and cancels any new dimension system variable setting. When you exit Dimensioning mode, UNDO reverses the effects of the entire dimensioning session. The following table shows which AutoCAD for Mac commands are equivalent to the rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these Dimensioning mode commands, see the equivalent AutoCAD for Mac command.
Dimensioning mode command equivalents Dimensioning mode command Equivalent command OBLIQUE DIMEDIT (page 291) Oblique ORDINATE DIMORDINATE (page 304) OVERRIDE DIMOVERRIDE (page 306) RADIUS DIMRADIUS (page 307) RESTORE -DIMSTYLE (page 314) Restore ROTATED DIMLINEAR (page 299) Rotated SAVE -DIMSTYLE (page 314) Save STATUS -DIMSTYLE (page 314) Status TEDIT DIMTEDIT (page 350) TROTATE DIMEDIT (page 291) Rotate UPDATE -DIMSTYLE (page 314) Apply VARIABLES -DIMSTYLE (page 314) Variables V
DIMALIGNED Creates an aligned linear dimension. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Aligned Menu: Dimension ➤ Aligned Summary Creates a linear dimension that is aligned with the origin points of the extension lines. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, its endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines.
Text Customizes the dimension text at the command prompt. The generated dimension measurement is displayed within angle brackets. Enter the dimension text, or press Enter to accept the generated measurement. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Dimensions flyout ➤ Angular Menu: Dimension ➤ Angular Summary Measures the angle between selected objects or 3 points. Objects that can be selected include arcs, circles, and lines, among others. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The dimension line is drawn as an arc between the extension lines. The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line. Circle Selection Uses the selection point (1) as the origin of the first extension line. The center of the circle is the angle vertex. The second angle endpoint is the origin of the second extension line and does not have to lie on the circle. Line Selection Defines the angle using two lines.
The dimension line is drawn as an arc between the extension lines. The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection of the dimension line. Dimension Arc Line Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. To add a prefix or a suffix, enter the prefix or suffix text before or after the generated measurement.
Quadrant Specifies the quadrant that the dimension should be locked to. When quadrant behavior is on, the dimension line is extended past the extension line when the dimension text is positioned outside of the angular dimension. See also: Create Angular Dimensions DIMARC Creates an arc length dimension. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Dimensions flyout ➤ Arc Length Menu: Dimension ➤ Arc Length List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Arc Length Dimension Location Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction of the extension lines. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1049). If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([]).
See also: Create Arc Length Dimensions DIMBASELINE Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous or selected dimension. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Continue flyout ➤ Baseline Menu: Dimension ➤ Baseline Summary The default spacing between baseline dimensions can be set from the Dimension Style Manager, Lines tab, Baseline Spacing (DIMDLI (page 1230) system variable).
Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension Otherwise, the program skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that was last created in the current session.
Select Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the baseline dimension. See also: Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions DIMBREAK Breaks or restores dimension and extension lines where they cross other objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Break Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Dimension Break Summary Dimension breaks can be added to linear, angular, and ordinate dimensions, among others.
NOTE Dimension breaks can be added to dimensions for objects that do not intersect the dimension or extension lines using the by Manual option. Multiple Specifies multiple dimensions to add breaks to or remove breaks from. Auto Places dimension breaks automatically at all the intersection points of the objects that intersect the selected dimension. Any dimension break created using this option is updated automatically when the dimension or an intersecting object is modified.
Summary The default sizes of the center mark components can be set from the Dimension Style Manager, Symbols and Arrows tab, Center Marks (DIMCEN system variable). You can choose between center marks and centerlines and specify their size when you set up the dimension style. See DIMSTYLE (page 314). You can also change center mark settings using the DIMCEN (page 1227) system variable.
Summary Applies a dimensional constraint to a selected object or converts an associative dimension to a dimensional constraint. NOTE The L option (last object drawn) is not allowed in the DIMCONSTRAINT command as the constraint behavior is dependent on where you pick the object. The following table outlines the valid constraint points for an object.
Vertical (DCVERTICAL (page 263)) Constrains the Y distance between points on an object, or between two points on different objects. Aligned (DCALIGNED (page 251)) Constrains the distance between two points on different objects. Angular (DCANGULAR (page 253)) Constrains the angle between line or polyline segments, the angle swept out by an arc or a polyline arc segment, or the angle between three points on objects. Radius (DCRADIUS (page 262)) Constrains the radius of a circle or an arc.
Summary Automatically continues creating additional dimensions from the last linear, angular, or ordinate dimension created, or from a selected extension line. The dimension lines are lined up automatically. If no dimension was created in the current session, you are prompted to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the continued dimension. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Second Extension Line Origin Uses the second extension line origin of the continued dimension for the first extension line origin of the next dimension. The current dimension style determines the appearance of the text. After you select a continued dimension, the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt is redisplayed. To end the command, press Esc. To select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the continued dimension, press Enter.
See also: Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions DIMDIAMETER Creates a diameter dimension for a circle or an arc. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Dimension flyout ➤ Diameter Menu: Dimension ➤ Diameter Summary Measures the diameter of a selected circle or arc, and displays the dimension text with a diameter symbol in front of it. You can use grips to easily reposition the resulting diameter dimension. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Dimension Line Location Determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text. If the dimension is placed off of an arc resulting in the dimension pointing outside the arc, AutoCAD for Mac automatically draws an arc extension line. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1049).
See also: Change Dimension Associativity DIMEDIT Edits dimension text and extension lines. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group (expanded) ➤ Oblique Menu: Dimension ➤ Oblique Summary Rotates, modifies, or restores dimension text. Changes the oblique angle of extension lines. The companion command that moves text and the dimension line is DIMTEDIT (page 350). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The generated measurement is represented with angle brackets (< >). Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1049). To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information, see Select and Modify Objects.
See also: Modify Dimension Text DIMINSPECT Adds or removes inspection information for a selected dimension. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Inspect Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Inspection Summary Inspection dimensions specify how frequently manufactured parts should be checked to ensure that the dimension value and tolerances of the parts are within the specified range.
See also: Convert Dimensions into Inspection Dimensions Inspection Dimension Dialog Box Allows you to add or remove an inspection dimension from selected dimensions. Summary Use the Shape and Inspection Label/Rate settings to the appearance of the frame of the inspection dimension and the inspection rate value. List of Options The following options are displayed. Select Dimensions Specifies the dimensions that an inspection dimension should be added to or removed from.
Round Creates a frame with semi-circles on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines. Angular Creates a frame with lines that form a 90-degree angle on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines. None Specifies that no frame is drawn around the values; the fields are not separated by vertical lines. Label/Inspection Rate Specifies the label text and inspection rate for an inspection dimension.
Add inspection data (page ?) or [Remove (page ?)] : Enter an option or press Enter Add Adds an inspection dimension to the selected dimensions. Round Creates a frame with semi-circles on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines. Angular Creates a frame with lines that form a 90-degree angle on the two ends; the fields within the frame are separated by vertical lines.
Creates jogged radius dimensions when the center of an arc or circle is located off the layout and cannot be displayed in its true location. The origin point of the dimension can be specified at a more convenient location called the center location override. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square brackets ([ ]). Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. Also determines the angle of the dimension line and the location of the dimension text.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select dimension to add jog (page 299) or [Remove (page 299)]: Select a linear or aligned dimension Add Jog Specifies the linear or aligned dimension to which to add a jog. You are prompted for the location of the jog.
Summary Creates a linear dimension with a horizontal, vertical, or rotated dimension line. This command replaces the DIMHORIZONTAL and DIMVERTICAL commands. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the dimension is drawn. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1049).
Horizontal Creates horizontal linear dimensions. Dimension Line Location Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. â– Mtext (page ?) â– Text (page ?) â– Angle (page ?) Vertical Creates vertical linear dimensions. Dimension Line Location Dimension Line Location (page ?) â– Mtext (page ?) â– Text (page ?) â– Angle (page ?) Rotated Creates rotated linear dimensions.
Object Selection Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension lines after you select an object. For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a non-uniformly scaled block reference. If you select a line or an arc, the line or arc endpoints are used as the origins of the extension lines.
DIMORDINATE Creates ordinate dimensions. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Dimension flyout ➤ Ordinate Menu: Dimension ➤ Ordinate Summary Ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal or vertical distance from an origin point called the datum to a feature, such as a hole in a part. These dimensions prevent escalating errors by maintaining accurate offsets of the features from the datum. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Xdatum Measures the X ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompt is displayed, where you can specify the endpoint. Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation of the leader line and dimension text. The Leader Endpoint prompts are displayed, where you can specify the endpoint. Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text.
See also: Create Ordinate Dimensions DIMOVERRIDE Controls overrides of system variables used in selected dimensions. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group (expanded) ➤ Override Menu: Dimension ➤ Override Summary Overrides a specified dimensioning system variable for selected dimensions, or clears the overrides of selected dimension objects, returning them to the settings defined by their dimension style. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
DIMRADIUS Creates a radius dimension for a circle or an arc. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Dimension flyout ➤ Radius Menu: Dimension ➤ Radius Summary Measures the radius of a selected circle or arc and displays the dimension text with a radius symbol in front of it. You can use grips to reposition the resulting radius dimension easily. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1049). If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see Select and Modify Objects.
Summary Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn, and prompts for association points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed. A marker is displayed for each association point prompt. â– If the definition point of the current dimension is not associated to a geometric object, the marker appears as an X â– If the definition point is associated, the marker appears as an X inside a box. NOTE The marker disappears if you pan or zoom. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Specify second angle endpoint : Specify an object snap location or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Angular (Two Line) Select first line : Select a line, or press Enter to skip to the next prompt Select second line : Select another line, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Diameter Select arc or circle : Select an arc or a circle, or press Enter to skip to the next dimension object, if any Leader Specify leader association point :
NOTE After opening a drawing that has been modified with a previous version, the association between dimensions and objects or points may need to be updated. You can use the DIMREASSOCIATE (page 308) command to reassociate modified dimensions with the objects or points that they dimension. See also: Associative Dimensions DIMROTATED Creates a rotated linear dimension. Summary Creates a linear dimension with a rotated dimension line. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Mtext Displays the In-Place Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text. Use control codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1049). If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see Select and Modify Objects.
DIMSPACE Adjusts the spacing between linear dimensions or angular dimensions. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Adjust Dimension Space Menu: Dimension ➤ Dimension Space Summary The spacing between parallel dimension lines is made equal. You can also make the dimension lines of a series of linear or angular dimensions line up by using a spacing value of 0. Spacing is applied only to parallel linear dimensions or to angular dimensions that share a common vertex.
Enter Spacing Value Applies a spacing value to the selected dimensions from the base dimension. For example, if you enter a value of 0.5000, all selected dimensions will be separated by a distance of 0.5000. You can use a spacing value of 0 (zero) to align the dimension lines of selected linear and angular dimensions end to end. Auto Calculates the spacing distance automatically based on the text height specified in the dimension style of the selected base dimension.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Dimension Style Displays the name of the dimension style that is current. The default dimension style is STANDARD. The current style is applied to dimensions you create. Styles Lists dimension styles in the drawing. The current style is highlighted. Right-click in the list to display a shortcut menu with options to set the current style, rename styles, and delete styles. You cannot delete a style that is current or in use in the current drawing.
New Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box (page 317), in which you can define a new dimension style. Delete Deletes the dimension style selected in the Styles list. A style that is being used in the drawing cannot be deleted. Options Manages the dimension styles in the list. Set Current Sets the style selected under Styles to current. The current style is applied to dimensions you create.
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box Names the new dimension style, sets the style on which to start the new one, and indicates the dimension types to which you want the new style to apply. List of Options The following options are displayed. New Style Name Specifies the new dimension style name. Start With Sets a style to use as a basis for the new one. For the new style, you change only the properties that differ from the properties you start with.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes Set properties for dimension styles. Summary When you choose Continue in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, the New Dimension Style dialog box is displayed. You define the properties for the new style in this dialog box. The dialog box initially displays the properties of the dimension style that you selected to start the new style in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box.
Summary Sets the dimension line properties. List of Options The following options are displayed. Dimension Lines Color Displays and sets the color for the dimension line. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Color Palette dialog box (page 198) is displayed. You can also enter a color name or number. (DIMCLRD (page 1227) system variable) Linetype Sets the linetype of the dimension line. (DIMLTYPE (page 1236) system variable) Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the dimension line.
Specifies a distance to extend the dimension line past the extension line when you use oblique, architectural, tick, integral, and no marks for arrowheads. (DIMDLE (page 1229) system variable) Baseline Spacing Sets the spacing between the dimension lines of a baseline dimension. Enter a distance. For information about baseline dimensions, see DIMBASELINE (page 280). (DIMDLI (page 1230) system variable) Suppress Suppresses display of dimension lines.
Sets the linetype of the first extension line. (DIMLTEX1 (page 1235) system variable) Linetype Ext Line 2 Sets the linetype of the second extension line. (DIMLTEX2 (page 1236) system variable) Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the extension line. (DIMLWE (page 1237) system variable) Suppress Suppresses the display of extension lines. Extension Line 1 suppresses the first extension line; Extension Line 2 suppresses the second extension line.
Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin. (DIMFXL (page 1232) system variable) Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. See also: Use Dimension Styles Symbols and Arrows Tab Sets the format and placement for arrowheads, center marks, arc length symbols, and jogged radius dimensions.
Summary Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads. List of Options The following options are displayed. Arrowheads First Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line. When you change the first arrowhead type, the second arrowhead automatically changes to match it. (DIMBLK1 (page 1226) system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block.
To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.) Leader Sets the arrowhead for the leader line. (DIMLDRBLK (page 1234) system variable) To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead block. (The block must be in the drawing.
Size Displays and sets the size of the center mark or centerline. (DIMCEN system variable) Radius Jog Dimension Controls the display of jogged (zigzag) radius dimensions. Jogged radius dimensions are often created when the center point of a circle or arc is located off the page. Jog Angle Determines the angle of the transverse segment of the dimension line in a jogged radius dimension.
Linear Jog Dimension Controls the display of the jog for linear dimensions. Jog lines are often added to linear dimensions when the actual measurement is not accurately represent by the dimension. Typically the actual measurement is smaller than the desired value. Jog Height Factor Determines the height of the of the jog, which is determined by the distance between the two vertices of the angles that make up the jog.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Text Appearance Controls the dimension text format and size. Text Style Lists the available text styles. Text Style Button Displays the Text Style Dialog Box (page 1006) where you can create or modify text styles. (DIMTXSTY system variable) Text Color Sets the color for the dimension text. If you click Select Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Color Palette dialog box (page 198) is displayed. You can also enter color name or number.
displayed. You can also enter color name or number. (DIMTFILL (page 1244) and DIMTFILLCLR (page 1245) system variables) Text Height Sets the height of the current dimension text style. Enter a value in the text box. If a fixed text height is set in the Text Style (that is, the text style height is greater than 0), that height overrides the text height set here. If you want to use the height set on the Text tab, make sure the text height in the Text Style is set to 0.
Horizontal Controls the horizontal placement of dimension text along the dimension line, in relation to the extension lines. (DIMJUST (page 1233) system variable) Horizontal position options include the following: â– Centered: Centers the dimension text along the dimension line between the extension lines. â– At Ext Line 1: Left-justifies the text with the first extension line along the dimension line. The distance between the extension line and the text is twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value.
View Direction Controls the dimension text viewing direction. (DIMTXTDIRECTION (page 1251) system variable) View Direction includes the following options: â– Left-to-Right: Places the text to enable reading from left to right. â– Right-to-Left: Places the text to enable reading from right to left. Offset from Dim Line Sets the current text gap, which is the distance around the dimension text when the dimension line is broken to accommodate the dimension text.
Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. See also: Use Dimension Styles Fit Tab Controls the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines, and the dimension line. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Fit Options Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the space available between the extension lines. When space is available, text and arrowheads are placed between the extension lines. Otherwise, text and arrowheads are placed according to the Fit options.
Moves text outside the extension lines first, then arrowheads (DIMATFIT (page 1223) system variable). â– When space is available for text and arrowheads, places both between the extension lines. â– When space is available for text only, places the text between the extension lines and places arrowheads outside them. â– When not enough space is available for text, places both text and arrowheads outside the extension lines.
Over the Dimension Line, with Leader If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved. If text is moved away from the dimension line, a leader line is created connecting the text to the dimension line. The leader line is omitted when text is too close to the dimension line. (DIMTMOVE (page 1247) system variable) Over the Dimension Line, Without Leader If selected, dimension lines are not moved when text is moved.
Ignores any horizontal justification settings and places the text at the position you specify at the Dimension Line Location prompt. (DIMUPT (page 1252) system variable) Draw Dim Line Between Ext Lines Draws dimension lines between the measured points even when the arrowheads are placed outside the measured points. (DIMTOFL (page 1247) system variable) Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Linear Dimensions Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions. Unit Format Sets the current units format for all dimension types except Angular. (DIMLUNIT (page 1236) system variable) The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on the DIMTFAC (page 1244) system variable (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision Displays and sets the number of decimal places in the dimension text.
Suffix Includes a suffix in the dimension text. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, entering the text mm results in dimension text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. (DIMPOST (page 1238) system variable) If you specify tolerances, the suffix is added to the tolerances as well as to the main dimension. For more information, see Control Codes and Special Characters (page 1049).
Includes a suffix to the dimension value sub unit. You can enter text or use control codes to display special symbols. For example, enter cm for .96m to display as 96cm. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
See also: Use Dimension Styles Alternate Units Tab Specifies display of alternate units in dimension measurements and sets their format and precision. List of Options The following options are displayed. Display Alternate Units Adds alternate measurement units to dimension text. Sets the DIMALT (page 1216) system variable to 1. Alternate Units Displays and sets the current alternate units format for all dimension types except Angular.
Sets the unit format for alternate units. (DIMALTU (page 1218) system variable) The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are based on DIMTFAC (page 1244) (in the same way that tolerance values use this system variable). Precision Sets the number of decimal places for alternate units. (DIMALTD (page 1216) system variable) Multiplier for Alt Units Specifies the multiplier used as the conversion factor between primary and alternate units. For example, to convert inches to millimeters, enter 25.4.
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMALTZ (page 1219) system variable) Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Sub-units factor Sets the number of sub units to a unit. It is used to calculate the dimension distance in a sub unit when the distance is less than one unit. For example, enter 100 if the suffix is m and the sub-unit suffix is to display in cm.
Preview Displays sample dimension images that show the effects of changes you make to dimension style settings. See also: Use Dimension Styles Tolerances Tab Specifies the display and format of dimension text tolerances. List of Options The following options are displayed. Tolerance Format Controls the tolerance format.
Sets the method for calculating the tolerance. (DIMTOL (page 1248) system variable) â– None: Does not add a tolerance. The DIMTOL (page 1248) system variable is set to 0. â– Symmetrical: Adds a plus/minus expression of tolerance in which a single value of variation is applied to the dimension measurement. A plus-or-minus sign appears after the dimension. Enter the tolerance value in Upper Value. The DIMTOL (page 1248) system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM (page 1235) system variable is set to 0.
Sets the number of decimal places. (DIMTDEC (page 1244) system variable) Upper Value Sets the maximum or upper tolerance value. When you select Symmetrical in Method, this value is used for the tolerance. (DIMTP (page 1249) system variable) Lower Value Sets the minimum or lower tolerance value. (DIMTM (page 1246) system variable) Scaling for Height Sets the current height for the tolerance text.
Values are stacked by their decimal separators. Operational Symbols Values are stacked by their operational symbols. Suppress Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. (DIMTZIN (page 1251) system variable) Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string conversions performed by ® the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions. Leading Zeros Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30. 0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is less than 1 foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2". 0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches dimension when the distance is an integral number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Summary You can output the results of the comparison to the Clipboard, and then paste to other applications. List of Options The following options are displayed. Compare Specifies the first dimension style for the comparison. With Specifies the second dimension style for the comparison. If you set the second style to or to the same style as the first, all the properties of the dimension style are displayed.
Summary You can save or restore dimensioning system variables to a selected dimension style. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current dimension style: Annotative: Enter a dimension style option [ANnotative (page ?)/Save (page ?)/Restore (page ?)/STatus (page ?)/Variables (page ?)/Apply (page ?)/? (page ?)] : Enter an option or press Enter Annotative Creates an annotative dimension style.
the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. Only settings that differ are displayed, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in the second column. After the differences are displayed, the previous prompt returns. ?—List Dimension Styles Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing. Select Dimension Makes the dimension style of the selected object the current dimension style. Status Displays the current values of all dimension system variables.
DIMTEDIT Moves and rotates dimension text and relocates the dimension line. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group (expanded) ➤ Text Angle Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group (expanded) ➤ Left Justify, Center Justify, Right Justify Menu: Dimension ➤ Align Text ➤ Angle Summary The companion command that edits the dimension text and changes the extension line angle is DIMEDIT. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Right Right-justifies the dimension text along the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radius, and diameter dimensions. Center Centers the dimension text on the dimension line. This option works only with linear, radius, and diameter dimensions. Home Moves the dimension text back to its default position.
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text. The center point of the text does not change. If the text moves or the dimension is regenerated, the orientation set by the text angle is retained. Entering an angle of 0 degrees puts the text in its default orientation. The text angle is measured from the X axis of the UCS. See also: Modify Dimension Text DIST Measures the distance and angle between two points.
Summary In general, the DIST command reports 3D distances in model space and 2D distances on a layout in paper space. In model space, changes in X, Y, and Z component distances and angles are measured in 3D relative to the current UCS. In paper space, distances are normally reported in 2D paper space units. However, when using object snaps on model space objects that are displayed in a single viewport, distances are reported as 2D model space distances projected onto a plane parallel to your screen.
DISTANTLIGHT Creates a distant light. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Lights tool group (expanded) ➤ Distant Light Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Light ➤ New Distant Light List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify light direction FROM <0,0,0> or [Vector]: Specify a point or enterv Specify light direction TO <1,1,1>: Specify a point If you enter the Vector option, the following prompt is displayed: Specify vector direction <0.0000,-0.0100,1.
Name Specifies the name of the light. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, hyphens (-), and underscores (_) in the name. The maximum length is 256 characters. Intensity/Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect.
Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Specifies the amount of memory that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Specifies the softness to use to calculate the shadow map. Color/Filter Color Controls the color of the light. True Color Specifies a True Color.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select object to divide: Use an object selection method Enter number of segments (page ?) or [Block (page ?)]: Enter a value from 2 through 32,767, or enter b Number of Segments Places point objects at equal intervals along the selected objects. Use DDPTYPE (page 266) to set the style and size of all point objects in a drawing. Block Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object.
See also: Divide an Object into Equal Segments DONUT Creates a filled circle or a wide ring. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Donut Menu: Draw ➤ Donut Summary A donut consists of two arc polylines that are joined end-to-end to create a circular shape. The width of the polylines is determined by the specified inside and outside diameters. To create solid-filled circles, specify an inside diameter of zero.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify inside diameter of donut : Specify a distance or press Enter If you specify an inside diameter of 0, the donut is a filled circle. Specify outside diameter of donut : Specify a distance or press Enter Specify center of donut or : Specify a point (1) or press Enter to end the command The location of the donut is set based on the center point.
Access Method Command entry: 'dragmode for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter new value [ON (page 360)/OFF (page 360)/Auto (page 360)] : Enter an option or press Enter On Permits dragging, but you must enter drag where appropriate in a drawing or editing command to initiate dragging. Off Ignores all dragging requests, including those embedded in menu items. Auto Turns on dragging for every command that supports it.
Summary Opens the Files Recovered dialog box (page 361). See also: Recover from a System Failure Files Recovered Dialog Box Displays a list of all drawing files that were open at the time of a program or system failure. Summary You can preview and open each drawing or backup file to choose which one should be saved as the primary DWG file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Backup Files Displays the drawings that may need to be recovered after a program or system failure.
Reveal in Finder Opens Finder to the location of the selected drawing or backup file. Select All Selects all the drawing or backup files that can be recovered. Select None Deselects all the currently selected drawing or backup files. Select Most Recent Selects the most recent drawing or backup files that can be recovered. All other files are deselected. Delete File Moves the selected file to the Trash. Applies to SV$ or BAK files only.
Summary Use the DRAWORDERCTL system variable to control the default display behavior of overlapping objects. In addition, the TEXTTOFRONT command brings all text and dimensions in a drawing in front of other objects, and the HATCHTOBACK command sends all hatch objects behind other objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap Mode, Grid Display, Polar Tracking, Object Snap, Object Snap Tracking, or Dynamic Input on the status bar. Choose Settings. Summary The Drafting Settings dialog box (page 364) is displayed. See also: Use Precision Tools Drafting Settings Dialog Box Specifies drafting settings organized for drawing aids. Summary The following categories are available.
Snap On Turns Snap mode on or off. You can also turn Snap mode on or off by clicking Snap on the status bar, by pressing F9, or by using the SNAPMODE (page 1440) system variable. Snap Spacing Controls an invisible, rectangular grid of snap locations that restricts cursor movement to specified X and Y intervals. Snap X Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the X direction. The value must be a positive real number.
Forces the X and Y spacing to the same values for snap spacing and for grid spacing. The snap spacing intervals can be different from the grid spacing intervals. Polar Spacing Controls the PolarSnap™ increment distance. Polar Distance Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is selected under Snap Type & Style. If this value is 0, the PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X Spacing. The Polar Distance setting is used in conjunction with polar tracking and/or object snap tracking.
Dot Grid in 2D Model Space Sets the grid style to dotted grid for 2D model space. (GRIDSTYLE (page 1307) system variable) Dot Grid in Paper Space Sets the grid style to dotted grid for sheet and layout. (GRIDSTYLE (page 1307) system variable) Grid Spacing Controls the display of a grid that helps you visualize distances. NOTE The limits of the grid are controlled by the LIMITS (page 573) command and the GRIDDISPLAY (page 1305) system variable. Grid X Spacing Specifies the grid spacing in the X direction.
Changes the grid plane to follow the XY plane of the dynamic UCS. (GRIDDISPLAY (page 1305) system variable) Polar Tracking Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls the AutoTrack settings. Polar Tracking On Turns polar tracking on and off. You can also turn polar tracking on or off by pressing F10 or by using the AUTOSNAP (page 1180) system variable. Polar Angle Settings Sets the alignment angles for polar tracking.
Makes any additional angles in the list available for polar tracking. The Additional Angles check box is also controlled by the POLARMODE (page 1401) system variable, and the list of additional angles is also controlled by the POLARADDANG (page 1399) system variable. NOTE Additional angles are absolute, not incremental. List of Angles If Additional Angles is selected, lists the additional angles that are available. To add new angles, click New. To remove existing angles, click Delete.
Bases polar tracking angles on the current user coordinate system (UCS). Relative to Last Segment Bases polar tracking angles on the last segment drawn. Object Snap Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls running object snap settings. With running object snap settings, also called Osnap, you can specify a snap point at an exact location on an object. When more than one option is selected, the selected snap modes are applied to return a point closest to the center of the aperture box.
specifying points in a command. To use object snap tracking, you must turn on one or more object snaps. (AUTOSNAP (page 1180) system variable) Object Snap Modes Lists object snaps that you can turn on as running object snaps. Endpoint Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline segment, spline, region, or ray, or to the closest corner of a trace, solid, or 3D face.
Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc. Intersection Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region, spline, or xline. Extended Intersection is not available as a running object snap. Intersection and Extended Intersection do not work with edges or corners of 3D solids. NOTE You might get varying results if you have both the Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object snaps turned on at the same time.
Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines between such objects. When the aperture box passes over a Deferred Perpendicular snap point, an AutoSnap tooltip and marker are displayed. Tangent Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, or spline. Deferred Tangent snap mode is automatically turned on when the object you are drawing requires that you complete more than one tangent snap.
Parallel Constrains a line segment, polyline segment, ray or xline to be parallel to another linear object. After you specify the first point of a linear object, specify the parallel object snap. Unlike other object snap modes, you move the cursor and hover over another linear object until the angle is acquired. Then, move the cursor back toward the object that you are creating.
3D Object Snap On Turns 3D object snaps on and off. The 3D object snaps selected under 3D Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on. (3DOSMODE (page 1165) system variable) 3D Object Snap Modes Lists the 3D object snaps modes. Vertex Snaps to the closest vertex of a 3D object.
Midpoint on Edge Snaps to the midpoint of a face edge.
Snaps to the center of a face. Knot Snaps to a knot on a spline.
Perpendicular Snaps to a point perpendicular to a face. Nearest to Face Snaps to a point that is nearest to a 3D object face.
Select All Turns on all 3D object snap modes. Clear All Turns off all 3D object snap modes. Dynamic Input Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box) Controls pointer input, dimension input, dynamic prompting, and the appearance of drafting tooltips.
Enable Pointer Input Turns on pointer input. When pointer input and dimensional input are both turned on, dimensional input supersedes pointer input when it is available. (DYNMODE (page 1279) system variable) Pointer Input Displays the location of the crosshairs as coordinate values in a tooltip near the cursor. When a command prompts you for a point, you can enter coordinate values in the tooltip instead of in the Command window. Preview Area Shows an example of pointer input.
Displays the Pointer Input Settings dialog box (page 382). Enable Dimension Input where Possible Turns on dimensional input. Dimensional input is not available for some commands that prompt for a second point. (DYNMODE (page 1279) system variable) Dimension Input Displays a dimension with tooltips for distance value and angle value when a command prompts you for a second point or a distance. The values in the dimension tooltips change as you move the cursor.
Pointer Input Settings Dialog Box Controls the settings of pointer input tooltips. List of Options The following options are displayed. Format Controls coordinate format in the tooltips that are displayed when pointer input is turned on. Polar Format Displays the tooltip for the second or next point in polar coordinate format. Enter a comma (,) to change to Cartesian format.
Always—Even When Not in a Command Always displays tooltips when pointer input is turned on. (DYNPIVIS (page 1281) system variable) See also: Use Dynamic Input Dimension Input Settings Dialog Box Controls the settings of dimension input tooltips. List of Options The following options are displayed. Visibility Controls which tooltips are displayed during grip stretching when dimensional input is turned on.
Angle Change Displays the change in the angle as you move the grip. Arc Radius Displays the radius of an arc, which is updated as you move the grip. See also: Use Dynamic Input Tooltip Appearance Dialog Box Controls the appearance of tooltips. Summary Use the TOOLTIPMERGE (page 1469) system variable to combine drafting tooltips into a single tooltip. For more information about tooltips, see Set Interface Options. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Applies the settings only to the drafting tooltips used in Dynamic Input. See also: Use Dynamic Input DVIEW Defines parallel projection or perspective views by using a camera and target. Summary NOTE Transparent ZOOM (page 1153) and PAN (page 763) are not available in DVIEW. When you define a perspective view, ZOOM, PAN, transparent ZOOM and PAN are not available while that view is current. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects (page ?) or
1 unit by 1 unit area, with its origin at the lower-left corner. The following illustration shows an example of using the default DVIEWBLOCK to set the view (moving the graphics cursor adjusts the view). Point Specification Rolls the view under the camera. The point you select with your pointing device is a start point for the dragging operation. Your viewing direction changes about the target point as you move the pointing device. The angles must be positive.
Enter Angle in XY Plane from X Axis Sets the position at an angle in the XY plane relative to the X axis of the current UCS. This angle measures from -180 to 180 degrees. A rotation angle of 0 degrees looks down the X axis of the UCS toward the origin. The illustration shows the camera rotating to the left from its initial position, leaving its angle from the XY plane unchanged. Toggle (Angle From) Switches between two angle input modes.
Toggle (Angle From) Toggle (Angle From) (page 387) Distance Moves the camera in or out along the line of sight relative to the target. This option turns on perspective viewing, which causes objects farther from the camera to appear smaller than those closer to the camera. A special perspective icon replaces the coordinate system icon. You are prompted for the new camera-to-target distance. A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current distance.
The illustration shows the effect of moving the camera along the line of sight relative to the target, where the field of view remains constant. Points Locates the camera and target points using X,Y,Z coordinates. You can use XYZ point filters. To help you define a new line of sight, a rubber-band line is drawn from the current camera position to the crosshairs. You are prompted for a new camera location.
For information about entering direction and magnitude angles, see Point Specification. Pan Shifts the image without changing the level of magnification. Zoom If perspective viewing is off, dynamically increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport. A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with 1x representing the current scale. Moving the slider bar to the right increases the scale. Moving it to the left decreases the scale.
Twist Twists or tilts the view around the line of sight. The twist angle is measured counterclockwise, with 0 degrees to the right. Clip Clips the view, obscuring portions of the drawing that are behind or in front of the front clipping plane. The front and back clipping planes are invisible walls that you can position perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and target. Back Obscures objects located behind the back clipping plane. â– Distance from Target.
Front Obscures objects located between the camera and the front clipping plane. â– Distance from Target.Positions the front clipping plane and turns on front clipping. A positive distance places the clipping plane between the target and the camera. A negative distance places it beyond the target. You can use the slider bar to drag the clipping plane. â– Eye. Positions the front clipping plane at the camera. â– On. Turns on front clipping. This option is available only when perspective viewing is off.
DXBIN Imports an AutoCAD DXB (drawing interchange binary) file. Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ Drawing Exchange Binary Summary AutoCAD DXB files contain only 2D vectors in binary format with 16-bit integer precision. These vectors are imported as line objects, and they assume the current layer and object properties. The Select DXB File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed. Enter the name of the file to import.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select a block: After you select a block with attributes, the Enhanced Attribute Editor (page 394) is displayed. See also: Modify a Block Attribute Definition Enhanced Attribute Editor Lists the attributes in a selected block instance and displays the properties of each attribute.
List Lists the attributes in the selected block instance and displays the tag, prompt, and value for each attribute. Value Assigns a new value to the selected attribute. Single-line attributes include a button to insert a field. When clicked, the Field dialog box (page 429) is displayed. Multiple-line attributes include a button with an ellipsis. Click to open the In-Place Text Editor (page 675) with the ruler.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that the attribute text is slanted away from its vertical axis. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Width Factor Sets the character spacing for the attribute text. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.
Backwards Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed backwards. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Upside Down Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed upside down. Not available for multiple-line attributes. Annotative Specifies that the attribute is annotative. Click the information icon to learn more about annotative objects. Justification Specifies how the attribute text is justified (left-, center-, or right-justified).
Linetype Specifies the linetype of the attribute. Color Specifies the color of the attribute. Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the attribute. Changes you make to this option are not displayed if the LWDISPLAY (page 1365) system variable is off. Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute. If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles, the Plot Style list is not available. See also: Modify a Block Attribute Definition EDGE Changes the visibility of 3D face edges.
If the edges of one or more 3D faces are collinear, the program alters the visibility of each collinear edge. Display Selects invisible edges of 3D faces so that you can redisplay them. All Selects the hidden edges of all 3D faces in the drawing and displays them. If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible once again, use the Edge option. You must select each edge with your pointing device to display it.
Summary Select four adjoining edges that define the mesh. The edges can be lines, arcs, splines, or open polylines. The edges must touch at their endpoints to form a single, closed loop. You can select the four edges in any order. The first edge (SURFTAB1 (page 1454)) determines the M direction of the generated mesh, which extends from the endpoint closest to the selection point to the other end. The two edges that touch the first edge form the N edges (SURFTAB2 (page 1454)) of the mesh.
Edit PGP Opens the Program Parameters (PGP) text file that defines command abbreviations Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Customize ➤ Edit Command Aliases (PGP) Summary Commands can have abbreviated names called command aliases that you can enter at the Command prompt. Command aliases are defined in the PGP file. If you edit the PGP file while the program is running, enter RE-INIT and then a value of 16 to use the revised file. You can also restart the program to reload the file automatically.
ELEV controls only new objects; it does not affect existing objects. The elevation is reset to 0.0 whenever you change the coordinate system to the world coordinate system (WCS). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify New Default Elevation The current elevation is the default Z value for new objects when you specify only X and Y values for a 3D point. The elevation setting is the same for all viewports regardless of their user coordinate systems (UCS definitions).
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group ➤ Ellipse flyout ➤ Center Menu: Draw ➤ Ellipse ➤ Center Summary The first two points of the ellipse determine the location and length of the first axis. The third point determines the distance between the center of the ellipse and the end point of the second axis. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines a circular ellipse. Arc Creates an elliptical arc. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the elliptical arc. The first axis can define either the major or the minor axis depending on its size. The first two points of the elliptical arc determine the location and length of the first axis.
Parameter Requires the same input as Start Angle, but creates the elliptical arc using the following parametric vector equation: p(u) = c + a * cos(u) + b * sin(u) where c is the center of the ellipse and a and b are its major and minor axes, respectively. â– End Parameter: Defines the end angle of the elliptical arc by using a parametric vector equation. The Start Parameter option toggles from Angle mode to Parameter mode. The mode controls how the ellipse is calculated.
Isocircle Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane. NOTE The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP (page 952) to Isometric. Radius Creates a circle using a radius you specify. Diameter Creates a circle using a diameter you specify. Specify diameter of isocircle: Specify a distance See also: Draw Ellipses ERASE Removes objects from a drawing.
Instead of selecting objects to erase, you can enter an option, such as L to erase the last object drawn, p to erase the previous selection set, or ALL to erase all objects. You can also enter ? to get a list of all options. See also: Erase Objects EXPLODE Breaks a compound object into its component objects.
The color, linetype, and lineweight of any exploded object might change. Other results differ depending on the type of compound object you're exploding. See the following list of objects that can be exploded and the results for each. To explode objects and change their properties at the same time, use XPLODE (page 1149). ® NOTE If you're using a script or an ObjectARX function, you can explode only one object at a time. 2D and Lightweight Polyline Discards any associated width or tangent information.
Block Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block contains a polyline or a nested block, exploding the block exposes the polyline or nested block object, which must then be exploded to expose its individual objects. Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their component objects. Blocks with unequal X, Y, and Z scales (nonuniformly scaled blocks) might explode into unexpected objects.
EXPORT Saves the objects in a drawing to a different file format. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Export Summary The Export Data dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed. If you do not see the file format that you need in the Files of Type drop-down list, also check the PLOT command for other file types, including PDF.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Extend Menu: Modify ➤ Extend Summary To extend objects, first select the boundaries. Then press Enter and select the objects that you want to extend. To use all objects as boundaries, press Enter at the first Select Objects prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current Select boundary edges...
Shift-Select to Trim Trims the selected objects to the nearest boundary rather than extending them. This is an easy method to switch between trimming and extending. Fence Selects all objects that cross the selection fence. The selection fence is a series of temporary line segments that you specify with two or more fence points. The selection fence does not form a closed loop. Crossing Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points.
View Specifies projection along the current view direction. Edge Extends the object to another object's implied edge, or only to an object that actually intersects it in 3D space. Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space. No Extend Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary object that actually intersects it in 3D space.
Undo Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND. See also: Trim or Extend Objects EXTERNALREFERENCES Opens the Reference Manager palette. Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ References Manager Summary The EXTERNALREFERENCES command opens the Reference Manager palette (page 414) when the palette is closed. NOTE The FILEDIA (page 1296) system variable is ignored when attaching files from the Reference Manager palette.
Summary The Reference Manager palette organizes, displays, and manages referenced files, such as DWG files (xrefs) and raster images. The Reference Manager palette contains a toolbar along the top. You can right-click over the files list to display a shortcut menu that allows you to attach or manage an attached external reference. Click the Show Details button on the toolbar to view details and thumbnail preview for the selected external reference.
See also: Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings Reference Manager Palette Toolbar Use the toolbar at the top of the Reference Manager palette to attach a drawing and to refresh the status of a referenced file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Attach Reference Displays the Select Reference File dialog box. Select the file format you want to attach and then the file you want to attach to the drawing. You can attach the following reference file types: â– DWG files.
See also: Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings File References Panel Shortcut Menus When working in the File References panel, there are several shortcut menus that can be displayed when you right-click on a file reference or an empty area. The following tables show the shortcut menu items that you are presented under certain conditions.
No File Reference Selected When no file reference is selected, the shortcut menu presents the following functions: Menu Item Description Attach Reference Displays the Select Reference File dialog box. Reload All References Reloads all file referenced files attached to the current drawing. (Unavailable if no file references are attached.
Menu Item Description Reference Status Unavailable when Unloaded, Not Found or Unresolved. Attach Switches the selected DWG file reference to the Attach attachment type. Always available for DWG file references - status has no affect on this function. Overlay Switches the selected DWG file reference to the Overlay attachment type. Always available for DWG file references - status has no affect on this function. Unload Unloads the selected file references.
Menu Item Description Reference Status ing drawings, no name-incrementing occurs if a local named object shares the same name as a bound xref-dependent named object. The bound xref-dependent named object assumes the properties of the locally defined named object. Detach Detaches the selected file reference. Available for all file references types.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Details Each file reference shares a common set of properties. Referenced images, display additional properties specific to the file type. The common set of details displayed for each file reference is name, status, file size, file type, creation date, saved path, and found at path. Some of the properties can be edited. Reference Name Displays the file reference name. This property is editable for all file reference types.
Date Displays the last date the file reference was modified. This date is not displayed if the file reference is not found. This property cannot be edited. Saved Path Shows the saved path of the selected file reference (this is not necessarily where the file reference is found). This property cannot be edited. Found At Displays the full path of the currently selected file reference. This is where the referenced file is actually found and is not necessarily the same as the saved path.
EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE Closes the Reference Manager palette. Summary The EXTERNALREFERENCESCLOSE command closes the Reference Managers palette when currently displayed. See also: Attach and Detach Referenced Drawings EXTRUDE Creates a 3D solid or surface by extending the dimensions of an object.
You can extrude either an open or closed object to create a 3D surface or solid. If you extrude a surface, you will create a regular surface or a NURBS surface depending on how the SURFACEMODELINGMODE (page 1453) system variable is set. To extrude meshes, use the MESHEXTRUDE (page 632) command.
Object type Can be extruded? Can be extrusion path? Elliptical arcs X X Helixes Comments X Lines X X Meshes: faces X Meshes: edges X X 2D Polylines X X 3D Polylines X X Regions X 2D Solids X 3D Solids: edges X 3D Solids: faces X Splines: 2D and 3D X X Surfaces: edges X X Surfaces: planar and non-planar X X 2D polylines with crossing segments cannot be extruded. Thickness and width are ignored. The extrusion extends from the center line.
Object type Can be extruded? Traces X Can be extrusion path? Comments List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Objects to Extrude Specifies the objects to extrude. NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them. Mode Controls whether the extruded object is a solid or a surface. Surfaces are extruded as either NURBS surfaces or procedural surfaces, depending on the SURFACEMODELINGMODE (page 1453) system variable.
Path Specifies the extrusion path based on a selected object. The path is moved to the centroid of the profile. Then the profile of the selected object is extruded along the chosen path to create solids or surfaces. NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them. The path should not lie on the same plane as the object, nor should the path have areas of high curvature. The extrusion starts from the plane of the object and maintains its orientation relative to the path.
Individual loops of a region are always extruded to the same height. When an arc is part of a tapered extrusion, the angle of the arc remains constant, and the radius of the arc changes. â– Angle of taper. Specifies the taper between -90 and +90 degrees. â– Specify two points. Specifies the taper angle based on two specified points. The taper angle is the distance between the two specified points. Drag the cursor horizontally to specify and preview the taper angle.
Summary Fields can be inserted in any kind of text except tolerances. The FIELDEVAL system variable and the UPDATEFIELD command determine how fields are updated. The Insert Field dialog box (page 429) is displayed. See also: Use Fields in Text Insert Field Dialog Box Inserts a field in the drawing. Summary The options available change based on the selected field category and field name. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Field Names Lists the fields that are available in a category. Select a field name to display the options available for that field. Field Value Displays the current value of the field, or displays an empty string (----) if the field value is invalid. The label for this item changes with the field name. For example, when Filename is selected in the Field Names list, the label is Filename and the value is the name of the current drawing file. The label is Property for object fields.
Additional Format Displays the Additional Format dialog box (page 1034). See also: Use Fields in Text FILL Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, 2D solids, and wide polylines. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter mode [ON (page 431)/OFF (page 431)] : Enter on or off, or press Enter On Turns on Fill mode. For the filling of a 3D object to be visible, its extrusion direction must be parallel to the current viewing direction, and hidden lines must not be suppressed.
FILLET Rounds and fillets the edges of objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Fillet Menu: Modify ➤ Fillet Summary In the example, an arc is created that is tangent to both of the selected lines. The lines are trimmed to the ends of the arc. To create a sharp corner instead, enter a radius of zero. You can fillet arcs, circles, ellipses, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays, splines, and xlines. You can also fillet 3D solids and surfaces.
First Object Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet or selects the edge of a 3D solid to round or fillet the edge. Select second object or shift-select to apply corner: Use an object selection method or hold down Shift and select an object to create a sharp corner If you select lines, arcs, or polylines, their lengths adjust to accommodate the fillet arc. You can hold down Shift while selecting the objects to override the current fillet radius with a value of 0.
If you select a 3D solid, you can select multiple edges, but you must select the edges individually. Enter fillet radius : Specify a distance or press Enter Select an edge or [Chain/Loop/Radius]: Select edge(s), enter c, l, or r Edge Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press Enter.
Edge Chain Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select a single edge. For example, if you select an edge on the top of a 3D solid box, FILLET also selects the other tangential edges on the top. Edge Switches to a single-edge selection mode. Loop Specifies a loop of edges on the face of a solid. For any edge, there are two possible loops. After selecting a loop edge, you are prompted to Accept the current selection, or choose the Next loop. Radius Defines the radius of the rounded edge.
Multiple Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects. See also: Create Fillets FILLETEDGE Rounds and fillets the edges of solid objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group ➤ Fillet Edge Menu: Modify ➤ Solid Editing ➤ Fillet Edges Summary You can select more than one edge. Enter a value for the fillet radius or click and drag the fillet grip. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Chain Specifies more than one edge when the edges are tangent to one another. Loop Specifies a loop of edges on the face of a solid. For any edge, there are two possible loops. After selecting a loop edge you are prompted to Accept the current selection or choose the Next loop. Radius Specifies a radius value. See also: Create Fillets Modify Edges on 3D Objects FIND Finds the text that you specify, and can optionally replace it with other text.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Where to Check Specifies whether to search the entire drawing, the current layout, or the currently-selected object. If an object is already selected, then Selected Objects is the default value. If no object is selected, then Entire Drawing is the default value. You can use the Select Objects button to temporarily close the dialog box and create or modify the selection set. Find What Specifies the text string you want to find.
Replace Replaces found text with the text that you enter in Replace With and moves to the next instance of the found text if one exists. Replace All Finds all instances of the text that you enter in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. The Where to Check setting controls whether to find and replace text in the entire drawing or text in the currently selected object or objects. Find Finds the text that you enter in Find What.
Match Diacritics Matches diacritical marks, or accents, in search results. Match Half or Full Width Forms Matches half- and full-width characters in search results. Text Types Specifies the type of text objects you want to include in the search. By default, all options are selected. Block Attribute Value Includes block attribute text values in search results. Dimension or Leader Text Includes dimension and leader object text in search results.
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Section tool group ➤ Flatshot Summary The Flatshot dialog box (page 441) is displayed. The edges of all 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes are projected line-of-sight onto a plane parallel to the viewing plane. The 2D representations of these edges are inserted as a block on the XY plane of the UCS. This block can be exploded for additional changes. See also: Create a Flattened View Flatshot Dialog Box Creates a 2D representation of all 3D objects based on the current view.
Summary The edges of all 3D solids and surfaces are projected line-of-sight onto a plane parallel to the viewing plane. The 2D representations of these edges are inserted as a block on the XY plane of the UCS. This block can be exploded for additional changes. The result can also be saved as a separate drawing file. List of Options The following options are displayed. Destination Controls where the flattened representation is created.
Closes the dialog box temporarily while you select the block you are replacing in the drawing. When you finish selecting the block, press Enter to re-display the Flatshot dialog box. Block Selected / No Block Selected Indicates whether a block has been selected. Export to a File Saves the block to an external file. Foreground Lines Contains controls for setting the color and linetype of lines that are not obscured in the flattened view.
FREESPOT Creates free spotlight which is similar to a spotlight without a specified target. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Falloff Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light, which is also known as the field angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees. The default is 50 degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS (page 1177). The falloff angle must be greater than or equal to the hotspot angle. Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect. Photometry Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2.
Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Map Size Specifies the amount of memory that should be used to calculate the shadow map. Softness Specifies the softness that should be used to calculate the shadow map.
Attenuation End Limit Specifies the point where light ends as an offset from the center of the light. No light is cast beyond this point. Setting an end limit increases performance where the effect of lighting is so minimal that the calculations are wasted processing time. Color/Filter Color Controls the color of the light. True Color Specifies a True Color. Enter in the format R,G,B (red, green, blue). Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color.
Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect. Photometry Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources.
X Specifies the X rotation for the web. Y Specifies the Y rotation for the web. Z Specifies the Z rotation for the web. Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance. Soft Mapped Displays realistic shadows with soft edges. Specifies the amount of memory to use to calculate the shadow map.
G Commands GCCOINCIDENT Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a curve). Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric Constraints flyout ➤ Coincident Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Coincident Summary This command is equivalent to the Coincident option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 464). A constraint point on an object can be made coincident with an object or a constraint point on another object.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select first point (page ?) or [Object (page ?)/Autoconstrain (page ?)]
GCCOLLINEAR Causes two or more line segments to lie along the same line. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric Constraints flyout ➤ Collinear Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Collinear Summary This command is equivalent to the Collinear option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 464). Following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■Line ■Polyline segment ■Ellipse ■Multiline text List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints GCCONCENTRIC Constrains two arcs, circles, or ellipses to the same center point. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric Constraints flyout ➤ Concentric Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Concentric Summary This command is equivalent to the Concentric option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 464).
See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints GCEQUAL Resizes selected arcs and circles to the same radius, or selected lines to the same length. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric Constraints flyout ➤ Equal Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Equal Summary This command is equivalent to the Equal option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 464).
Use the Multiple option to make two or more objects equal. Multiple Picks successive objects to be made equal with the first object. See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints GCFIX Locks points and curves in position. Access Methods Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric Constraints flyout ➤ Fix Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Fix Summary This command is equivalent to the Fix option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 464).
Following are the valid constraint objects and points: â– Line â– Polyline segment â– Circle â– Arc â– Polyline arc â– Ellipse â– Spline See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints GCHORIZONTAL Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the X axis of the current coordinate system.
â– Multiline text â– Two valid constraint points List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select an object or [2Points (page ?)] <2Points>: Select an object or two constraint points 2Points Selects two constraint points instead of an object. The second selected point on an object is made horizontal to the first selected point. See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints GCPARALLEL Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Parallel option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 464). The second selected object is made parallel to the first. Following are the valid constraint objects and points: â– Line â– Polyline segment â– Ellipse â– Multiline text See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints GCPERPENDICULAR Causes selected lines to lie 90 degrees to one another.
■Ellipse ■Multiline text See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints GCSMOOTH Constrains a spline to be contiguous and maintain G2 continuity with another spline, line, arc, or polyline. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Parametric tool group ➤ Geometric Constraints flyout ➤ Smooth Menu: Parametric ➤ Geometric Constraints ➤ Smooth Summary This command is equivalent to the Smooth option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 464).
Select first spline curve (page ?): Select a spline object Curve Selects an endpoint of a curve. First Spline Curve Selects the first spline curve to be constrained. Second Curve Selects the second curve to be made continuous with the first spline curve. The first object selected must be a spline. The second selected object is made G2 continuous with the first spline.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Symmetric option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 464). For lines, the line’s angle is made symmetric (and not the endpoints). For arcs and circles, the center and radius are made symmetric (not the endpoints of the arc). Following are the valid constraint objects and points: ■Line ■Polyline segment ■Circle ■Arc ■Polyline arc ■Ellipse NOTE You must have an axis around which you will constrain the objects or points to be symmetrical.
2Points Selects two points and a symmetry line. First Point Selects the first point to be made symmetrical. Second Point Selects the second point to be made symmetrical. Select Symmetric Line Select Symmetric Line (page 461) See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints GCTANGENT Constrains two curves to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their extensions.
Following are the valid constraint objects and points: â– Line â– Polyline segment â– Circle, arc, polyline arc, ellipse â– Combination of circles, arcs, or ellipses A circle can be tangent to a line even if the circle does not touch the line. A curve can be tangent to another even if they do not physically share a point. For example, See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints GCVERTICAL Causes lines or pairs of points to lie parallel to the Y axis of the current coordinate system.
Summary This command is equivalent to the Vertical option in GEOMCONSTRAINT (page 464). Following are the valid constraint objects and points: â– Line â– Polyline segment â– Ellipse â– Multiline text â– Two valid constraint points You can select different constraint points on the same object or two separate objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Summary When you apply a geometric constraint to a pair of objects, the order in which the objects are selected and the point on which each object is selected can affect how the objects are positioned relative to each other. The following table outlines the valid constraint points for an object.
Causes selected lines to lie parallel to each other. Tangent (GCTANGENT (page 462)) Constrains two curves to maintain a point of tangency to each other or their extensions. Smooth (GCSMOOTH (page 459)) Constrains a spline to be contiguous and maintain G2 continuity with another spline, line, arc, or polyline. Coincident (GCCOINCIDENT (page 450)) Constrains two points together or a point to a curve (or an extension of a curve).
Menu: Draw ➤ Gradient Summary The Gradient visor (page 486) or Hatch and Gradient dialog box (page 472) is displayed. A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between one or two colors. See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill GRID Displays a grid pattern in the current viewport. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Drafting Settings Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Grid List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Grid Spacing (X) Sets the grid to the specified value. Entering x after the value sets the grid spacing to the specified value multiplied by the snap interval. On Turns on the grid using the current spacing. Off Turns off the grid. Snap Sets the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by the SNAP (page 952) command. Major Specifies the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. Grid lines rather than grid dots are displayed in any visual style except 2D Wireframe.
Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Group Summary If you enter -group at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 469). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects or [Name/Description]: Select objects to add to the new group or enter an option Name Specifies the group name. Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but not spaces.
Order Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the cut order for the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern. Position Number Specifies the position number of the object to reorder. To reorder a range of objects, specify the first object's position number. Reverse Order Reverses the order of all members in a group. Add Adds objects to a group. Remove Removes objects from a group.
Summary For existing groups, add or remove objects; or rename a group. The following prompts are displayed. Select group or [Name]: In the drawing area, select a group or enter the name of a group. If a selected object is not included in a group, you are prompted again. List of Options When a group is selected, the following options are displayed. Enter an option [Add objects (page 471)/Remove objects (page 471)/REName (page 471)]: Add Objects Select objects to add to the current group.
Summary The Hatch visor (page 484) or Hatch and Gradient dialog box (page 472) is displayed. If you enter -hatch at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 490). NOTE To prevent the creation of an enormous number of hatch lines, the maximum number of hatch lines created in a single hatch operation is limited. This limit prevents memory and performance problems. However, you can change the maximum number of hatch lines with the HPMAXLINES (page 1326) system variable.
List of Options The dialog box includes the following: â– Hatch tab (page 476) â– Gradient tab (page 479) â– More Options section (page 481) â– Add: Pick Points (page ?) â– Add: Select Objects (page ?) â– Remove Boundaries (page ?) â– Recreate Boundary (page ?) â– View Selections (page ?) â– Display Boundary Objects (page ?) â– Options (page ?) â– Preview (page ?) Add: Pick Points Determines a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area around the specified point.
Interior objects are not automatically detected. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style. Each time you click Add: Select Objects, HATCH clears the previous selection set. Remove Boundaries Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that were added previously. Recreate Boundary Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally associates the hatch object with it.
View Selections Displays the currently defined boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. This option is available only when a boundary has been defined. Display Boundary Objects Selects the objects that form the boundaries of the selected associative hatch object. Use the displayed grips to modify the hatch boundaries. NOTE This option is available only in the Hatch Edit dialog box (page 497) and replaces the View Selections option.
Inherit Properties Hatches or fills specified boundaries using the hatch or fill properties of a selected hatch object. After selecting the hatch object whose properties you want the hatch to inherit, right-click in the drawing area and use the options on the shortcut menu to switch between the Select Objects and Pick Internal Point options. The HPINHERIT (page 1324) system variable controls whether the hatch origin of the resulting hatch is determined by HPORIGIN (page 1327) or by the source object.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Type and Pattern Specifies the hatch’s type, pattern, color, and background color. Type Specifies whether to create a predefined, user-defined, or custom hatch pattern. Predefined patterns are stored in the acad.pat or acadiso.pat files supplied with the program. User-defined patterns are based on the current linetype in your drawing. A custom pattern is a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT files that you have added to the search path.
Displays the Hatch Library (page 487), in which you can preview images for all predefined patterns. Hatch Color Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid fills. (HPCOLOR (page 1321) system variable) Background Color Specifies the background color for new hatch objects. Choose None to turn off the background color. (HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR (page 1320) system variable) Swatch Displays a preview of the selected pattern. Click the swatch to display the Hatch Library (page 487).
Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. This allows you to display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your named layout. This option is available only from a named layout. Spacing Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. This option is available only when Type is set to User Defined. (HPSPACE (page 1330) system variable) ISO Pen Width Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Specifies whether to fill the hatch boundary with a monochormatic or two-color blend. One Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between a color and a specified tint (the color mixed with white) or between a color and a specified shade (the color mixed with black). (GFCLRSTATE (page 1303) system variable) Two Color Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors.
you can select an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color, true color, or color book color. (GFCLR1 (page 1302) and GFCLR2 (page 1303) system variables) Shade and Tint Slider Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color. (GFCLRLUM (page 1303) system variable) Gradient Patterns Displays fixed patterns for gradient fills. These patterns include linear sweep, spherical, and parabolic.
Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If an internal island is encountered, hatching or filling is turned off until another island within the island is encountered. (HPISLANDDETECTION (page 1324) system variable) Outer (Recommended) Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. This option hatches or fills only the specified area and leaves the internal islands unaffected.
Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object. The resulting boundary object can be either a polyline or a region object. This option is available only when Retain Boundaries is selected. (HPBOUND (page 1320) system variable) For more information about regions, see Create and Combine Areas (Regions). Boundary Set Defines the set of objects analyzed when defining a boundary from a specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select Objects to define a boundary.
See also: Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Hatch Visor Defines the boundaries, pattern or fill properties, and other parameters for hatch and fills. Summary The Hatch visor is displayed when you start the HATCH command, select a pattern or fill from the Hatch Library palette, or select an existing hatch object with a pattern or fill in a drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Pattern Displays a preview image of the current hatch pattern.
Pick Points Determines the boundary to hatch or fill from existing objects that form an enclosed area around a specified point. Select Boundary Determines the boundary to hatch or fill from selected objects that form an enclosed area. When you use the Select Boundary option, HATCH does not automatically detect interior objects. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style.
Match Hatch Properties Sets the properties of a hatch with a selected hatch object. Exit the Hatch Editor and Close the Visor Quits the current command and closes the Hatch visor. See also: Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills Gradient Visor Defines the boundaries, pattern or fill properties, and other parameters for gradient fills.
Pick Points Determines the boundary to hatch or fill from existing objects that form an enclosed area around a specified point. Select Boundary Determines the boundary to hatch or fill from selected objects that form an enclosed area. When you use the Select Boundary option, interior objects are not automatically detected. You must select the objects within the selected boundary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current island detection style.
The Hatch Library can be displayed as a dialog box when using the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, or as a palette from the Hatch or Gradient visors.
The Hatch Library can be displayed as a dialog box when using the Hatch and Gradient dialog box, or as a palette from the Hatch or Gradient visors. Summary Organizes patterns into five categories, with patterns listed alphabetically. Click an image to select a pattern. List of Options The following options are displayed. Pattern Category Lists the pattern categories used to group related hatch and gradient patterns. The following categories are listed: â– Show All. Shows all patterns in all categories.
-HATCH Uses command prompts to fill an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern, solid fill, or gradient fill. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Pattern Name—Predefined or Custom Specifies a predefined pattern in the acad.pat or acadiso.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file. Enter the pattern name followed by an optional hatch style code. Precede the pattern name with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch object. ?—List Pattern Names Lists and describes the hatch patterns defined in the acad.pat file. Solid Specifies a solid fill and redisplays the first HATCH prompt, where you can define a boundary.
While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections, change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview the hatch or fill. Draw Boundary Uses specified points to define the boundary of a hatch or fill. The options that are available as you specify points are also available in PLINE (page 785). When you complete the polyline boundary, press Enter.
+X Runs a line in the positive X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. -X Runs a line in the negative X direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. +Y Runs a line in the positive Y direction from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
Angle Runs a line at the specified angle from the point you specify to the first object encountered and then traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction. Style Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost hatch boundary. If you have selected no internal objects, a hatching style has no effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it's often best to use the Normal style. Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them.
Associativity Specifies that the new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are modified. A new hatch pattern's associativity is set by the HPASSOC (page 1319) system variable. Changing the associativity setting here also changes the setting in the HPASSOC system variable. Gap Tolerance Sets the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when objects are used as a hatch boundary. The default value, 0, specifies that the objects must enclose the area with no gaps.
Annotative Specifies that the hatch is annotative. This property automates the process of scaling annotations so that they plot or display at the correct size on the paper. Hatch Color Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid fills. The color value is stored in the HPCOLOR (page 1321) system variable. When Hatch Type is set to Pattern, you can also specify a new background color.
Toolbar: Select a hatch or gradient fill to edit its properties on the Hatch or Gradient visor. Shortcut menu: Select a hatch or gradient fill to edit. Right-click in the drawing area and click Hatch Edit. Pointing device: Double-click a hatch or gradient fill. Summary Modifies hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale, and angle for an existing hatch or fill. If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, the associated options are displayed (page 498) in the command line.
-HATCHEDIT Uses command prompts to modify hatch-specific properties, such as pattern, scale, and angle for an existing hatch or fill. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Add Boundaries Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill by adding boundaries. For more information, see Add: Pick Points (page ?) or Add: Select Objects (page ?). Remove Boundaries Modifies the boundaries of a hatch or fill by removing boundaries. For more information, see Remove Boundaries (page ?). Recreate Boundary Creates a polyline or region around the selected hatch or fill, and optionally associates the hatch object with it. For more information, see Recreate Boundary (page ?).
Hatch Color Overrides the current color with a specified color for hatch patterns and solid fills. The color value is stored in the HPCOLOR (page 1321) system variable. When Hatch Type is set to Pattern, you can also specify a new background color. The background color value is stored in the HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR (page 1320) system variable. To set the hatch color back to the current color for objects, enter “.” or Use Current. To turn off the background color, enter “.” or none.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select hatch objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter. See also: Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed HATCHSETBOUNDARY Redefines a selected hatch or fill to conform to a different closed boundary. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Set Boundary. Summary Trims a selected hatch to within a selected boundary or geometry.
Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object. Right-click and choose Set Origin. Summary Controls the hatch origin location point for solid and gradient hatches. You can select and change multiple hatch objects and change their hatch origin for multiple hatches at the same time. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select hatch object: Select the hatch object. Select new hatch origin: Click inside the hatch to change the origin point.
See also: Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed HELIX Creates a 2D spiral or 3D spring. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Helix Menu: Draw ➤ Helix Summary Use a helix as a sweep path for the SWEEP (page 1027) command to create springs, threads, and circular stairways. Initially, the default base radius is set to 1.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Number of turns = 3 (default) Twist = CCW (default) Specify center point of base: Specify a point Specify base radius or [Diameter (page ?)] <1.0000>: Specify a base radius, enter d to specify the diameter, or press Enter to specify the default base radius value Specify top radius or [Diameter (page ?)] <1.
Initially, the default value for the number of turns is three. During a drawing session, the default value for the number of turns is always the previously entered number of turns value. Enter number of turns: Enter a number Turn Height Specifies the height of one complete turn within the helix. The number of turns in the helix will automatically update accordingly when a turn height value is specified. If the number of turns for the helix has been specified, you cannot enter a value for the turn height.
See also: Access and Search the Product Help HIDE Regenerates a 3D wireframe model with hidden lines suppressed. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Hide Summary When you use VPOINT (page 1114), DVIEW (page 385), or VIEW (page 1104) to create a 3D view of your 2D drawing, a wireframe is displayed in the current viewport. All lines are present, including those hidden by other objects. HIDE eliminates the hidden lines from the screen.
If the DISPSILH (page 1254) system variable is on, HIDE displays 3D solid objects with silhouette edges only. It won't show the internal edges produced by objects that have facets. If the HIDETEXT system variable is off, HIDE ignores text objects when producing the hidden view. Text objects are always displayed regardless of whether they are obscured by other objects, and objects obscured by text objects are unaffected. See also: Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model HIDEOBJECTS Hides selected objects.
Summary Temporarily hides selected objects in the current view. All other objects are visible. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method See also: Control the Display of Objects HIDEPALETTES Hides all currently displayed palettes, including the command window. Access Methods Command entry: Tab Summary Hides all currently displayed palettes such as the Command Line, Layers, and Properties Inspector.
Command entry: 'id for transparent use Summary ID lists the X, Y, and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate of the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify Point: Use the pointing device to specify a point The UCS coordinate values of the location are displayed at the Command prompt.
-IMAGE Attaches a raster image to the drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter image option [? (page ?)/Detach (page ?)/Path (page ?)/Reload (page ?)/Unload (page ?)/Attach (page ?)] : Enter an option or press Enter ?—List Images Lists the images by name in alphabetical order, the number of times each is attached to the drawing, and the path where the image is stored.
The file name without the extension is assigned as the image name. Image names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits, spaces, and any special characters not used by the operating system or this program. If the file name is not a valid name for a nongraphical object, the Substitute Image Name dialog box is displayed. A valid image name is generated from the file name and an underscore and number are appended to the name.
the Enter Image File Name to Attach prompt. If you press Esc after the dialog box opens, the Enter Image Name prompt is displayed. See also: Attach Raster Images IMAGEADJUST (-IMAGEADJUST) Controls the image display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of images. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Adjust List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
IMAGEATTACH Inserts a reference to an image file. Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ Raster Image Reference Summary When you attach an image file, you link that referenced file to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced file are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed. Once you select an image file, the Attach Image dialog box (page 513) is displayed.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Identifies the image you have selected to attach. Browse Opens the Select Reference File dialog (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)). Preview Displays the image that you have selected to attach. Insertion Point Specifies the insertion point for the selected image file. Specify On-Screen is the default. The default insertion point is 0,0,0. Specify On-Screen Directs input at the Command prompt or the pointing device.
If INSUNITS (page 1335) is set to “unitless” or if the image does not contain resolution information, the scale factor becomes the image width in AutoCAD units. If INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and the image has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined. Specify On-Screen Allows you to input at the Command prompt or the pointing device.
See also: Attach Raster Images IMAGECLIP Crops the display of a selected image to a specified boundary. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Clip ➤ Image Summary The clipping boundary determines the portion of a raster image that is hidden, either outside or inside the boundary. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled by the IMAGEFRAME (page 1331) system variable. The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Select Polyline Defines the boundary with the selected polyline. The polyline can be open but must consist of straight line segments and cannot intersect itself. Polygonal Defines a polygonal clipping boundary with three or more points that you specify for the vertices of a polygon. Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary with the points that you specify for opposite corners. Invert Clip Inverts the mode of the clipping boundary: objects are clipped either outside the boundary or inside the boundary.
See also: Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images IMPORT Imports files of different formats into the current drawing. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Import Summary You can import data files, other than DWG files, that were created with other applications into the current drawing. The import process translates data into the corresponding DWG file data. The Import File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed. In Files of type, select the file format to import.
Summary 2D geometry located on a face or the intersection of a 3D solid with a face can be combined with that face to create additional edges. These edges can provide a visual effect, and can be pressed and pulled to create indentations and extrusions. The object to be imprinted must intersect one or more faces on the selected solid in order for imprinting to be successful.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group ➤ Insert Menu: Insert ➤ Block Summary The Insert Block dialog box (page 520) is displayed. If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 523). A good practice is to insert a block from a block library. A block library can be a drawing file that stores related block definitions or it can be a folder that contains related drawing files, each of which can be inserted as a block.
Summary The position of the inserted block depends on the orientation of the UCS. Name Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a block. Browse Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) where you can select a block or drawing file to insert. Path Specifies the path to the block. Explode Block Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. When Explode is selected, you can specify a uniform scale factor only.
Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. Objects having color BYBLOCK are white. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the CONTINUOUS linetype. Description Displays the description that was saved with the block. Preview Displays a preview of the specified block to insert. A lightning bolt icon in the lower-right corner of the preview indicates that the block is dynamic. A icon indicates that the block is annotative. Show\Hide Insertion Options Expands or collapses the Insertion Opti
Y Sets the Y scale factor. Z Sets the Z scale factor. Uniform Scale Specifies a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates. Rotation Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS. Specify On-Screen Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing device. Angle Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block. Block Unit Displays information about the block units. Unit Specifies the INSUNITS (page 1335) value for the inserted block.
Enter block name (page ?) or [? (page ?)] : Enter a name, enter ?, enter ~, or press Enter Units: Conversion: Specify insertion point (page ?) or [Basepoint (page ?)/Scale (page ?)/X (page ?)/Y (page ?)/Z (page ?)/Rotate (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter an option Block Name Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
?—List Block Names Lists the blocks currently defined in the drawing. Insertion Point Specifies a location for the block or drawing. Scale Factor All X and Y dimensions of the block or drawing are multiplied by the X and Y scale factors. The block or drawing is rotated by the specified angle, using the insertion point as the center of rotation. Corner Defines the X and Y scale factors at the same time, using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box.
INTERFERE Creates a temporary 3D solid from the interferences between two sets of selected 3D solids. Access Methods Button Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Interference Checking Summary Interferences are highlighted with a temporary 3D solid that represents the intersecting volume. You can also choose to retain the overlapping volumes. If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set against one another.
Pressing Enter starts the interference testing of pairs of 3D solids and displays the Interference Checking dialog box (page 528). If you enter -interfere at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 530). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. First set of objects Specifies a set of objects to be checked. If you do not select a second set of objects, all objects in this selection set are checked against each other.
Interference Settings Dialog Box Controls the display of interference objects List of Options The following options are displayed. Interference Objects Specifies the visual style and color for interference objects. Visual Style Specifies the visual style for interference objects (INTERFEREOBJVS (page 1340)). Color Specifies the color for interference objects (INTERFERECOLOR (page 1340)). Highlight Interfering Pair Highlights the interfering pair of solids.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Interfering Objects Displays the number of interferences found between each set during the INTERFERE (page 526) command. First Set Displays the number of objects selected in the first set. Second Set Displays the number of objects selected in the second set. Interfering Pairs Found Displays the number of interferences found among the selected objects. Zoom Closes the dialog box and starts the ZOOM (page 1153) command.
Next Highlights the next interference object. Close Closes the dialog box and deletes the interference objects if that option is selected. See also: Check 3D Models for Interferences -INTERFERE Summary INTERFERE highlights all interfering 3D solids and displays the number of objects selected and the number of interfering pairs. If you define a single selection set, INTERFERE checks all the solids in the set against one another.
Next Pair Cycles through the interfering pairs of 3D solids. Nested Selection Allows you to select individual solid objects that are nested in blocks and xrefs. See also: Check 3D Models for Interferences INTERSECT Creates a 3D solid, surface, or 2D region from overlapping solids, surfaces, or regions.
The selection set can contain regions, solids, and surfaces that lie in any number of arbitrary planes. INTERSECT divides the selection set into subsets and tests for intersections within each subset. The first subset contains all the solids and surfaces in the selection set. The second subset contains the first selected region and all subsequent coplanar regions.
See also: Control the Display of Objects ISOPLANE Specifies the current isometric plane. Access Methods Command entry: 'isoplane for transparent use Summary The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode is on and the snap style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. The current isometric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by ELLIPSE (page 402).
Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane, defined by the 30-degree and 150-degree axis pair. Right Selects the right-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree and 30-degree axis pair. See also: Set Isometric Grid and Snap J Commands JOIN Joins the endpoints of linear and curved objects to create a single object.
You can join objects in different planes if the source object is a spline or a 3D polyline. Each type of object has additional restrictions. NOTE Construction lines, rays, and closed objects cannot be joined. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select source object or multiple objects to join at once: Select lines, polylines, 3D polylines, arcs, elliptical arcs, helixes, or splines. Source Object Specifies a single source object to which you can join other objects.
Elliptical Arc Only elliptical arcs can be joined to the source elliptical arc. The elliptical arcs must be coplanar and have the same major and minor axes, but can have gaps between them. The elliptical arcs are joined counterclockwise starting from the source elliptical arc. The Close option converts the source elliptical arc into an ellipse. Helix Any linear or curved object can be joined to the source helix. All objects must be contiguous, but can be noncoplanar. The resulting object is a single spline.
Summary The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects or : Press Enter to select all objects and viewports or use an object selection method and press Enter A JPEG file is created that contains the objects you select. Shade Plot options are preserved in the file when you use this command.
Use layers to control the visibility of objects and to assign properties such as color and linetype. Objects on a layer normally assume the properties of that layer. However, you can override any layer property of an object. For example, if an object’s color property is set to BYLAYER, the object displays the color of that layer. If the object’s color is set to Red, the object displays as red, regardless of the color assigned to that layer.
Summary You can add, delete, and rename layers, change their properties, set property overrides for layout viewports, or add layer descriptions and apply changes in realtime. When switching layouts or when activating a viewport on named (paper space) layout, the Layers palette is updated and displays the current state of the layer properties in the current space. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Previous Layer Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings. (See LAYERP (page 555)) Isolate Layer Hides or locks all layers except those of the selected objects. (See LAYISO (page 557)) Unisolate Layer Restores all layers that were hidden or locked with the LAYISO command. (See LAYUNISO (page 566)) Freeze Layer Freezes the layer of selected objects. (See LAYFRZ (page 556)) Layer Off Turns off the layer of a selected object.
Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long periods. If you plan to switch visibility settings frequently, use the On/Off property to avoid regenerating the drawing. You can freeze a layer in all viewports, in the current layout viewport, or in new layout viewports as they are created. Lock Indicates if the layer is locked or unlocked. Objects on a locked layer cannot be modified. Lineweight Displays the lineweight associated with the layer.
VP Color (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the color associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space) layout viewport. VP Lineweight (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the lineweight associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space) layout viewport. VP Linetype (not available on the Model layout) Sets an override for the linetype associated with the selected layer for the active named (paper space) layout viewport.
Rename Renames the selected layer. Delete Deletes the selected layer from the drawing. You can delete only unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers containing objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer, and xref-dependent layers. NOTE Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. Duplicate Layer Creates a new layer based on the selected layer.
Layer List - Layer Group Item Shortcut Menu Edit Group (Applies to dynamic layer groups only) Displays the New Dynamic Group dialog box and allows you to modify the groups rules. Group Layer Status Toggles the Visibility, Freeze, or Lock, Freeze in New Viewports, or Prints layer status of the selected layers. The Isolate option isolates the selected layers in the drawing. All layers except those selected, are turned off and locked. (See LAYISO (page 557)) Rename Group Renames the selected layer group.
New Layer Group Creates a new layer group. The layer list displays a layer group named Group1. You can edit the name immediately. New Dynamic Layer Group Displays the New Dynamic Group dialog box and allows you to create a layer group that contains all the layers based on the layer properties specified. Delete Selected (-) Deletes the selected layers or layer groups. You can delete only unreferenced layers.
â– Layers with Overrides. Toggles the display of the Viewport Overrides layer group. This layer group dynamically updates to list all the layers in the active layout viewport that contain property overrides. (See SHOWVPOVERRIDESGROUP (page 1433)) â– Unreconciled Layers. Toggles the display of the Unreconciled Layers layer group. This layer group dynamically updates to list all the layers that have not been reconciled.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Group Name Provides a space to enter a name for the layer group. Parent Group Displays a list of all the layer groups that the new dynamic layer group can be nested under. Rules Displays the properties of layers. You can use one or more properties to define the layer group. For example, you can define a layer group that displays all layers that are either Red or Blue and in use.
Viewport Freeze State Selects Frozen or Thawed layers in the current viewport. Viewport Linetype Selects layers that have a linetype override, and match or do not match the selected linetype. Choose Manage to display the Select Linetype dialog box (page 550). Viewport Lineweight Selects layers that have a lineweight override, and match or do not match the selected lineweight. Choose Manage to display the Lineweight Settings dialog box.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Choose a group to add the layer to Lists the available layer groups in the current drawing that you can add the selected layers to. See also: Work with Layers Choose a Layer Dialog Box Merges selected layers to a specified layer.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Choose an existing layer to move content to Lists the available layers in the current drawing that you can merge the selected layers with from the Layers palette. All objects on the selected layers from the Layers palette are moved to the specified layer and then the layers are removed from the drawing. See also: Work with Layers Select Linetype Dialog Box Displays linetypes available in the current drawing.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Loaded Linetypes Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current drawing. Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (page 578), in which you can load selected linetypes into the drawing and add them to the list of linetypes. See also: Work with Layers -LAYER Manages layers and layer properties. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
(page ?)/Ltype (page ?)/LWeight (page ?)/TRansparency (page ?)/MATerial (page ?)/Plot (page ?)/PStyle (page ?)/Freeze (page ?)/Thaw (page ?)/LOck (page ?)/Unlock (page ?)/stAte (page ?)/Description (page ?)/rEconcile (page ?)]: NOTE The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles. ?—List Layers Displays a list of the currently defined layers, showing their names, states, color numbers, linetypes, lineweights, and whether they are externally dependent layers.
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book, guide, or set to use for the selected object. Enter the name of a color book that has been installed, such as "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43". The color is assigned to the layer or layers, and the layers are turned on. To assign a color but turn off the layer, precede the color with a minus sign (-). Ltype Changes the linetype associated with a layer. Lweight Changes the lineweight associated with a layer.
Freeze Freezes layers, making them invisible and excluding them from regeneration and plotting. Thaw Thaws frozen layers, making them visible and available for regeneration and plotting. Lock Locks layers, preventing editing of objects on those layers. Unlock Unlocks selected locked layers, permitting editing of objects on those layers. State Saves and restores the state and property settings of the layers in a drawing.
See also: Use Layers to Manage Complexity LAYERCLOSE Closes the Layers palette. Summary Closes the Layers palette if it is open. See also: Work with Layers LAYERP Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Previous Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Previous Summary Undoes changes you have made to layer settings such as color or linetype. If settings are restored, a message is displayed: “Restored previous layer states.
â– Deleted layers: If you delete or purge a layer, using Layer Previous does not restore it. â– Added layers: If you add a new layer to a drawing, using Layer Previous does not remove it. See also: Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties LAYERPMODE Turns on and off the tracking of changes made to layer settings. Summary When Layer Previous mode is on, changes made to layers are tracked. When Layer Previous mode is off, changes made to layers are no longer tracked.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Viewports=current, Block nesting level=current Select an object on a layer to be frozen (page ?) or [Settings (page ?)/Undo (page ?)]: Select an object or enter s or u Layer has been frozen. Select an Object on a Layer to be Frozen Specifies the layer to be frozen. Layer “” has been frozen. Settings Displays settings for viewports and block definitions. The setting you choose persists from session to session.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Isolate Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Isolate Summary All layers except the layers of the selected objects are either turned off, frozen in the current layout viewport, or locked, depending on the current setting. The layers that remain visible and unlocked are called isolated. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Off Turns off all but the selected layers in all viewports. Lock and Fade Locks all layers except the layers of the selected objects, and sets the fading for locked layers. See also: Use Layers to Manage Complexity LAYLCK Locks the layer of a selected object. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Lock Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Lock Summary Using this command, you can prevent objects on a layer from being accidentally modified.
Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Layer Match Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Match List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects to be changed: Select an object to change its layer Select object on destination layer (page 560) or [Name (page 560)]: Select an object or enter n to open the Change to Layer dialog box Select Object on Destination Layer Select an object on the destination layer. Name Displays the Change to Layer dialog box (page 560).
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Make Current Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Make Object’s Layer Current Summary You can change the current layer by selecting an object on that layer. This is a convenient alternative to specifying the layer name in the Layers palette. See also: Use Layers to Manage Complexity LAYMRG (-LAYMRG) Merges selected layers into a target layer, removing the previous layers from the drawing. Summary You can reduce the number of layers in a drawing by merging them.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select object on layer to merge (page ?)or [Name (page ?)]: Select an object or enter n to select a layer from a list of layers After you selected the layer(s) to merge, the following prompt is displayed: Select object on target layer (page ?)or [Name (page ?)]: Select an object or enter n to select a target layer from a list of layers Select Object on Layer to Merge Select an object on the destination layer.
Current settings: Viewports=current, Block nesting level=current Select an object on the layer to be turned off (page ?)or [Settings (page ?)/Undo (page ?)]: Select an object, enter s, or enter u Select an Object on the Layer to be Turned Off Selects one or more objects whose layers you want to turn off. Settings Displays the Viewports and Block Definition setting types. The setting you choose persists from session to session. Viewports Displays the Viewports setting types.
Access Methods Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ New Layout Menu: Insert ➤ Layout ➤ Layout from Template Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Layout drop-down ➤ Create New Layout List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter layout option [Copy (page 564)/Delete (page 564)/New (page 564)/Template (page 564)/Rename (page 564)/SAveas (page 564)/Set (page 565)/? (page 565)] : NOTE Many of these options are available by right-clicking a layout tab name. Copy Copies a layout.
eliminate unnecessary information. See “Reuse Layouts and Layout Settings” in the User's Guide. The last current layout is used as the default for the layout to save as a template. If the FILEDIA (page 1296) system variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can specify the template file in which to save the layout. The default layout template directory is specified in the Application Preferences dialog box. Set Makes a layout current.
Print Layout Outputs the current layout to a printer or file. (PLOT (page 792) command) Close the Visor Closes the Layout visor. The visor is not displayed when switching named layouts until the PAPERSPACEVISOR (page 1386) system variable is set back to 1. See also: Work on a Named Layout LAYULK Unlocks the layer of a selected object.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Layers palette ➤ Unisolate Layer Menu: Format ➤ Layer Tools ➤ Layer Unisolate Summary Reverses the effects of the previous LAYISO command. Any additional changes made to layer settings after you use the LAYISO command will be retained. LAYUNISO restores layers to the state they were in just before you entered the LAYISO (page 557) command. Changes to layer settings after LAYISO is used are retained when you enter the LAYUNISO command.
Specify next point (page ?) or [Annotation (page ?)/Format (page ?)/Undo (page ?)] : Specify a point, enter an option, or press Enter Point Specification Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt you for points and options. Annotation Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line. The annotation can be single or multiple lines of text, a feature control frame containing geometric tolerances, or a block.
None Ends the command without adding any annotation to the leader line. Mtext Creates text using the In-Place Text Editor (page 675) when you specify an insertion point and a second point for the text boundary. Enter the characters for the text. Enclose format strings for prefixes and suffixes in angle brackets (< >). Enclose format strings for alternate units in square brackets ([ ]). For more information about adding a prefix or suffix, see “Control the Display of Dimension Units” in the User's Guide.
Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. The previous prompt is displayed. See also: Create Leaders Modify Leaders Using Grips LENGTHEN Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group ➤ Lengthen Menu: Modify ➤ Lengthen Summary You can specify changes as a percentage, an increment, or as a final length or angle. LENGTHEN is an alternative to using TRIM or EXTEND.
Select an object (page ?) or [DElta (page ?)/Percent (page ?)/Total (page ?)/DYnamic (page ?)]: Select one object or enter an option Object Selection Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object. LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects. The extrusion direction of the selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS).
Total Length Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Angle Sets the included angle of the selected arc. Dynamic Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. You change the length of a selected object by dragging one of its endpoints. The other end remains fixed. See also: Resize or Reshape Objects LIGHT Creates a light.
LIMITS Sets and controls the limits of the grid display in the current Model or named layout. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Drawing Limits Command entry: 'limits for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify lower left corner (page 573)or [ON (page 573)/OFF (page 573)] : Specify a point, enter on or off, or press Enter Lower-Left Corner Specifies the lower-left corner for the grid limits. On Turns on limits checking.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group ➤ Line Menu: Draw ➤ Line Summary With LINE, you can create a series of contiguous line segments. Each segment is a line object that can be edited separately. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Close Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first line segment, which forms a closed loop of line segments. You can use Close after you have drawn a series of two or more segments. Undo Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence. Entering u more than once backtracks through line segments in the order you created them. See also: Draw Lines LINETYPE Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes.
Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Linetype Command entry: 'linetype for transparent use Summary The Linetype Manager (page 576) is displayed. If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 579). See also: Work with Linetypes Linetype Manager Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Linetype Filters Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter linetypes based on whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are referenced by objects. List of Linetypes Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype Filters. To quickly select all or clear all linetypes, right-click in the linetype list to display the shortcut menu. Current Indicates which linetype is current.
Name Displays the selected linetype name, which can be edited. Description Displays the description of the selected linetype, which can be edited. Global Scale Factor Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes. (LTSCALE (page 593) system variable) Current Object Scale Sets linetype scale for newly created objects. The resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by the object's scale factor.
Summary The acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes. List of Options The following options are displayed. File Name Displays the name of the current LIN file. You can enter the name of another LIN file or click the File button to select a file from the Select Linetype File dialog box. Browse Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box, in which you can select a different linetype (LIN) file. Available Linetypes Displays the linetypes available to load.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [? (page 580)/Create (page 580)/Load (page 580)/Set (page 580)]: ?—List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). After you select an LIN file, the linetypes available in the file are listed. Create Creates a new linetype and stores it in an LIN file. The Create or Append Linetype File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
is not loaded, the program searches for its definition in the acad.lin file. If the linetype is neither loaded nor in acad.lin, the program displays a message and returns you to the Command prompt. Enter ? to list all loaded linetype names. If you enter bylayer, new objects inherit the linetype associated with the layer on which the object is drawn. If you enter byblock, new objects are drawn using the CONTINUOUS linetype until they are grouped into a block.
See also: Display and Change the Properties of Objects LIVESECTION Turns on live sectioning for a selected section object. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a section plane object. Right-click and choose Activate Live Sectioning. Summary When turned on, the cross sections of 3D objects intersected by the section object are displayed. Live sectioning only works with objects that were created with SECTIONPLANE. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Summary The Select Shape File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed. Enter the shape file name, or select a file name from the list. You must load a shape (SHP) file the first time you need it; it is loaded automatically thereafter. The shape file must be available each time you edit the drawing. See also: Overview of Shape Files LOFT Creates a 3D solid or surface in the space between several cross sections.
Loft profiles can be open or closed, planar or non-planar, and can also be edge subobjects. Use the mode option to select whether to create a surface or a solid. When creating surfaces, use SURFACEMODELINGMODE (page 1453) to control whether the surface is a NURBS surface or a procedural surface. Use SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY (page 1452) to control whether procedural surfaces are associative.
Objects That Can Be Used as Cross Sections Objects That Can Be Used as a Loft Path Objects That Can Be Used as Guides Circle Circle 2D polyline NOTE 2D polylines can be used as guides if they contain only 1 segment.
Cross Sections in Lofting Order Specifies open or closed curves in the order in which the surface or solid will pass through them. Point If you select the Point option, you must also select a closed curve. Join Multiple Curves Joins multiple, end-to-end curves as one cross section. Mode Controls whether the lofted object is a solid or a surface.
cross sections to prevent undesired results, such as wrinkles in the resulting solid or surface. â– Intersects each cross section â– Starts on the first cross section â– Ends on the last cross section Select any number of guide curves for the lofted surface or solid and press Enter. Path Specifies a single path for the lofted solid or surface. The path curve must intersect all planes of the cross sections.
Cross Sections Only Creates lofted objects without using guides or paths. Settings Displays the Loft Settings dialog box (page 588). See also: Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting Loft Settings Dialog Box Controls the contour of a lofted surface at its cross sections. Also allows you to close the surface or solid. List of Options The following options are displayed. Ruled Specifies that the solid or surface is ruled (straight) between the cross sections and has sharp edges at the cross sections.
Smooth Fit Specifies that a smooth solid or surface is drawn between the cross sections and has sharp edges at the start and end cross sections. (LOFTNORMALS (page 1358) system variable) Start Continuity Sets the tangency and curvature of the first cross section. Start Bulge Magnitude Sets the size of the curve of the first cross section. End Continuity Sets the tangency and curvature of the last cross section. End Bulge Magnitude Sets the size of the curve of the last cross section.
End Cross Section Specifies that the surface normal is normal to the end cross section. Start and End Cross Sections Specifies that the surface normal is normal to both the start and end cross sections. All Cross Sections Specifies that the surface normal is normal to all cross sections. Draft Angles Controls the draft angle and magnitude of the first and last cross sections of the lofted solid or surface. The draft angle is the beginning direction of the surface.
Start Angle Specifies the draft angle for the start cross section. (LOFTANG1 (page 1356) system variable) Start Magnitude Controls the relative distance of the surface from the start cross section in the direction of the draft angle before the surface starts to bend toward the next cross section. (LOFTMAG1 (page 1357) system variable) End Angle Specifies the draft angle for the end cross section.
Periodic (Smooth Ends) Creates a smooth, closed surface whose seam will not kink if it is reshaped. This option is only available if the loft is ruled or smooth fit and the Close Surface or solid option is selected. See also: Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting LOGFILEOFF Closes the command history log file opened by LOGFILEON. Summary The program stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .
Summary The contents of the text window are recorded in the log file until you exit the program or use the LOGFILEOFF (page 592) command. Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic deletion as the number of log files continues to grow. See also: View and Edit Within the Command History LTSCALE Sets the global linetype scale factor.
Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Lineweight Shortcut menu: Right-click Show/Hide Lineweight on the status bar and choose Settings. Command entry: 'lweight for transparent use Summary The Lineweight Settings dialog box (page 594) is displayed. If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 596).
Summary For a table of valid lineweights, see Overview of Lineweights in the User's Guide. List of Options The following options are displayed. Units Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches. You can also set Units for Listing by using the LWUNITS (page 1365) system variable. Millimeters (mm) Specifies lineweight values in millimeters. Inches (in.) Specifies lineweight values in inches. Default Controls the DEFAULT lineweight for layers. The initial DEFAULT lineweight is 0.
scale to better display different lineweight widths. The Lineweight list reflects the current display scale. Objects with lineweights that are displayed with a width of more than one pixel may increase regeneration time. If you want to optimize performance when working in the Model layout, set the lineweight display scale to the minimum value or turn off lineweight display altogether. See also: Overview of Lineweights -LWEIGHT Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units.
NOTE If you save a drawing using the AutoCAD Release 14, or earlier, format, the drawing preview displays lineweights even though the drawing saved in the earlier format does not display lineweights. See also: Overview of Lineweights M Commands MASSPROP Calculates the mass properties of regions or 3D solids. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Region/Mass Properties Summary Refer to the Help system for a complete list of definitions for each of the region or mass properties computed.
Regions The following table shows the mass properties that are displayed for all regions. Mass properties for all regions Mass property Description Area The surface area of solids or the enclosed area of regions. Perimeter The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. The perimeter of a solid is not calculated. Bounding box The two coordinates that define the bounding box.
Additional mass properties for coplanar regions Mass property Description Products of inertia Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object. It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.
Mass properties for solids Mass property Description Moments of inertia The mass moments of inertia, which is used when computing the force required to rotate an object about a given axis, such as a wheel rotating about an axle. The formula for mass moments of inertia is 2 mass_moments_of_inertia = object_mass * radiusaxis Mass moments of inertia unit is mass (grams or slugs) times the distance squared. Products of inertia Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object.
Parameters that control MASSPROP units Parameter Used to calculate LENGTH*LENGTH Area of regions and surface area of solids LENGTH*LENGTH*LENGTH Bounding box, radii of gyration, centroid, and perimeter DENSITY*LENGTH*LENGTH Moments of inertia, products of inertia, and principal moments See also: Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information MATBROWSERCLOSE Closes the Materials Browser. Summary This command closes the Materials Browser (page 602).
Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Browser Summary The Materials Browser (page 602) is displayed. See also: Browse Material Library Materials Browser The Materials Browser allows you to navigate and manage your materials.
Summary You can also manage your material libraries in the Materials Browser. It also allows you search and sort materials in all open libraries and in the drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Search Searches for material appearances in multiple libraries. Document Materials Displays the materials saved with the open drawing. Use the drop-down list on the left to filter which materials are displayed in the list. The following filters and options are available: â– Show All.
The Sort drop-down controls the order in which materials in the library are displayed. The following sort options are available: â– By Name. Lists materials in the selected library alphabetically by name. (Default option) â– By Type. Lists materials in the selected library according to the type of material that it was created from. â– By Category. Lists materials in the selected library according to the category of material it was added to. (Default option) â– By Material Color.
MATCHCELL Applies the properties of a selected table cell to other table cells. Access Methods Button Toolbar: With a table and table cell selected, on the Table Cell visor, click Match Cell. Summary All the properties of the source cell are copied to the destination cells except for the cell type: text or block. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Summary The types of properties that can be applied include color, layer, linetype, linetype scale, lineweight, plot style, transparency, and other specified properties. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current active settings: Currently selected matchprop settings Select destination object(s) or [Settings]: Enter s or select one or more objects to copy properties to Destination Object(s) Specifies the objects to which you want to copy the properties of the source object.
Summary Specifies which basic properties and special properties to copy from the source object to the destination objects. List of Options The following options are displayed. Basic Properties Color Changes the color of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Layer Changes the layer of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Linetype Changes the linetype of the destination object to that of the source object.
Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, points, and viewports. Lineweight Changes the lineweight of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects. Transparency Changes the transparency of the of the destination object to that of the source object. Available for all objects.
In addition to basic object properties, changes the text style and annotative properties of the destination object to that of the source object. Available only for single-line and multiline text objects. Viewport In addition to basic object properties, changes the following properties of the destination paper space viewport to match those of the source viewport: on/off, display locking, standard or custom scale, shade plot, snap, grid, and UCS icon visibility and location.
Select objects: Pick one or more objects Select objects or [Undo]: Press Enter to exit the command See also: Browse Material Library MATERIALS Opens the Materials Browser. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Materials tool group ➤ Material Browser Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Materials Browser Summary The Materials Browser (page 602) is displayed. The Materials Browser allows you navigate and manage your materials. You can organize, sort, search, and select materials for use in your drawing.
MEASURE Creates point objects or blocks at measured intervals along the length or perimeter of an object. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Point flyout ➤ Measure Menu: Draw ➤ Point ➤ Measure Summary The resulting points or blocks are always located on the selected object and their orientation is parallel to the XY plane of the UCS. Use DDPTYPE to set the style and size of all point objects in a drawing.
Length of Segment Places point objects at the specified interval along the selected object, starting at the endpoint closest to the point you used to select the object. Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial vertex (the first one drawn). Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the center set as the current snap rotation angle. If the snap rotation angle is 0, then the measurement of the circle starts to the right of center, on its circumference.
MEASUREGEOM Measures the distance, radius, angle, area, and volume of selected objects or sequence of points. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Utilities tool group ➤ Measure flyout ➤ Distance Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Distance Summary The MEASUREGEOM command performs many of the same calculations as the following commands: ■AREA (page 83) ■DIST (page 352) ■MASSPROP (page 597) List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Multiple Points A running total of distance based on existing line segments and the current rubber-band line is calculated. The total updates as you move the cursor and displays in the tooltip. If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo Options for Selecting Polylines (page ?) display. Radius Measures the radius and diameter of a specified arc or circle. Angle Measures the angle of a specified arc, circle, line, or vertex. Arc Measures the angle of an arc. Circle Measures a specified angle within a circle.
You can select a 3D solids or 2D objects. If you select a 2D object you must specify a height for that object. If you define an object by specifying points, you must specify at least three points to define a polygon. All must lie on a plane parallel to the XY plane of the UCS. If you do not close the polygon, an area will be calculated as if a line existed between the first and last points entered. If you enter Arc, Length, or Undo Options for Selecting Polylines (page ?) display.
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used. Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
MESH Creates a 3D mesh primitive object such as a box, cone, cylinder, pyramid, sphere, wedge, or torus. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Primitives ➤ Box Summary The basic mesh forms, known as mesh primitives, are the equivalent of the primitive forms for 3D solids. You can reshape mesh objects by smoothing, creasing, refining, and splitting faces. You can also drag edges, faces, and vertices to mold the overall form. NOTE By default, new mesh primitives are created with no smoothness.
First corner / Corner Sets the first corner of the mesh box. â– Other corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh box. â– Cube (page 618) â– Length (page 618) Center Sets the center of the mesh box. â– Corner. Sets the opposite corner of the mesh box. â– Cube (page 618) â– Length (page 618) Cube Sets all edges of the box to be of equal length. â– Length (page 618) Length Sets the length of the mesh box along the X axis.
Specify the diameter and height. Center point of base Sets the center point of the base of the mesh cone. â– Base radius (page 620) â– Diameter (page 620) 3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and plane of the mesh cone by specifying three points: â– First point. Sets the first point on the circumference of the mesh cone base. â– Second point. Sets a second point on the circumference of the mesh cone base. â– Third point. Sets the size and planar rotation of the mesh cone base.
â– 2Point (height) (page 620) â– Axis endpoint (page 621) â– Top radius (page 621) If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent points are used. Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the mesh cone. â– Endpoint of first axis. Sets the start point for the first axis of the mesh cone base and then specifies the other axis endpoints: â– Other endpoint of first axis. Sets the first axis endpoint. â– â– Endpoint of second axis. Sets the second axis endpoint Center.
â– Second point. Sets the second point of a two-point distance. Axis endpoint Sets the location of the top point of the cone or the center of the top face of a cone frustum. The orientation of the axis endpoint can be anywhere in 3D space. Top radius Specifies the top radius of the cone, creating a cone frustum. â– Height (page 620) â– 2Point (height) (page 620) â– Axis endpoint (page 621) Cylinder Creates a 3D mesh cylinder. Specify the size of the base and height.
2P (diameter) Sets the diameter of the mesh cylinder base by specifying two points: â– First endpoint of diameter. Sets the first point on the diameter of the mesh cylinder base. â– Second endpoint of diameter. Sets the second point on the diameter of the mesh cylinder base. â– Height (page 623) â– 2Point (height) (page 622) â– Axis endpoint (page 623) 2Point (height) Defines the height of the mesh cylinder by specifying the distance between two points: â– First point.
Height Sets the height of the mesh cylinder along an axis that is perpendicular to the plane of the base. Axis endpoint Sets the location of the top face of the cylinder. The orientation of the axis endpoint can be anywhere in 3D space. Elliptical Specifies an elliptical base for the mesh cylinder. â– Endpoint of first axis. Sets the start point for the first axis of the mesh cone base. â– Other endpoint of first axis. Sets the first axis endpoint. â– â– Endpoint of second axis. Sets the second axis endpoint.
â– Second endpoint of edge. Sets the second location of the edge of the mesh pyramid. â– Height (page 624) â– 2Point (height) (page 624) â– Axis endpoint (page 624) â– Top radius (page 624) Sides Sets the number of sides for the mesh pyramid. Enter a positive value from 3-32. â– Center point of base (page 623) â– Edge (page 623) â– Sides. Resets the number of sides for the mesh pyramid. Base radius Sets the radius of the mesh pyramid base.
â– 2Point (height) (page 624) â– Axis endpoint (page 624) Circumscribed Specifies that the base of the pyramid is circumscribed, or is drawn around, the base radius. â– Base radius (page 624) â– Inscribed (page 624) Sphere Creates a 3D mesh sphere. Specify the size of the sphere (diameter or radius). Center point Sets the center point of the sphere. â– Radius. Creates a mesh sphere based on a specified radius. â– Diameter. Creates a mesh sphere based on a specified diameter.
Ttr (tangent, tangent, radius) Defines a mesh sphere with a specified radius that is tangent to two objects: â– Point on object for first tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve as the first tangent point. â– Point on object for second tangent. Sets a point on an object to serve as the second tangent point. â– Radius of circle. Sets the radius of the mesh sphere. If the specified criteria can produce multiple results, the closest tangent points are used. Wedge Creates a 3D mesh wedge.
â– Length (page 627) Cube Sets all edges of the mesh wedge base to be of equal length. â– Length (page 627) Length Sets the length of the mesh wedge base along the X axis. â– Width (page 627) (not available for Cube) Width Sets the width of the mesh box along the Y axis. â– Height (page 627) â– 2Point (height) (page 627) Height Sets the height of the mesh wedge. Enter a positive value to draw the height along the positive Z axis of the current UCS.
3P (three points) Sets the location, size, and rotation of the mesh torus by specifying three points. The path of the tube passes through the specified points: â– First point. Sets the first point on the path of the tube. â– Second point. Sets the second point on the path of the tube. â– Third point. Sets the third point on the path of the tube.
Diameter (torus) Sets the diameter of the mesh torus, measured from the center point of the torus to the center point of the tube. â– Tube radius (page 629) â– 2Point (tube radius) (page 629) â– Diameter (tube) (page 629) Tube radius Sets the radius of the profile that is swept around the mesh torus path. 2Point (tube radius) Sets the radius of the profile of the tube based on the distance between two points that you specify: â– First point. Sets the first point of a two-point distance. â– Second point.
Summary You can close gaps in mesh objects by selecting the edges of the surrounding mesh faces. For best results, the faces should be on the same plane. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select connecting mesh edges to create a new mesh face Specifies which mesh edges form the boundary for the closure. Click the edges to select them. Select edges or [CHain] Edges Selects individual edges and adds them to the selection set.
Summary You can cause the vertices of surrounding mesh faces to converge at the center of a selected edge or face. The shapes of surrounding faces change to accommodate the loss of one or more vertices. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select mesh face or edge to collapse Specifies a mesh edge or a face whose midpoint becomes the point of convergence for the surrounding faces. Click a single mesh edge or face.
You can also apply creases to mesh subobjects by changing the crease type and crease level in the Properties Inspector palette (page 832). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select mesh subobjects to crease Specifies the mesh subobjects to crease. Click mesh faces, edges, and vertices to crease their associated edges. Press Shift+click to remove a subobject from the selection set.
Summary When you extrude, or extend, a mesh face, you can specify several options to determine the shape of the extrusion. You can also determine whether extruding multiple mesh faces results in joined or separate extrusions. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Mesh face(s) to extrude Specifies the mesh faces to extrude. Click one or more faces to select them.
Height of extrusion Extrudes mesh faces along the Z axis. Enter a positive value to extrude the face along the positive Z axis. Enter a negative value to extrude along the negative Z axis. Multiple mesh faces do not need to be parallel to the same plane. Direction Specifies the length and direction of the extrusion. (The direction cannot be parallel to the plane of the sweep curve created by the extrusion.) â– Start point of direction. Specifies the first point in the direction vector.
Positive angles taper inward from the base mesh face. Negative angles taper outward. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to the plane of the mesh. If the adjacent faces are not set to be joined, the faces that are selected for extrusion are tapered to the same value. However, for joined extrusions, the taper is applied only to the portion of the extrusion that is not adjacent to another extruded face.
The merge operation is performed only on mesh faces that are adjacent. Other types of subobjects are removed from the selection set. Merging mesh faces that wrap a corner can have unintended results when you try to edit the mesh or convert it to other types of solid objects. For example, the mesh might no longer be watertight. For best results, restrict mesh merging to faces that are on the same plane. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Refining an object resets the smoothing level that was assigned to the object to 0 (zero). This level of smoothness becomes the new baseline for the object. That is, the smoothness level can no longer be decreased beyond that level. Refining a subobject does not reset the smoothing level. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Mesh object or face subobjects to refine Specifies 3D mesh objects or mesh faces to be refined. Press Ctrl+click to isolate a specific face.
The level of smoothness upon conversion depends on the mesh type setting (FACETERMESHTYPE (page 1291) system variable). If the mesh type is not set to be optimized, the converted object is not smoothed. To convert mesh objects to 3D surfaces or solids, use CONVTOSOLID (page 223) or CONVTOSURFACE (page 225) commands.
You can decrease the smoothness of multiple objects. If the selected objects have different levels of smoothness, their respective levels are decreased by one. If the selection set contains ineligible objects, those objects can be filtered out. See also: Change Mesh Smoothness Levels MESHSMOOTHMORE Increases the level of smoothness for mesh objects by one level.
Facets are the underlying components of each mesh face. You can increase the smoothness level up to the value of SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV (page 1439) as long as the number of faces does not exceed the value in the SMOOTHMESHMAXFACE (page 1438) system variable. If you select multiple objects with differing levels of smoothness, their respective levels are increased by one. You can only smooth mesh objects. However, you have the option of converting some types of objects to mesh during the smoothing operation.
NOTE You can use MESHSPLIT (page 641) to divide a rectangular face into two triangular faces. If you plan to spin the edge between the triangular faces, use the Vertex option to ensure that the split extends precisely from one vertex to the other. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. First triangular mesh face to spin Specifies one of two faces to be modified. Click a triangular mesh face. Second adjacent triangular mesh face to spin Specifies the second of two faces to be modified.
For more precision in the placement of the split, you can specify that the split starts or ends at a vertex. The Vertex option is useful for creating two triangular faces from a rectangular face. It provides the precision you need if you later want to spin the new edge using MESHSPIN (page 640). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed: Face to split In the drawing area, specifies which mesh face to split. â– First split point on face edge.
MESHUNCREASE Removes the crease from selected mesh faces, edges, or vertices. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Mesh Editing ➤ Uncrease Summary Restore smoothness to an edge that has been creased. You can also remove a selected crease in the Crease area of Properties Inspector (page 832) by changing the Type value to None when a face on a mesh is selected. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed: Select crease to remove Specifies which creased edges to smooth.
Summary Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before you specify its position. Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale factor and a rotation other than 1 or 0. If you enter one of the options, respond to the prompts by specifying a distance for the scale options or an angle for rotation. Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded. You cannot use MINSERT with annotative blocks. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Corner Sets the scale factor by using the block insertion point and the opposite corner. â– Specify Rotation Angle (page 644) â– Number of Rows/Columns (page 644) â– Distance Between Rows (page 644) â– Distance Between Columns (page 644) XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.
Y Sets the Y scale factor. â– Specify Rotation Angle (page 644) â– Number of Rows/Columns (page 644) â– Distance Between Rows (page 644) â– Distance Between Columns (page 644) Z Sets the Z scale factor. â– Specify Rotation Angle (page 644) â– Number of Rows/Columns (page 644) â– Distance Between Rows (page 644) â– Distance Between Columns (page 644) Rotate Sets the angle of insertion for both the individual blocks and the entire array.
â– Corner (page 645) â– XYZ (page 645) Preview Y Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. â– X Scale Factor (page 644) â– Corner (page 645) â– XYZ (page 645) Preview Z Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is dragged into position. â– X Scale Factor (page 644) â– Corner (page 645) â– XYZ (page 645) Preview Rotate Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position.
Menu: Modify ➤ Mirror Summary You can create objects that represent half of a drawing, select them, and mirror them across a specified line to create the other half. NOTE By default, when you mirror a text object, the direction of the text is not changed. Set the MIRRTEXT (page 1370) system variable to 1 if you do want the text to be reversed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing the mirror line. Erase source objects? [Yes/No] : Enteryorn, or press Enter Yes Places the mirrored image into the drawing and erases the original objects. No Places the mirrored image into the drawing and retains the original objects. See also: Mirror Objects MIRROR3D Creates a mirrored copy of selected objects across a mirroring plane.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Use an object selection method and press Enter to finish Specify first point of mirror plane (3 points) or [Object (page 650)/Last (page 650)/Zaxis (page 650)/View (page 651)/XY/YZ/ZX (page 651)/3points (page 651)] <3points>: Enter an option, specify a point, or press Enter Object Uses the plane of a selected planar object as the mirroring plane.
View Aligns the mirroring plane with the viewing plane of the current viewport through a point. XY/YZ/ZX Aligns the mirroring plane with one of the standard planes (XY, YZ, or ZX) through a specified point. 3 Points Defines the mirroring plane by three points. If you select this option by specifying a point, the First Point on Mirror Plane prompt is not displayed. See also: Mirror Objects MLEADER Creates a multileader object.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Leaders tool group ➤ Multileader Menu: Dimension ➤ Multileader Summary A multileader object typically consists of an arrowhead, a horizontal landing, a leader line or curve, and either a multiline text object or a block. Multileaders can be created arrowhead first (page ?), leader landing first (page ?), or content first (page ?). If a multileader style has been used, then the multileader can be created from that specified style.
Leader Landing First Specifies a location for the landing line of the multileader object. Specify Leader Arrowhead Location Sets placement of the arrowhead for the new multileader object. If you exit the command at this point, then no text is associated with the multileader line. Content First Specifies a location for the text or block associated with the multileader object. Point Selection Sets placement for the text box for the text label associated with the multileader object.
Mtext Specifies that multiline text is included with the multileader. â– Enter the multiline text. None Specifies no content type. Maxpoints Specifies a maximum number of points for the new leader line. â– Enter the maximum points for leader line. â– None. First Angle Constrains the angle of the first point in the new leader line. â– Enter first angle constraint. â– None. Second Angle Constrains the second angle in the new leader line. â– Enter second angle constraint. â– None.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select multileader to align to or [Options (page ?)]: Options Specifies options for aligning and spacing the selected multileaders. Distribute Spaces content evenly between two selected points. Make Leader Segments Parallel Places content so that each of the last leader segments in the selected multileaders are parallel. Specify Spacing Specifies spacing between the extents of the content of selected multileaders.
Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Collect Summary After you select multileaders, you can specify their placement. For example: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify collected multileader location (page 656) or [Vertical (page 656)/Horizontal (page 656)/Wrap (page 656)] Specify Collected Multileader Location Specifies the point for placing the multileader collection in the upper-left corner of the collection. Vertical Places the multileader collection in one or more columns.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Leaders tool group ➤ Add Leader, Remove Leader Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multileader ➤ Add Leader Pointing device: Hover over Landing grip and choose Add Leader; hover over leader endpoint grip and choose Remove Leader List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify leader arrowhead location (page 657) or [Remove Leaders (page 657)] Add Leader Adds a leader line to a selected multileader object.
See also: Create and Modify Leaders MLEADERSTYLE Creates and modifies multileader styles. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Multileader Style Summary The Multileader Style Manager (page 658) is displayed.
Summary Sets the current multileader style and creates, modifies, and deletes multileader styles. The appearance of multileaders is controlled by multileader styles. These styles specify formatting for landing lines, leader lines, arrowheads, and content. List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Multileader Style Displays the name of the multileader style that is applied to multileaders you create. The default multileader style is Standard.
List Controls the contents of the Styles list. Click All Styles to display all multileader styles available in the drawing. Click Styles In Use to display only the multileader styles that are referenced by multileaders in the current drawing. Preview Of Displays a preview image of the style that is selected in the Styles list. New (+) Displays the Create New Multileader Style dialog box, in which you can define new multileader styles. Delete (-) Deletes the multileader style selected in the Styles list.
Summary Controls the general appearance of the multileader. List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Displays a preview image of the style being modified. List of Tabs The following tabs are displayed.
Leader Format Tab Controls the formatting of the leader lines and arrowheads for the multileader. General Controls the general settings of the arrowheads. Type Determines the type of leader line. You can choose a straight leader, a spline, or no leader line. Color Determines the color of the leader line. Linetype Determines the linetype of the leader line. Lineweight Determines the lineweight of the leader line. Arrowhead Controls the appearance of the multileader arrowheads.
Leader Structure Tab Controls the number of leader points, landing size, and scale for the multilieader. Constrain Controls the constraints of the multileader. Maximum Leader Points Specifies a maximum number of points for the leader line. First Segment Angle Specifies the angle of the first point in the leader line. Second Segment Angle Specifies the angle of the second point in the multileader landing line. Landing Controls the landing settings of the multileader.
Content Tab Controls the type of content attached to the multileader. Multileader Type Determines whether the multileader contains text or a block. MText: Text Options Controls the appearance of the text for the multileader. Default Text Sets default text for the multileader content. The [...] button launches the MTEXT In Place Editor. Text Style Lists the available text styles. Text Style Button Displays the Text Style dialog box (page 1006) where you can create or modify text styles.
Horizontal Inserts the leader to the left or right of the text content. A horizontal attachment includes a landing line between the text and the leader. Left Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the text is to the right of the leader. Right Controls the attachment of the landing line to the multileader text when the text is to the left of the leader. Landing Gap Specifies the distance between the landing line and the multileader text.
Specifies the color of the multileader block content. The Block color control in the MLEADERSTYLE Content tab only takes effect if the object color included in the block is set to ByBlock. Scale Specifies the scale of the block upon insertion. For example, if the block is a 1 inch square and the scale specified is 0.5000, then the block is inserted as a 1/2 inch square.
MLEDIT (-MLEDIT) Edits multiline intersections, breaks, and vertices. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Multiline Summary If you enter -mledit at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 667). See also: Modify Multilines -MLEDIT Edits multiline intersections, breaks, and vertices. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. CC Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines. OC Creates an open-cross intersection between two multilines.
CJ Creates a corner joint between multilines. The multilines are trimmed or extended to their intersection. AV Adds a vertex to a multiline. DV Deletes a vertex from a multiline. CS Creates a visual break in a selected element of a multiline. CA Creates a visual break through the entire multiline. WA Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut. See also: Modify Multilines MLINE Creates multiple parallel lines. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ Multiline List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the multiline. Close Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with the first segments. Justification Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify. â– Top (page 669) â– Zero (page 669) â– Bottom (page 669) Top Draws the multiline below the cursor, so that the line with the most positive offset is at the specified points. Zero Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the cursor, so that the element with an offset of 0.
Scale Controls the overall width of the multiline. This scale does not affect linetype scale. The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style definition. A scale factor of 2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset line—the smallest on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right. A negative scale value also alters the scale by the absolute value.
Summary On the Model layout, you can create drawings in model space. The Model layout automatically sets the TILEMODE (page 1464) system variable to 1, and you can create model viewports to display various views of your drawing. Once you have completed your drawing, you can choose a named (paper space) layout to begin designing a layout environment from which to plot.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects: Specify base point or [Displacement]: Specify second point or
Number of Actions Reverses the specified number of actions. All Reverses all previous actions. Last Reverses only the last action. See also: Correct Mistakes MSPACE In a layout, switches from paper space to model space in a layout viewport. Access Methods Pointing device: Double-click over a viewport on a named layout. Double-click outside of a viewport on a named layout to return to paper space. Summary Commands operate in either model space or paper space.
Summary Displays either the Text Editor visor and the In-Place Text Editor to modify the formatting or content of the selected multiline text object. The In-Place Text Editor (page 675) is displayed. See also: Change Multiline Text MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Text tool group ➤ Multiline flyout ➤ Multiline Text Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Multiline Text Summary You can create several paragraphs of text as a single multiline text (mtext) object.
In-Place Text Editor Creates or modifies single or multiline text objects. Summary You can import or paste text from other files to use in multiline text, set tabs, adjust paragraph and line spacing and alignment, and create and modify columns.
Clipboard Contains options to Cut, Copy, and Paste text to or from the clipboard. The Paste Special option allows you to paste without character or paragraph formatting. Insert Field Displays the Insert Field dialog box (page 429). Symbol Displays a list of available symbols. You can also select a Non-breaking space and open the Characters dialog box for additional symbols. Import Text Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)).
â– Restart: Starts a new letter or number sequence in list formatting. If the selected items are in the middle of a list, unselected items below them also become part of the new list. â– Continue: Adds the selected paragraphs to the last list above and continues the sequence. If list items rather than paragraphs are selected, unselected items below the selected items continue the sequence. â– Allow Auto-list: Applies list formatting as you type.
Remove Formatting Removes character formatting for selected characters, paragraph formatting for a selected paragraph, or all formatting from a selected paragraph. (Not available for single-line text.) Background Mask Displays the Background Mask dialog box (page 686). (Not available for table cells and single-line text.) Stack Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the selected text contains stack characters. Also, unstacks text if stacked text is selected.
Check Spelling Settings Displays the Check Spelling Settings dialog box (page 984), where you can specify text options that will be checked for spelling errors within your drawing. Text Highlight Color Specifies the highlight color when text is selected. See also: Overview of Multiline Text Text Editor Visor Formats the text of the current multiline text object. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Overline Turns overline on and off for new or selected text. Editor Options Undo Undoes actions in the text editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Redo Redoes actions in the text editor, including changes to either text content or text formatting. Cancel Closes the text editor and changes are ignored. Save Closes the text editor and saves your changes. More Options Displays the second row of the visor which contains additional formatting options.
Insert Options Insert Symbols Inserts a symbol or a nonbreaking space at the cursor position. You can also insert symbols manually. See Symbols and Special Characters (page 696). Commonly used symbols are listed on the submenu, along with their control code or Unicode string. Click Other to display the Character dialog box, which contains the entire character set for each font available on your system.
Summary Specifies tab stops, indents, controls paragraph alignment, paragraph spacing, and paragraph line spacing. NOTE Not all of the new options for paragraph and paragraph line spacing are supported in AutoCAD 2007 and previous releases. See MTEXT Paragraph and Paragraph Line Spacing in Previous Releases in the User’s Guide. List of Options The following options are displayed. Tab Specifies the tab stops and decimal styles to use for the paragraph.
Tab Stops Displays tab setting options, including adding and removing tabs. Options include setting left, center, right, and decimal tabs. You can also set tabs from the Tab selection button on the In-Place Editor’s ruler. Decimal style Sets the decimal style based on current user locale. Options include setting the decimal style as period, comma, and space. This setting is preserved with the drawing even if the locale setting is changed. Indent Controls the left and right indents for the paragraph.
Summary You can specify column and gutter width, height, and number of columns. You can edit column width and height with grip-editing. To create multiple columns you always start with a single column. Depending on the column mode you choose, you have two different methods for creating and manipulating columns – static mode or dynamic mode. List of Options The following options are displayed. No Columns Specifies no columns for the current mtext object.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Column Type Lists choices for the type of columns you want to create. Height Displays the height of the multiline text object when Auto Height with Dynamic or Static Columns is selected. Number Sets the number of columns. This is only active when you select Static Columns. Width Displays and specifies control column and gutter width values. The gutter value is five times the default multiline text height.
Also displays the total width value of the multiline text object. See also: Overview of Multiline Text Background Mask Dialog Box Controls using an opaque background behind multiline text. List of Options The following options are displayed. Use Background Mask Puts an opaque background behind the text. NOTE When you apply a background mask to mtext multiple columns only the column areas will be masked. The space between the columns commonly referred to as gutters will be unmasked.
Specifies a color for the opaque background. You can select one of the colors in the list or click Select Color to open the Color Palette dialog box (page 198). See also: Overview of Multiline Text Find and Replace Dialog Box - MTEXT Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select the Find and Replace icon in the text editor or from the MTEXT shortcut menu List of Options The following options are displayed.
Find Next Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What. Replace Finds the next instance of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. Replace All Finds all instances of the text specified in Find What and replaces it with the text in Replace With. Hide Options Specifies advanced find options. Match Case Finds only text with uppercase and lowercase characters as specified in Find What.
Summary To open the Stack Properties dialog box, select the stacked text, right-click, and click Stack Properties on the shortcut menu. You can edit the upper and lower text separately. The Appearance options control the stack style, position, and text size of the stacked text. List of Options The following options are displayed. Text Changes the upper and lower numbers of a stacked fraction. Upper Edits the number in the upper part or first half of a stacked fraction.
NOTE Releases of AutoCAD earlier than AutoCAD 2000 do not support diagonal fractions. If a multiline text object contains diagonal fractions, the fractions are converted to horizontal fractions when you save the drawing to pre-AutoCAD 2000 releases. Diagonal fractions are restored when the drawing is re-opened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release.
AutoStack Properties Dialog Box Sets the defaults for automatically stacking characters. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select stacked text in the text editor. Right-click and click Stack Properties on the shortcut menu. In the Stack Properties dialog box, click AutoStack. List of Options The following options are displayed. Enable AutoStacking Automatically stacks numeric characters entered before and after the carat, slash, or pound character.
NOTE Whether AutoStack is on or off, the pound character is always converted to a diagonal fraction, and the carat character is always converted to a tolerance format. See also: Overview of Multiline Text -MTEXT Creates a multiline text object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner. Specify opposite corner (page ?) or [Height (page ?)/Justify (page ?)/Line spacing (page ?)/Rotation (page ?)/Style (page ?)/Width (page ?)/Columns (page ?)].
Justify Determines both text justification and text flow, for new or selected text, in relation to the text boundary. The current justification is applied to new text. The text is justified within the specified rectangle based on the justification setting and one of nine justification points on the rectangle. The justification point is based on the first point used to specify the rectangle. Text is center-, left-, or right-justified with respect to the left and right text boundaries.
Line Spacing Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. Line spacing is the vertical distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom of the next line of text. NOTE Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table. Use a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does not overlap. At Least Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height of the largest character in the line.
Exactly Forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text in the multiline text object. Spacing is based on the text height of the object or text style. Spacing Factor Sets the line spacing to a multiple of single-line spacing. Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text characters. You can enter a spacing factor as a number followed by x to indicate a multiple of single spacing. For example, specify single spacing by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering 2x.
Dynamic Specifies column width, gutter width and column height. Dynamic columns are text driven. Adjusting columns affect text flow and text flow causes columns to be added or removed. No columns Sets no column mode to current mtext object. The default column setting is stored in the MTEXTCOLUMN (page 1372) system variable. See also: Overview of Multiline Text Symbols and Special Characters You can include special characters and symbols by entering a control code or a Unicode string.
To insert the following text symbols, click Symbol on the expanded Text Formatting toolbar or enter the appropriate Unicode string: Text symbols and Unicode strings Name Symbol Unicode String Almost equal \U+2248 Angle \U+2220 Boundary line \U+E100 Centerline \U+2104 Delta \U+0394 Electrical phase \U+0278 Flow line \U+E101 Identity \U+2261 Initial length \U+E200 Commands | 697
Text symbols and Unicode strings Name Symbol Unicode String Monument line \U+E102 Not equal \U+2260 Ohm \U+2126 Omega \U+03A9 Plate/property line \U+214A Subscript 2 \U+2082 Squared \U+00B2 Cubed \U+00B3 These text symbols are available in the following True Type (TTF) and SHX fonts: â– Simplex* â– Romans* â– gdt* â– amgdt* â– Isocp 698 | Chapter 2 Commands
â– Isocp2 â– Isocp3 â– Isoct â– Isoct2 â– Isoct3 â– Isocpeur (TTF only)* â– Isocpeur italic (TTF only) â– Isocteur (TTF only) â– Isocteur italic (TTF only) * These fonts also include the Initial Length symbol used for arc length dimensions. See also: Overview of Multiline Text MULTIPLE Repeats the next command until canceled. Summary The command that you enter is repeated until you press Esc. Because MULTIPLE repeats only the command name, any parameters must be specified each time.
MVIEW Creates and controls layout viewports. Access Methods Toolbar: Layout visor ➤ New Viewport Shortcut menu: Right-click the drawing area when a named layout is current and click New Viewport. Summary In a layout, you can create as many viewports as you want, but only up to 64 viewports can be active at one time (see MAXACTVP (page 1366)). Objects in model space are visible only in active viewports. Viewports that are not active are blank.
Shadeplot Specifies how viewports in named (paper space) layouts are plotted. As Displayed Specifies that a viewport is plotted the same way it is displayed. Wireframe Specifies that a viewport is plotted wireframe regardless of the current display. Hidden Specifies that a viewport is plotted with hidden lines removed regardless of the current display. All Visual Styles Specifies that a viewport is plotted using the specified visual style.
Undo Removes the most recent line or arc segment added to the polygonal viewport. Restore Restores viewport configurations saved with the VPORTS (page 1115) command. â– Enter Viewport Configuration Name. â– ? First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window selection method; the viewports are fit into the selected area. Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area. Layer Resets layer property overrides for the selected viewport to their global layer properties.
smaller ones. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify where the larger viewport is placed. â– First Corner (page 702) â– Fit (page 702) 4 Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of equal size. â– First Corner (page 702) â– Fit (page 702) See also: Create and Modify Layout Viewports MVSETUP Sets up the specifications of a drawing.
See also: Create and Modify Layout Viewports MVSETUP on the Model Layout The Model layout is most useful for plotting multiple views of a drawing within a single border. On the Model layout, you set the units type, drawing scale factor, and paper size at the Command prompt using MVSETUP. Using the settings you provide, a rectangular border is drawn at the grid limits.
You can specify a global scale as the ratio between the scale of the title block in the layout and the drawing on the Model layout. To easily specify all layout page settings and prepare your drawing for plotting, you can also use the Page Setup Manager.
Entering 1 creates a single viewport whose size is determined by the following prompts. Entering 2 creates four viewports by dividing a specified area into quadrants. You are prompted for the area to be divided and the distance between the viewports. The viewing angle for each quadrant is set as shown in the table.
Uniform Sets the same scale factor for all viewports. Options Sets the MVSETUP preferences before you change your drawing. Layer Specifies a layer on which to insert the title block. Limits Specifies whether to reset the grid limits to the drawing extents after a title block has been inserted. Units Specifies whether the sizes and point locations are translated to inch or millimeter paper units. Xref Specifies whether the title block is inserted or externally referenced.
Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session. See also: Create and Modify Layout Viewports N Commands NAVVCUBE Indicates the current viewing direction. Dragging or clicking the ViewCube tool rotates the scene. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ ViewCube ➤ On Toolbar: Status bar ➤ ViewCube Summary Click the ViewCube tool to rotate and fill the window with the entire model or an object selected in the view.
See also: Use ViewCube Tool ViewCube Settings Dialog Box Controls the display properties of the ViewCube tool. List of Options The following options are displayed. Display Location Identifies the corner in a viewport where the ViewCube tool is displayed. (NAVVCUBELOCATION (page 1375) system variable) Size Specifies the size of the ViewCube tool.
Select Automatic to have the size of the ViewCube tool adjust based on the current size of the active viewport, zoom factor of the active layout, or drawing window. Inactive Opacity Controls the opacity of the ViewCube tool when inactive. (NAVVCUBEOPACITY (page 1375) system variable) When Dragging Snap to Closest View Specifies if the current view is adjusted to the closest preset view when changing the view by dragging the ViewCube tool.
NEW Creates a new drawing. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ New Summary If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 instead of 1, a Command prompt is displayed (page 711). See also: Overview of Starting a New Drawing NEW Command Prompt Summary Enter a tilde (~) at the prompt to display the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter template file name or [. (for none)] : Enter a name, enter a period (.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Annotation Scaling tool group ➤ Add/Delete Scales Menu: Modify ➤ Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales Shortcut menu: Select an annotative object. Right-click in the drawing area and click Annotative Object Scale ➤ Add/Delete Scales. Command entry: 'objectscale for transparent use Summary An annotative object can support several annotation scales for views at different scales.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Object Scale List Displays the list of scales supported by the selected object. List all scales for selected objects Specifies that all scales supported by the selected objects are displayed in the Object Scale List. List scales common to all selected objects only Specifies that only the supported scales that are common to all selected objects are displayed in the Object Scale List. Add (+) Displays the Add Scales to Object Dialog Box (page 714).
See also: Scale Views in Layout Viewports Add Scales to Object Dialog Box Adds a new scale to the selected annotative object. List of Options The following option is displayed. Scale List Displays the list of scales that can be added to the selected annotative object. Multiple scales can be selected by holding down the Shift or Command key while selecting the scales. Use the SCALELISTEDIT (page 918) command to add custom scales to this list.
-OBJECTSCALE List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select annotative objects: Use an object selection method Enter an option [Add (page ?)/Delete (page ?)/? (page 715)] : Enter a or d or press Enter Add Adds an annotation scale to the selected annotative objects. When created, an annotative object supports one annotation scale: the current annotation scale. However, an annotative object can be updated to support additional annotation scales for views at different scales.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Copy tool group ➤ Offset Menu: Modify ➤ Offset Summary You can offset an object at a specified distance or through a point. After you offset objects, you can trim and extend them as an efficient method to create drawings containing many parallel lines and curves. The OFFSET command repeats for convenience. To exit the command, press Enter. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Offset Distance Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object. Exit Exits the OFFSET command. Multiple Enters the Multiple offset mode, which repeats the offset operation using the current offset distance. Undo Reverses the previous offset. Through Creates an object passing through a specified point. NOTE For best results when you offset a polyline with corners, specify the through point near the midpoint of a line segment, not near a corner.
OFFSETEDGE Creates a closed polyline or spline object that is offset at a specified distance from the edges of a selected planar face on a 3D solid or surface. Summary You can offset the edges of a planar face on a 3D solid or surface. The result is a closed polyline or spline that is located on the same plane as the selected face or surface, and can be inside or outside the original edges. TIP You can use the resulting object with PRESSPULL (page 827) or EXTRUDE (page 423) to create new solids.
Specify point on side to offset Specify a point location to determine whether the offset distance is applied inside or outside the edges of the face. Corner Specifies the type of corners on the offset object when it is created outside the edges of the selected face. Sharp Creates sharp corners between offset linear segments. Rounded Creates rounded corners between offset linear segments, using a radius that is equal to the offset distance.
OPEN Opens an existing drawing file. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Open Summary The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed. When FILEDIA (page 1296) is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays a Command prompt (page 723). See also: Open a Drawing Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes Several commands display standard file selection dialog boxes, in which you can navigate through the files and folders on a local and network drive.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Task Pane Provides access to categories that represent locations files might be stored in; devices, shared and predefined places, and media. You can reorder the items under a category by dragging them to a new position. To add a new item to Places, drag a folder from the list. Changes to Places affect all standard file selection dialog boxes. Devices Lists the local storage devices attached to your computer.
Places Lists a number of predefined, user added, or Smart folders that are dependent on your user profile. Documents Displays the contents of the Documents folder for the current user profile. Desktop Displays the contents of your desktop. Search For Lists the files that you most recently searched for. Media Lists folders related to media located on your computer, such as photos or movies. Back Returns to the previous file location. Forward Returns you to the file location before Back was clicked.
Search Allows you to search for a file or folder located on the computer using Spotlight. Search results can be saved as Smart folders under Places in the Task Pane. Files List Displays the files and folders in the current place. Use the Views buttons to control navigation behavior, and how files and folders are listed. File Format When you are opening or saving files, File Format specifies the format of the files you can select for open or in which the file is saved.
OPTIONS Customizes the program settings. Access Methods Menu: AutoCAD 2012 ➤ Preferences Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area. Click Preferences. Summary The Application Preferences dialog box (page 724) is displayed. See also: Set Up the Drawing Area Application Preferences Dialog Box Customizes the program settings.
General Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box) Controls the behavior of program features. List of Options The following options are displayed. Mouse & Trackpad Customization Controls the behavior of the mouse or trackpad. Enable Quick Secondary Click as Return Key Controls right-click behavior. A quick click is the same as pressing Enter. A longer click displays a shortcut menu. You can set the duration of the longer click in milliseconds.
Display the Viewport Controls Controls whether the menus for viewport tools, views, and visual styles that are located in the upper-left corner of every viewport are displayed. (VPCONTROL (page 1489) system variable) File Save Precautions Assists in avoiding data loss. Automatic Save Saves your drawing automatically at the intervals you specify. You can specify the location of all Autosave files by using the SAVEFILEPATH (page 1423) system variable.
Cursor & Selection Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box) Controls the appearance and behavior of the cursor and selection. List of Options The following options are displayed. Selection Modes Controls the selection of objects in the drawing area. Use Shift Key to Add to Selection Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it.
To clear a selection set quickly, draw a selection window in a blank area of the drawing. (PICKADD (page 1392) system variable) Click and Drag to Start Selection Controls the method of drawing a selection window. If this option is cleared, you can draw a selection window by selecting two separate points with the pointing device. (PICKDRAG (page 1393) system variable) Selection Tool Controls the appearance of the cursor in the drawing area.
Enable Grips with Blocks Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. (GRIPBLOCK (page 1307) system variable) Enable Grips Tips Controls the display of grip tips and Ctrl-cycling tooltips. This option has no effect on standard objects. (GRIPTIPS (page 1312) system variable) Limit Grip Display To N Selected Objects Suppresses the display of grips when the selection set includes more than the specified number of objects. The valid range is 1 to 32,767. The default setting is 100.
Units & Guides Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box) Controls the units used when inserting blocks or referencing objects, and which drafting guides are enabled. List of Options The following options are displayed. Insertion Scale Controls the default scale for inserting blocks and drawings into a drawing. Source Content Units Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. If Unspecified-Unitless is selected, the object is not scaled when inserted.
U Size Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M direction and the U isolines density on surface objects. (SURFU (page 1455) system variable) V Size Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the N direction and the V isolines density on surface objects. (SURFV (page 1455) system variable) AutoTrack Settings ™ Controls the settings that relate to AutoTrack behavior, which is available when polar tracking or object snap tracking is turned on (see DSETTINGS (page 363)).
Look & Feel Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box) Controls the appearance of the program user interface. List of Options The following options are displayed. Interface Theme Defines the color scheme for the user interface. Themes Controls which theme to apply to elements such as the status bar, palettes, and the drawing windows. You can choose from a Dark or Light theme.
Tooltip Appearance Controls the appearance of drafting tooltips. Size Specifies a size for tooltips. The default size is 0. Use the slider to make tooltips larger or smaller. Transparency Controls the transparency of tooltips. The lower the setting, the less transparent the tooltip. A value of 0 sets the tooltip to opaque. Interface Overrides Overrides used to fine tune the colors applied to the background of the drawing area.
Annotative Objects Specifies the fading intensity value for objects during in-place reference editing. Objects that are not being edited are displayed at a lesser intensity. (XFADECTL (page 1526) system variable) With in-place reference editing, you can edit a block reference or external reference from within the current drawing. The valid range is 0 through 90 percent. Xrefs Controls the dimming for all DWG xref objects.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Support File Search Path Specifies the folders in which the program should look for text fonts, customization files, plug-ins, drawings to insert, linetypes, and hatch patterns that are not in the current folder. Working Support File Search Path Displays the active directories that the program searches for support files specific to your system.
Main Customization File Specifies the default location of the main customization file (acad.cuix). Custom Icon Location Specifies the location for custom icons referenced by your customization files. Command Aliases Specifies the location of the PGP file that should be loaded when AutoCAD for Mac is started. Help and Miscellaneous File Names Specifies the names and locations of various types of files. Help File Specifies the location of the local Help file.
PostScript Prolog Section Name Present for legacy reasons only. Autodesk has dropped active support of PostScript and the PSIN, PSOUT, and PSPROLOG commands. Printer Support File Path Specifies search path settings for printer support files. Print Spooler File Location Specifies the path for print spool files. Printer Configuration Search Path Specifies the path for printer configuration files. Printer Description File Search Path Specifies the path for files with a .
network or opening files from a CD), specify an alternate location for your temporary files. The folder you specify must not be write-protected. A character limit of 255 for the combined file name and path length of temporary files is used. The TEMPPREFIX (page 1460) system variable (read-only) stores the current location of temporary drawing files. Temporary External Reference File Location Creates a path for storing temporary copies of demand-loaded xref files.
The archive contains many of the customization files located in the following folders: â– /Users//Library/Application Support/Autodesk/local/AutoCAD 2012 â– /Users//Library/Application Support/Autodesk/roaming/AutoCAD 2012 See also: Set Up the Drawing Area Document Settings Tab (Application Preferences Dialog Box) Controls the display settings for a drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. 2D Display Resolution Controls the display of 2D objects.
Arc & Circle Smoothness Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. (VIEWRES (page 1108) command) 3D Display Resolution Controls the display of 3D objects. Contour Lines per Surface Specifies the number of contour lines per surface on objects. (ISOLINES (page 1343) system variable) Smoothness for 3D Printing and Rendering Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with hidden lines removed.
Summary You can also set the location of Alternate Font File by using the FONTALT (page 1298) system variable. If you do not specify an alternate font, when you open a drawing containing fonts that cannot be located, a dialog box is displayed in which you specify a font to use for each missing font. List of Options The following options are displayed. Font Name Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all SHX fonts in the Fonts folder.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale List Metric Displays the default list of metric scales. Imperial Displays the default list of imperial scales. If a scale name is duplicated, but has a different value, a number is appended to the name. Add Creates a new scale in the scale list. Press Tab to move between the fields of the scale being edited. Delete Removes the selected scale from the scale list. Options Manages items in the scale list.
Summary In the illustration, a line is drawn using Ortho mode. Point 1 is the first point specified, and point 2 is the position of the cursor when the second point is specified. Ortho mode is used when you specify an angle or distance by means of two points using a pointing device. In Ortho mode, cursor movement is constrained to the horizontal or vertical direction relative to the UCS. Horizontal is defined as being parallel to the X axis of the UCS and vertical as being parallel to the Y axis.
If you enter -osnap at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current osnap modes: current Enter list of object snap modes (page ?): Enter names of object snap modes separated with commas, or enternoneoroff Object Snap Modes Specify one or more object snap modes by entering the first three characters of the name. If you enter more than one name, separate the names with commas.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Explode tool set ➤ Delete Duplicate Objects Menu: Modify ➤ Delete Duplicate Objects Summary Displays the Delete Duplicate Objects dialog box (page 745). Removes redundant geometry.
List of Prompts Object Difference Tolerance Controls the precision with which OVERKILL makes numeric comparisons. If this value is 0, the two objects being compared must match before OVERKILL modifies or deletes one of them. Ignore Object Property: Use these settings to determine which object properties are ignored during comparison. Color Object color is ignored. Layer Object layers are ignored. Linetype Object linetypes are ignored. Linetype Scale Object linetype scale is ignored.
Thickness Object thickness is ignored. Transparency Object transparency is ignored. Plot style Object plot style is ignored. Material Object material is ignored. Options Use these settings to control how OVERKILL deals with lines, arcs, and polylines. Optimize polyline segments When selected, individual line and arc segments within selected polylines are examined. Duplicate vertices and segments are removed.
Select objects: Use an object selection method Enter an option to change [Ignore (page 748)/tOlerance (page 748)/optimize Plines (page 748)/combine parTial overlap (page 748)/combine Endtoend (page 749)/Associativity (page 749)] : List of Options Ignore Ignores one or more of the following properties during object comparison â– None â– All â– Color â– LAyer â– Ltype â– Ltscale â– LWeight â– Thickness â– TRansparency â– plotStyle â– Material Tolerance Defines the value within which OVERKILL
Combine End to End Objects that have common endpoints are combined into single objects. Associativity Associative objects are not deleted or modified. See also: Erase Objects P Commands PAGESETUP Controls the page layout, plotting device, paper size, and other settings for each new layout. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Page Setup Manager Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Quick View. In the Quick View dialog box, right-click a layout and click Page Setup. Summary The Page Setup Manager (page 749) is displayed.
Summary You can also create named page setups, modify existing ones, or import page setups from other drawings. List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Layout Lists the current layout to which the page setup will be applied. Page Setups Displays the current page setup, sets a different page setup as current, creates a new page setup, modifies an existing page setup, and imports page setups from other drawings.
Current Page Setup Indicated by a triangle to the left of the page setup name. Page Setup List Lists the page setups that are available to apply to the current layout. The list includes the named and default layout page setups that are available in the drawing. Double-click the column to the left of a page setup in this list to set it as the current page setup for the current layout or double-click in the Page Setups column to rename a page setup.
If you select DWT as the file type, the Template folder opens automatically in the Select Page Setup From File dialog box. When you click Open, the Import Page Setups dialog box (page 759) is displayed. Details Displays information about the selected page setup. Device Name Displays the name of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Printer Displays the type of output device specified in the currently selected page setup.
List of Options The following options are displayed. New Page Setup Name Specifies the name for the new page setup. Start From Specifies a page setup to use as a starting point for the new page setup. When you click Continue, the Page Setup dialog box (page 753) is displayed with the settings of the selected page setup, which you can modify as necessary. Specifies that the default output device is set as the printer in the new page setup.
Summary The Page Setup dialog box is displayed in the following cases: â– When you create a new page setup through the Page Setup Manager (page 749) â– When you modify an existing page setup through the Page Setup Manager (page 749) â– When you modify an existing page setup through the Print dialog box The page setup settings that you specify are stored with the layout and can be applied to other layouts or imported into other drawings. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Page Setup Name Displays the name of the current page setup. Printer/Plotter Specifies a configured output device to use when printing layouts. Printer Lists the available system printers from which you can select to print the current layout. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Description Displays descriptive text about the output device specified in the currently selected page setup.
Click the Window button to use the pointing device to specify the two corners of the area to be plotted, or enter coordinate values. Model/Layout Views Plots a view that was previously saved with the -VIEW (page 1104) command. Layout/Limits When plotting a layout, plots everything within the printable area of the specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0 in the layout. When plotting from the Model layout, plots the entire drawing area that is defined by the grid limits.
The printable area of a drawing sheet is defined by the selected output device and is represented by a dashed line in a layout. When you change to another output device, the printable area may change. You can offset the geometry on the paper by entering a positive or negative value in the X and Y offset boxes. The plotter unit values are in inches or millimeters on the paper. Center on Page Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to center the plot on the paper.
â– Hidden: Plots objects with the Hidden visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. â– Realistic: Plots objects with the Realistic visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen. â– Shaded: Plots objects with Shaded visual style applied regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the screen.
Plot stamp settings are specified in the Plot Stamp Settings dialog box (page 801), in which you can specify the information that you want applied to the plot stamp, such as drawing name, date and time, plot scale, and so on. Include Plot Stamp Turns on plot stamping for the layout. Plot Stamp Settings Displays the Plot Stamp Settings dialog box when Include Plot Stamp is selected. Print Options Specifies options for lineweights, transparency, and the order in which objects are plotted.
Summary List of Options The following options are displayed. Source Drawing Displays the source drawing that contains the listed page setups that are available to import. Page Setups Lists the page setups that are available to import and their location in the source drawing. Selected page setups are imported into the current drawing when you click OK. When you import page setups into a page setup overrides file for a sheet set, only page setups with Plot Area set to Layout or Extents are listed.
Details Displays information about the selected page setup. Device Name Displays the name of the plot device specified in the currently selected page setup. Printer Displays the type of output device specified in the currently selected page setup. Page Size Displays the paper size and orientation specified in the currently selected page setup. Where Displays the physical location of the output device specified in the currently selected page setup.
See also: Specify Page Setup Settings PALETTEICONOFF Restores the display of all palettes collapsed by PALETTEICONON.
Click a button on the bar to display the associated palette. The palette will remain open until you click the button again or click a different button on the palette bar. Use the PALETTEICONOFF (page 762) command to return to palette state. See also: Specify the Behavior of Palettes PAN Moves the view planar to the screen. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Pan ➤ Realtime Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Pan Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and click Pan.
Panning in Real Time As a view is being panned, the cursor updates to let you know when you have reached the extents of the drawing. Summary The cursor changes to a hand cursor. By holding down the pick button on the pointing device, you lock the cursor to its current location relative to the viewport coordinate system. The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the cursor. When you reach a logical extent (edge of the drawing space), a bar is displayed on the hand cursor on that edge.
You can specify a single point, indicating the relative displacement of the drawing with respect to the current location, or (more commonly) you can specify two points, in which case the displacement is computed from the first point to the second point. If you press Enter, the drawing is moved by the amount you specified in the Specify Base Point or Displacement prompt.
3D Orbit Switches to 3DORBIT. Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window. Zoom Original Restores the original view. Zoom Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents. See also: Pan or Zoom a View PARAMETERS (-PARAMETERS) Manages all dimensional constraint parameters, reference parameters, and user variables in the current drawing from the Command prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Menu: Edit ➤ Paste Shortcut menu: With no command active, right-click in the drawing area, and click Clipboard ➤ Paste Command entry: Cmd-V Summary If the Clipboard contains ASCII text, the text is inserted as a multiline text (mtext) object using the MTEXT (page 674) defaults. A spreadsheet is inserted as a table object. When you copy objects to the Clipboard, information is stored in all available formats.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select polyline or [MULTIPLE (page 699)]: Use an object selection method or enter m The remaining prompts depend on whether you have selected a 2D polyline (page 769), a 3D polyline (page 776), or 3D polygon mesh (page 779). If the selected object is a line, arc, or a spline, the following prompt is displayed: Object selected is not a polyline.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Convert Lines, Arcs and Splines to polylines [Yes/No]? : Enter yor n or press Enter Specify a precision for spline conversion <10>: Enter a new precision value or press Enter The entered precision value affects all splines in the selection set. The precision value is an integer between 0 and 99. 2D Polyline Selection (PEDIT) If you select a 2D polyline, the following prompt is displayed: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Open Removes the closing segment of the polyline. The polyline is considered closed unless you open it using the Open option. Join Adds lines, arcs, or polylines to the end of an open polyline and removes the curve fitting from a curve-fit polyline. For objects to join the polyline, their endpoints must touch unless you use the Multiple option at the first PEDIT prompt. In this case, you can join polylines that do not touch if the fuzz distance is set to a value large enough to include the endpoints.
Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed. Break Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex. If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the result is one truncated polyline.
Move Moves the marked vertex. Regen Regenerates the polyline. Straighten Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex. If you want to remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline and then extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the FILLET (page 432) command with a fillet radius of 0. Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex.
Tangent Attaches a tangent direction to the marked vertex for use later in curve fitting. Width Changes the starting and ending widths for the segment that immediately follows the marked vertex. You must regenerate the polyline to display the new width. Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode. Fit Creates an arc-fit polyline, a smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each pair of vertices. The curve passes through all vertices of the polyline and uses any tangent direction you specify.
Spline-fit polylines are very different from the curves produced by the Fit option. Fit constructs pairs of arcs that pass through every control point. Both of these curves are different from true B-splines produced with the SPLINE (page 988) command. If the original polyline included arc segments, they are straightened when the spline's frame is formed. If the frame has width, the resulting spline tapers smoothly from the width of the first vertex to the width of the last vertex.
The Join option of PEDIT decurves the spline and discards the spline information of the original and any added polylines. Once the Join operation is complete, you can fit a new spline to the resulting polyline. The Edit Vertex options of PEDIT have the following effect: â– The Next and Previous options move the X marker only to points on the frame of the spline, whether visible or not. â– The Break option discards the spline.
To change the number of segments used to fit an existing spline, change SPLINESEGS and respline the curve. You do not have to decurve it first. Decurve Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all segments of the polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the polyline vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests. If you edit a spline-fit polyline with a command such as BREAK (page 155) or TRIM (page 1067), you cannot use the Decurve option.
Close Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment with the first. The polyline is considered open unless you close it with Close. Open Removes the closing segment of the polyline. The polyline is considered closed unless you open it with Open. Join Joins an open curve to the 3D polyline. The curve can be on a different plane, but must be contiguous with the 3D polyline. Edit Vertex Performs various editing tasks on one vertex of the polyline and segments that follow it.
Straighten Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any other vertex. Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two vertices you select, replaces them with single straight line segments, and returns to Edit Vertex mode. If you specify only one vertex by entering go without moving the X marker, the segment following that vertex is made straight if it is an arc.
depending on the direction in which a polyline was created, the text in the linetype might be displayed upside down. Undo Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session. 3D Polygon Mesh Selection (PEDIT) If you select a polygon mesh, the following prompt is displayed: List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Left Moves the X marker to the previous vertex in the N direction. The marker does not wrap around from the start to the end of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed. Right Moves the X marker to the next vertex in the N direction. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed. Up Moves the X marker to the next vertex in the M direction. The marker does not wrap around from the end to the start of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed.
Mopen Opens the M-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the M direction. Nclose Closes the N-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the N direction. Nopen Opens the N-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the N direction. Undo Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session. PFACE Creates a 3D polyface mesh vertex by vertex. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
To make an edge invisible, you can enter a negative vertex number for the beginning vertex of the edge. You can create polygons with any number of edges. PFACE automatically breaks them into multiple face objects with the appropriate invisible edges. Faces with one or two vertices behave like point or line objects without the special properties of Point Display modes or linetypes. You can use them to embed wireframe images within a mesh.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Current UCS Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the drawing extents fit in the current viewport of the current UCS. UCS Changes to a plan view of a previously saved UCS and regenerates the display.
See also: Change to a View of the XY Plane PLANESURF Creates a planar surface. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Surfaces - Create tool group ➤ Planar Surface Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Planar Surface Summary You can create a planar surface by selecting closed objects or by specifying the opposite corners of a rectangular surface. Supports pick-first selection and generates a planar surface out of a closed profile.
The SURFU (page 1455) and SURFV (page 1455) system variables control the number of lines displayed on the surface. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner or [Object]: Specify the first point for the planar surface Specify other corner: Specify second point (other corner) for the planar surface Object Creates a planar or trimmed surface by object selection. You can select one closed object or multiple objects that form a closed area.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group ➤ Polyline Menu: Draw ➤ Polyline Summary A 2D polyline is a connected sequence of segments created as a single planar object. You can create straight line segments, arc segments, or a combination of the two. NOTE A temporary plus-shaped marker displays at the first point. This marker can be useful when you create long and complicated polylines. It is removed when you complete the polyline.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify start point: Specify a point Current line-width is Specify next point (page 785) or [Arc (page ?)/Close (page ?)/Halfwidth (page ?)/Length (page ?)/Undo (page ?)/Width (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter an option Next Point Draws a line segment. The previous prompt is repeated. Arc Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Center/Radius]: Specify a point or enter an option Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment. Center Specifies the center of the arc segment. Specify center point of arc: Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment. Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance Specify direction of chord for arc : Specify a point or press Enter Center Specifies the center of the arc segment.
Halfwidth Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its edges. Specify starting half-width : Enter a value or press Enter Specify ending half-width : Enter a value or press Enter The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line.
Specify direction of chord for arc : Specify an angle or press Enter Second Pt Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three-point arc. Specify second point on arc: Specify a point (2) Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3) Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline. Width Specifies the width of the next arc segment.
Halfwidth Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline line segment to one of its edges. Specify starting half-width : Enter a value or press Enter Specify ending half-width : Enter a value or press Enter The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line.
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at the center of the line. Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled. No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles or when a dot-dash linetype is used. See also: Draw Polylines PLOT Outputs a drawing to a printer or file.
See also: Overview of Plotting Print Dialog Box Specifies device and media settings, and plots your drawing. Summary You can display more options by clicking the Show Advanced Settings button to the right of the Printer drop-down list. Printing allows you to output a single layout at a time. If you want to print more than one layout at a time, use the PUBLISH command.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Printer Specifies an output device to use when printing layouts. If the selected output device does not support the layout's selected paper size, a warning is displayed and you can select the device's default paper size or a custom paper size. Click the disclosure triangle to the right of the Printer drop-down list to expand the Print dialog box.
orientation of the selected paper. The letter icon represents the orientation of the drawing on the page. NOTE Drawing orientation is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE (page 1398) system variable. Print Options Specifies which advanced print settings should be used for printing. Select AutoCAD to use the page setup assigned to the layout. See the Mac OS Help documentation for information on the other options.
NOTE If the Layout option is specified in What to Print, the layout is plotted at 1:1 regardless of the setting specified in Scale. Fit to Paper Scales the plot to fit within the selected paper size and displays the custom scale factor in the Scale, Inch =, and Units boxes. Scale Defines the exact scale for the output. Custom defines a user-defined scale. You can create a custom scale by entering the number of inches (or millimeters) equal to the number of drawing units.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Detailed plot configuration [Yes (page ?)/No (page ?)] : Enter yor n or press Enter No Indicates that you do not want a detailed plot configuration for this plot. Enter a layout name or [?] : Enter a page setup name < >: Enter an output device name or [?] : Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] : Enter file name:
Portrait Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of the paper represents the top of the page. Landscape Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of the paper represents the top of the page. Plot upside down [Yes/No] : Orients and plots the drawing upside down. Enter plot area [Display/Extents/Limits/Layout/View/Window] : Display Plots the view in the current viewport on the Model layout or the current view in the layout, depending on which tab you select to plot.
The default scale setting is 1:1 when you are plotting a layout, unless you modified and saved the setting. The default setting is Fit when plotting a Model tab.
Enter file name: : Enter a file name Save changes to page setup? Or set shade plot quality? [Yes/No/Quality] : If you enter y, the current settings in the Page Setup dialog box are saved. If you enter q, you are prompted for the shaded plotting quality and are given the option of providing a custom dpi. Then you are prompted to save the page setup with the added quality settings.
See also: Set Options for Plotted Objects Plot Stamp Settings Dialog Box Specifies the information for the plot stamp. List of Options The following options are displayed.
AutoCAD Fields Specifies the drawing information you want applied to the plot stamp. The selected fields are separated by commas and a space. Drawing Name Includes the drawing name and path in the plot stamp information. Layout Name Includes the name of the layout in the plot stamp information. Date and Time Includes the date and time in the plot stamp information. NOTE A plot stamp uses the current date and time format setting of the operating system.
Parameter File Stores plot stamp information in a file with a .pss extension. Multiple users can access the same file and stamp their plots based on company standard settings. Two PSS files are provided, Mm.pss and Inches.pss, which are located in the Support folder. The initial default plot stamp parameter file name is determined by the regional settings of the operating system when the program is installed. Path Specifies the location of the plot stamp parameter file.
Determines the X offset value that is calculated from either the corner of the paper or the corner of the printable area, depending on which setting you specify. If you specify Offset Relative to Paper Border, the offset value is calculated so that the plot stamp information fits within the paper size. Y Offset Determines the Y offset value that is calculated from either the corner of the paper or the corner of the printable area, depending on which setting you specify.
Log File Writes the plot stamp information to a log file instead of, or in addition to, stamping the current plot. If plot stamping is turned off, the log file can still be created. Create a Log File Writes the plot stamp information to a log file. The default log file is plot.log, and it is located in the main application folder. You can specify a different file name and path. After the initial plot.log file is created, the plot stamp information in each succeeding plotted drawing is added to this file.
Lists the available user-defined fields. Double-click the text of a user-defined field to edit the value. Add (+) Adds an editable user-defined field. Delete (-) Deletes the selected user-defined field. See also: Set Options for Plotted Objects -PLOTSTAMP Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file. If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, the following prompts are displayed. The settings in the PSS file are displayed as defaults for each prompt.
Stamp plot scale? [Yes/No] : User Fields Specifies the user-defined fields you want to apply to the current plot stamp. Enter User field 1 <>: Enter any user-defined field Enter User field 2 <>: Enter any user-defined field Log File Specifies writing the current plot stamp information to a log file rather than applying this information to the current plotted drawing. The default log file is plot.log, unless you specify another file path.
the text to two lines. The placement and offset values you specify for this plot stamp must accommodate the text wrapping and the text height. Enter font name <>: Enter a font name Enter text height <0.1500>: Enter a value Place plot stamp on single line? [Yes/No] : Units Specifies the units used to measure X offset, Y offset, and height. You can define units using inches, millimeters, or pixels.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Plot Style Table Displays a list of the available plot style files that can be edited. A plot style is a collection of property settings used in plotting. Along with selecting a plot style to edit from the list, you can also select one of the following: â– Reveal in Finder. Opens Finder to the folder that contains the listed plot styles.
Summary Lists all of the plot styles in the plot style table and their settings. Plot styles are displayed in columns from left to right. The first plot style in a named plot style table is NORMAL and represents an object's default properties (no plot style applied). You cannot modify or delete the NORMAL style.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Plot Styles Displays the names of plot styles in named plot style tables. Plot styles in named plot style tables can be changed. Plot style names in color-dependent plot style tables are tied to object color and cannot be changed. The program accepts up to 255 characters for style names. Add Style (+) Adds a new plot style to a named plot style table.
more visible. When you turn off dithering, the program maps colors to the nearest color, resulting in a smaller range of colors when plotting. Grayscale Converts the object's colors to grayscale if the plotter supports grayscale. If you clear Convert to Grayscale, the RGB values are used for object colors. Dithering is available whether you use the object's color or assign a plot style color.
Fill Style If you assign a fill style, the fill style overrides the object's fill style at plot time. Pen# Specifies a pen to use when plotting objects that use this plot style. Available pens range from 1 to 32. If plot style color is set to Use Object Color, or you are editing a plot style in a color-dependent plot style table, the value is set to Automatic. If you specify 0, the field updates to read Automatic.
Scale Factor Specifies the amount to scale non-ISO linetypes and fill patterns. Save As Displays the Save dialog box and saves the plot style table to a new name. See also: Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects -PLOTSTYLE Lists all available plotstyles in the current drawing and to set a plotstyle current. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current plot style is "current" Enter an option [?/Current]: ?—List Plot Styles Lists the plot styles in the attached plot style table.
A Portable Network Graphics file is created that contains the objects you select. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen. Light glyphs that are displayed in the drawing appear in the new file, even if the Plot Glyph property of the lights is set to No. NOTE When the FILEDIA (page 1296) system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed at the Command prompt. See also: Export Raster Files POINT Creates a point object.
PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures, except for PDMODE values 0 and 1. A setting of 0 generates the point at 5 percent of the drawing area height. A positive PDSIZE value specifies an absolute size for the point figures. A negative value is interpreted as a percentage of the viewport size. After you change PDMODE and PDSIZE, the appearance of existing points changes the next time the drawing is regenerated. You can use MEASURE and DIVIDE to create points along an object.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Lights tool group ➤ Point Light Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Light ➤ New Point Light Summary Use point lights for general lighting effects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Intensity/Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Enter intensity (0.00-max float) <1.0000>: Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect Enter status [oN/oFf] : Photometry Photometry is available when the LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 1 or 2. Photometry is the measurement of the luminous intensities of visible light sources.
Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names. Enter color name(s) to list <*>: Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Enter Kelvin temperature <3600.0000>: Exit Exits the command option. Shadow Makes the light cast shadows.
Attenuation Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a point light, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay. Enter attenuation type [None/Inverse linear/inverse Squared] : â– None. Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the point light are as bright as objects close to the light. â– Inverse Linear. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the light.
Exit Exits the command. See also: Use Point Lights POLYGON Creates an equilateral closed polyline. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Polygon Menu: Draw ➤ Polygon List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter number of sides : Enter a value between 3 and 1024 or press Enter Specify center of polygon (page ?) or [Edge (page ?)]: Specify a point (1) or enter e Center of Polygon Defines the center of the polygon.
Inscribed in Circle Specifies the radius of a circle on which all vertices of the polygon lie. Specify radius of circle: Specify a point (2) or enter a value Specifying the radius with your pointing device determines the rotation and size of the polygon. Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom edge of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle. Circumscribed about Circle Specifies the distance from the center of the polygon to the midpoints of the edges of the polygon.
You can specify the different parameters of the polygon including the number of sides. The difference between the inscribed and circumscribed options is shown. See also: Draw Rectangles and Polygons POLYSOLID Creates a 3D wall-like polysolid. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Solid Primitives flyout ➤ Polysolid Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Polysolid Summary You can create walls with straight and curved segments of constant height and width.
With the POLYSOLID command, you can convert an existing line, 2D polyline, arc, or circle to a solid with a rectangular profile. A polysolid can have curved segments, but the profile is always rectangular by default. You can draw a solid with POLYSOLID just as you would a polyline. The PSOLWIDTH (page 1409) system variable sets the default width for the solid. The PSOLHEIGHT (page 1409) system variable sets the default height for the solid. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Specify the next point (page ?) or [Arc (page ?)/Undo (page ?)]: Specify the next point for the profile of the solid, or enter an option Object Specifies an object to convert to a solid. You can convert: â– Line â– Arc â– 2D polyline â– Circle Select object: Select an object to convert to a solid Height Specifies the height of the solid. The default height is set to the current PSOLHEIGHT (page 1409) setting.
Specify endpoint of arc or [Close/Direction/Line/Second point/Undo]: Specify an endpoint or enter an option â– Close. Closes the solid by creating a line or arc segment from the last point specified to the starting point of the solid. At least two points must be specified to use this option. â– Direction. Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment. Specify the tangent direction from the start point of arc: Specify a point Specify endpoint of arc: Specify a point â– Line.
Specify end point of arc: Specify a point Undo Removes the most recent arc segment added to the solid. Undo Removes the most recent segment added to the solid. See also: Create a Polysolid PRESSPULL Presses or pulls bounded areas. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Presspull Summary Press or pull a bounded area by clicking inside the area, and then moving the cursor or entering a value to specify the extrusion distance.
Click inside bounded areas to press or pull Click inside a bounded area, and then drag and click to specify the extrusion distance. You can also enter a value for the distance. See also: Press or Pull Bounded Areas PREVIEW Displays the drawing as it will be printed. Summary The preview is based on the current print configuration, as defined by the settings in the Page Setup dialog box (page 753).
Next Displays the next page in a multi-page preview. Zoom Reduces or enlarges the preview image. Click (-) to reduce the preview image and (+) to enlarge the preview image. Move Moves the preview image planar to the screen. Text Allows you to select text objects. (Not available in AutoCAD for Mac) Select Creates a selection window in the preview image that allows you to copy part of the preview to the Clipboard. Sidebar Displays a secondary pane that contains thumbnails for multi-page previews.
Projects the geometry along the positive or negative Z axis of the current UCS. Project to View Projects the geometry based on the current view. Project to Two Points Projects the geometry along a path between two points.
PROPERTIES Controls properties of existing objects. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Properties Shortcut menu: Select the objects whose properties you want to view or modify, right-click in the drawing area, and click Properties. Summary The Properties Inspector palette (page 832) is displayed and lists the properties of the selected objects. When more than one object is selected, only those properties common to all selected objects are displayed.
Properties Inspector Palette Displays the properties of the selected object or set of objects. Current Properties Layer Properties Summary When more than one object is selected, only those properties common to all selected objects are displayed. When no objects are selected, only the current settings of general properties are displayed. You can specify a new value to modify any property that can be changed. Click the value and use one of the following methods: â– Enter a new value.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Current Displays the properties for the current drawing or selected objects. Layer Displays the properties for the layer selected in the Layer list of the Layers palette. Object Type Displays the type of objects that are selected and filters which objects you are modifying. Essentials Displays the most commonly edited or viewed properties for the current drawing or selected objects.
NOTE Layers or objects that are assigned property overrides in viewports display a ByLayer (VP) value and a background color for applicable properties. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Specifies the color for objects. Selecting Select Color in the color list allows you to define the color of objects by selecting from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and color book colors (see COLOR (page 198)). Layer Specifies the current layer of the object.
See also: Display and Change the Properties of Objects Cell Border Properties Dialog Box Sets the properties of the borders of table cells.
Access Methods Pointing device: With a table cell selected and the Properties Inspector palette open, click All. Under the Cell section, click the button to the right of the Border Style field. List of Options The following options are displayed. Properties Controls the properties of the borders of the selected table cells. Lineweight Sets the lineweight to be used for borders that are displayed. If you use a heavy lineweight, you may have to change the cell margins.
Applies the border properties settings to the inside borders of the selected table cells. No Borders Applies the border properties settings to none of the borders of the selected table cells. Top Border Applies the border properties setting to the top borders of the selected table cells. Inside Horizontal Border Applies the border properties setting to the inside horizontal borders of the selected table cells.
General Properties The following property settings are available: Name Specifies the name of the light. Type (Light Distribution) Specifies the type of light. Determines the distribution of light from the . The type of lighting can be changed after the light has been added to the drawings. â– Spotlight - Default value for Spotlight and Freespot lights. â– Point - Default for Pointlight and Targetpoint lights. â– Web - Default for Weblight and Freeweb lights.
â– Flux (Lumen). Represents the rate of total energy leaving the lamp. It is specified in lumens (SI and American). Mathematically, the flux is the integral of the luminous intensity over the sphere. The calculation of flux depends on the distribution of intensities. For a point light with constant intensity, the flux is simply the product of the intensity and the solid angle of a sphere: 4 Pi * Intensity.
Position Z Specifies the Z coordinate position of the light. Target X Specifies the X coordinate target position of the light. (Spotlight, Targetpoint, and Weblight only) Target Y Specifies the Y coordinate target position of the light. (Spotlight, Targetpoint, and Weblight only) Target Z Specifies the Z coordinate target position of the light. (Spotlight, Targetpoint, and Weblight only) Targeted Specifies if the light displays a target grip for orienting the light.
Type Specifies the type of shadow cast by the light. â– Soft (shadow map). Sets the type to Soft. This selection activates additional options for Map size and Softness. â– Sharp (default). Sets the rendered shadow to sharp. â– Soft (sampled). Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the distance from the light. For example, at a distance of 2 units, light is one quarter as strong as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one sixteenth as strong.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Sun - Sun Angle Source Vector Displays the coordinates of the direction of the sun. This setting is read-only. Date and Time Displays the current date and time setting. Longitude Displays the longitude of the current location. You can enter a value or select a location on the map. (LONGITUDE (page 1363) system variable) The valid range is -180 to +180 as a floating point number. Latitude Sets the latitude of the current location.
Intensity Factor Provides a way to magnify the effect of the skylight. Values are 0.0-MAX. [1.0] is default. Haze Determines the magnitude of scattering effects in the atmosphere. Values are 0.0-15.0. [0.0] is default. Sky - Sky Horizon Height Determines the absolute position of the ground plane relative to world zero. This parameter represents a world-space length and should be formatted in the current length unit. Values are -10.0 to +10.0 [0.0] is default.
Summary The Properties Inspector palette closes. See also: Display and Change the Properties of Objects PSETUPIN Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout. Summary The Select Page Setup From File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed in which you can select the drawing (.dwg), template (.dwt), or drawing interchange format (.dxf) file whose page setups you want to import.
PSPACE In a layout, switches from model space in a viewport to paper space. Summary The program switches from model space to paper space when you are working on a named (paper space) layout. On the named layout, use paper space to create a finished layout of a drawing for printing. As part of designing your layout, you create layout viewports, which are windows containing different views of the model.
Summary The Batch Publish dialog box (page 846) is displayed. You can assemble a collection of drawings, and create a PDF file or hardcopy of the selected drawings. PDF files can be viewed with a PDF viewer. See also: Overview of Publishing Batch Publish Dialog Box Specifies drawing sheets that you can assemble, reorder, and publish as a multi-sheet drawing set. Summary You can publish the drawing set to a PDF file or send it to the printer named in the page setup for hardcopy output.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Publish To: Defines how to layouts should be published. You can publish to either a PDF file (an electronic drawing set) or to the printer specified in the page setup (a paper drawing set). PDF Indicates that the layouts should be published to a PDF file. Printer from Page Setup Indicates that the output device given for each layout's page setup will be used. Preview Displays a preview of the selected layout in the Sheet list.
Add Open Drawings Adds the Model layout and all named layouts from the drawings that are currently open. Sheet List Shortcut Menu The following options are available when you right-click a sheet: Move to Top Moves the selected sheets to the top of the list. Move Up Moves the selected sheets up one position in the list. Move Down Moves the selected sheets down one position in the list. Move to Bottom Moves the selected sheets to the bottom of the list.
Output Options Specifies how the layouts should be output for PDF files and if a plot stamp is included on each layout. Create a Single PDF A multi-sheet PDF file is created that contains all the layouts in the Sheet list. Create individual PDFs per Layout A single PDF file is created for each layout in the Sheet list. Include Plot Stamp Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file.
NOTE The PURGE command will not remove unnamed objects (zero-length geometry or empty text and mtext objects) from blocks or locked layers. See also: Erase Objects -PURGE Removes unused named objects, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing at the Command prompt. Summary Allows you to remove unused named objects from a drawing at the Command prompt. You can only remove one level of reference at a time. Repeat the command until there are no unreferenced, named objects.
PYRAMID Creates a 3D solid pyramid. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Solid Primitives flyout ➤ Pyramid Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Pyramid Summary By default, a pyramid is defined by the center of the base point, a point on the middle of the edge, and another point that determines the height. Initially, the default base radius is not set to any value.
Sides Specifies the number of sides for the pyramid. You can enter a number from 3 to 32. Specify number of sides : Specify a diameter or press Enter to specify the default value Initially, the number of sides for the pyramid is set to 4. During a drawing session, the default value for the number of sides is always the previously entered value for the number of sides. Inscribed Specifies that the base of the pyramid is inscribed within (drawn within) the base radius of the pyramid.
See also: Create a Solid Pyramid Q Commands QDIM Creates a series of dimensions quickly from selected objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group ➤ Quick Dimension Menu: Dimension ➤ Quick Dimension Summary This command is particularly useful for creating a series of baseline or continued dimensions, or for dimensioning a series of circles and arcs. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Ordinate Creates a series of ordinate dimensions. Radius Creates a series of radial dimensions. Diameter Creates a series of diameter dimensions. Datum Point Sets a new datum point for baseline and ordinate dimensions. Edit Edits a series of dimensions. You are prompted to add or remove points from existing dimensions. Settings Sets the default object snap for specifying extension line origins. See also: Overview of Dimensioning QLEADER Creates a leader and leader annotation.
Specify first leader point, or [Settings] : Specify the first leader point, or press Enter to specify leader settings First Leader Point The Number of Points setting on the Leader Line & Arrow tab of the Leader Settings dialog box (page 855) determines the number of leader points you are prompted to specify. Width If you set the text width value to 0.00, the width of the multiline text is unlimited.
Annotation Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box) Annotation Type Sets the leader annotation type. The type you select changes the QLEADER leader annotation prompt. MText Prompts you to create multiline text (mtext) annotation. Copy an Object Prompts you to copy a multiline text, single-line text, tolerance, or block reference object and connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if the copied object moves, the end of the leader line moves with it.
MText Options The options are available only when the multiline text annotation type is selected. Prompt for Width Prompts you to specify the width of the multiline text annotation. Always Left Justify Left-justifies the multiline text annotation, regardless of leader location. Frame Text Places a frame around multiline text annotation. Annotation Reuse Sets options for reusing leader annotation. None Does not reuse leader annotation.
Leader Line Sets the leader line format. Straight Creates straight-line segments between the points you specify. Spline Creates a spline object using the leader points you specify as control points. Arrowhead Defines the leader arrowhead. The arrowheads are also available for dimension lines (DIMSTYLE (page 314) command). If you select User Arrow, a list of blocks in the drawing is displayed.
Top of Top Line Attaches the leader line at the top of the top multiline text line. Middle of Top Line Attaches the leader line at the middle of the top multiline text line. Middle of Multiline Text Attaches the leader line at the middle of the multiline text. Middle of Bottom Line Attaches the leader line at the middle of the bottom multiline text line. Bottom of Bottom Line Attaches the leader line at the bottom of the bottom multiline text line.
QNEW Starts a new drawing from a selected drawing template file. Summary QNEW creates a new drawing from the default drawing template file and folder path specified in Default Template File Name for QNEW in the Application section of the Application Preferences dialog box. When a default drawing template file is set to None or is not specified, QNEW displays the Select Template File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)).
NOTE The file format specified in the Application tab of the Application Preferences dialog box is used when saving a drawing with this command. See also: Save a Drawing QTEXT Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects. Summary When QTEXT (Quick Text) is on, each text and attribute object is displayed as a bounding box around the text object. Turning QTEXT mode on reduces the time it takes the program to redraw and regenerate drawings that contain many text objects.
Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Show Drawings & Layouts Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Model/Layout drop-down ➤ Show Drawings & Layouts Command entry: Cmd-. Summary Displays the QuickView dialog box. Drawing previews are displayed vertically along the left, while the layout previews of the selected drawing are displayed on the right. The preview for Model is always located in the top-left of the layout previews.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Drawing List Displays a list of all open drawings. Double-clicking a thumbnail to set that drawing current. You can also right-click a thumbnail to display a shortcut menu of additional file management options. The following items are on the Drawing shortcut menu: â– Save. - Saves the drawing using its current name and location. â– Close . - Closes the drawing.
Batch Publish dialog box (page 846) is displayed when more than one layout is selected. â– Edit Page Setup. - Allows you to modify the current page setup settings for the layout. The Page Setup dialog box (page 753) is displayed. â– Page Setup Manager. - Allows you to manage the output settings for the layout. The Page Setup Manager (page 749) is displayed. See also: Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing QUIT Exits the program.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Ray Menu: Draw ➤ Ray Summary The ray is extended to the edge of the display in the direction defined by the starting point and the through point. The prompt for a through point is redisplayed so you can create multiple rays. Press Enter to end the command. Lines that extend to infinity in one direction, known as rays, can be used as references for creating other objects.
RECOVER Repairs and then opens a damaged drawing file. Summary The program extracts as much material as it can from the damaged file. Files that can be recovered include DWG and DWT files. Performing a recover on a DXF file will only open the file. In the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)), enter the drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file. Results are displayed in the text window.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current settings: Rotation = 0 Specify first corner point (page ?) or [Chamfer (page ?)/Elevation (page ?)/Fillet (page ?)/Thickness (page ?)/Width (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter an option First Corner Point Specifies a corner point of the rectangle. Other Corner Point Creates a rectangle using the specified points as diagonally opposite corners. Area Creates a rectangle using the area and either a length or a width.
Thickness Specifies the thickness of the rectangle. Width Specifies the polyline width of the rectangle to be drawn. See also: Draw Rectangles and Polygons REDEFINE Restores AutoCAD internal commands overridden by UNDEFINE. Summary If a command has been undefined, you can still use it if you precede the command name with a period. Enter the name of an AutoCAD command turned off by the UNDEFINE (page 1088) command.
See also: Correct Mistakes REDRAW Refreshes the display in the current viewport. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Redraw Command entry: 'redraw for transparent use Summary Removes temporary graphics left by some operations in the current viewport. To remove stray pixels, use the REGEN (page 877) command. See also: Erase Objects REDRAWALL Refreshes the display in all viewports.
REFCLOSE Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference, either an xref or a block definition. Access Methods Toolbar: Reference Editor visor ➤ Save Toolbar: Reference Editor visor ➤ Discard Changes Summary If you save or discard changes with REFCLOSE, you can still use the UNDO (page 1089) command to return to the reference editing session.
REFEDIT Edits an xref or a block definition directly within the current drawing. Access Methods Button Menu: Tools ➤ Edit Xref In-place Toolbar: External Reference visor ➤ Edit Reference in Place Summary The objects that you select from the selected xref or block are temporarily extracted and made available for editing in the current drawing. The set of extracted objects is called the working set, which can be modified and then saved back to update the xref or block definition.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Add to Working Set Adds objects to the current working set while editing an xref or a block definition in-place. (REFSET (page 876)) Remove From Working Set Removes objects from the current working set while editing an xref or a block definition in-place. (REFSET (page 876)) Discard Changes Discards the changes made to an xref or a block definition. (REFCLOSE (page 870)) Save Saves back the changes made to an xref or a block definition.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Select a Reference to Edit Displays the reference selected for in-place editing and any references nested within the selected reference. Nested references are displayed only if the selected object is part of a nested reference. If multiple references are displayed, choose a specific xref or block to modify. Only one reference can be edited in place at a time. Preview Displays a preview image of the currently selected reference.
Path Displays the file location of the selected reference. If the selected reference is a block, no path is displayed. Nested Objects Specifies how the selection of nested objects should be handled. Automatically Select All Nested Objects Controls whether nested objects are included automatically in the reference editing session. If this option is checked, all the objects in the selected reference will be automatically included in the reference editing session.
Lock Objects Not in Working Set Locks all objects not in the working set. This prevents you from accidentally selecting and editing objects in the host drawing while in a reference editing state. The behavior of locked objects is similar to objects on a locked layer. If you try to edit locked objects, they are filtered from the selection set. See also: Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks -REFEDIT Edits an xref or a block definition directly within the current drawing.
A working set is formed with the objects you have selected for editing. The working set includes objects that can be saved back to update the xref or block definition. When you save back changes, changes made to the objects in the reference file are saved without actually opening the reference drawing or recreating the block. The working set is visually distinct from the rest of the current drawing: all objects in the current drawing, except objects in the working set, appear faded.
Transfer objects between the Refedit working set and host drawing... Enter an option [Add/Remove] : Enter an option or press Enter Add Adds objects to the working set. An object that is part of the working set is added to the reference when changes are saved back, and the object is removed from the current drawing. Remove Removes objects from the working set.
Access Methods Menu: View ➤ Regen All Summary REGENALL regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects in all viewports. It also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object selection performance. See also: Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text REGENAUTO Controls automatic regeneration of a drawing.
If you click OK, the drawing is regenerated. If you click Cancel, the last action is cancelled and the drawing is not regenerated. See also: Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text REGION Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Closed Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Region Menu: Draw ➤ Region Summary Regions are two-dimensional areas you create from closed shapes or loops.
closed planar loops (outer boundaries and holes of a region). If more than two curves share an endpoint, the resulting region might be arbitrary. The boundary of the region consists of end-connected curves where each point shares only two edges. All intersections and self-intersecting curves are rejected. If a selected polyline has been smoothed by either the Spline or Fit option of PEDIT (page 767), the resulting region contains the line or arc geometry of the smoothed polyline.
Rename Dialog Box Changes the names assigned to named objects such as layers and dimension styles. List of Options The following options are displayed. Named Objects Lists named objects in a drawing by category. Items Displays items of the type specified in Named Objects. See also: Resolve Name Conflicts in External References -RENAME Changes the names assigned to named objects from the Command prompt. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Enter object type to rename [Block/Dimstyle/LAyer/LType/Material/multileadeRstyle/Plotstyle/textStyle/Tablestyle/Ucs/VIew/VPort]: Enter a named object type to rename an object Enter old object name: Enter the old name Enter new object name: Enter the new name See also: Resolve Name Conflicts in External References RENDER Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a 3D solid or surface model.
By default, all objects in the current view in the drawing are rendered. If a named view is not specified, the current view is rendered. If you enter -render at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 890).
Summary From the Render Window, you can â– Save the image to a file. â– Monitor the progress of the current rendering. List of Options The following options are displayed. Image Pane Primary output target of the renderer. Progress Meter Displays the overall progress of the current rendering. Clicking the X icon next to the progress meter, or by pressing Esc to cancel the current rendering. Save Displays the Render Output File dialog box (page 885) where you can save the image to disk.
See also: Save a Rendered Image Render Output File Dialog Box Saves a rendering to a raster image file. Summary The Render Output File dialog box is a standard file selection dialog boxes. You specify the file name of the image you want to save and the output file format. In this dialog box, you can only choose from raster image output file formats. The file formats for saving your rendered images to include the following: List of Options The following options are displayed. BMP (*.
that is called lossy compression because of the loss of image quality as you increase the compression. However, the JPEG compression scheme is extremely good and you can sometimes compress the file up to 200:1 without severe loss of image quality. JPEG is consequently a popular format for posting image files on the Internet for minimum file size and minimum download time. Clicking Save after choosing this format displays the JPEG Image Options dialog box (page 889). PNG (*.
See also: Save a Rendered Image PCX Image Options Dialog Box Options used when saving a rendering to a PCX image file. Summary When PCX is chosen as the output format, the PCX Image Options dialog box is displayed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Monochrome Creates a 2-bit black and white image. 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors.
Color 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors. 24 Bits (16.7 Million Colors) Creates a 24 bit color image that uses a 16.7 million color palette. 32 Bits (24 Bits + Alpha) Creates a 24 bit color image that includes an 8 bit alpha channel. Alpha is a type of data, found in 32-bit image files, that assigns transparency to the pixels in the image.
32 Bits (24 Bits + Alpha) Creates a 24 bit color image that includes an 8 bit alpha channel. Alpha is a type of data, found in 32-bit image files, that assigns transparency to the pixels in the image. Compressed Applies lossless compression to the file. Dots Per Inch Sets the dots per inch (dpi) for the saved image. This setting does not change the resolution of the final image, but can affect the way it prints in documents.
Summary When PNG is chosen as the output format, the PNG Image Options dialog box is displayed. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Monochrome Creates a 2-bit black and white image. 8 Bits (256 Grayscale) Creates an 8-bit grayscale image using 256 shades of gray. 8 Bits (256 Colors) Renders a smaller, 8-bit color image from a palette of 256 colors. 16 Bits (65,536 Grayscale) Creates a grayscale 16-bit image that uses 65,536 shades of gray. 24 Bits (16.
Specify render preset [Draft (page ?)/Low (page ?)/Medium (page ?)/High (page ?)/Presentation (page ?)/Other (page ?)] : Enter an option or press Enter Specify render destination [Render Window (page ?)/Viewport (page ?)] : Enter an option or press Enter Draft Draft is the lowest level standard render preset. This setting is intended for very fast, test renderings where anti-aliasing is bypassed and sample filtering is very low.
High The High we preset matches the Medium preset settings with regards to anti-aliasing, but sample filtering and raytracing is improved. Due to the improved sample filtering and raytracing, rendered images take longer to process, but the image quality is much better. Presentation The Presentation render preset is used for high quality, photo-realistic rendered images and takes the longest to process. Sample filtering and raytracing is further improved.
See also: Render Views, Selected Objects, or Cropped Content RENDERENVIRONMENT Controls visual cues for the apparent distance of objects. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Render tool group ➤ Render Environment Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Render Environment Summary The Render Environment dialog box (page 893) is displayed. See also: Control the Rendering Environment Render Environment Dialog Box Defines the cues for distance between objects and the current viewing direction.
Summary Fog and depth cueing are atmospheric effects that cause objects to appear to fade as they increase in distance from the camera. Fog uses a white color while depth cueing uses black. List of Options The following options are displayed. Fog and Depth Cue Enable Fog Turns fog on and off without affecting the other settings in the dialog box. Color Specifies the color of the fog. Near Distance Specifies the distance from the camera where the fog begins.
Output Size Dialog Box Sets the output image size when rendering a 3D model. List of Options The following options are displayed. Output Image Size (Pixels) List of commonly used output sizes. Choose Custom to specify the output width and height for the image. Width (Pixels) Sets the width resolution of the output image, in pixels. The valid range for the width is 8 to 4096. Height (Pixels) Sets the height resolution of the output image, in pixels. The valid range for the height is 8 to 4096.
NOTE In viewports, the camera's frustum changes to reflect the image aspect ratio you set in the Output Size dialog box. This change takes place when you exit the dialog box. See also: Save a Rendered Image -RENDEROUTPUTSIZE Specifies the image size to create when rendering a 3D model. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed: Enter render output width: Enter a width and press Enter Enter render output height: Enter a height and press Enter The valid range for the width and height is 8 to 4096.
Summary The Render window (page 883) is displayed, but a rendering of the current drawing is not initiated. If the drawing was previously rendered, you can view and save the rendered image. See also: Basics of Rendering RESETBLOCK Resets one or more dynamic block references to the default values of the block definition. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a dynamic block reference in a drawing. Right-click in the drawing area and click Reset Block.
Reset Palettes Closes and restarts AutoCAD for Mac. After AutoCAD for Mac restarts, the placement of all palettes is reset to their default settings. See also: Specify the Behavior of Palettes RESUME Continues an interrupted script. Access Methods Command entry: 'resume for transparent use Summary You can interrupt a macro script that is running by pressing Esc or Backspace. Any error encountered while processing input from a script file causes the script to be suspended.
Summary NOTE REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length in the system registry. This value is multiplied by DIMSCALE (page 1239) to provide consistency when the program is used with drawings that have different scale factors. You can create a new revision cloud by dragging your cursor, or you can convert a closed object such as an ellipse or polyline into a revision cloud. Use revision clouds to highlight parts of a drawing that are being reviewed. The resulting object is a polyline.
Style Specifies the style of the revision cloud. See also: Create Revision Clouds REVERSE Reverses the vertices of selected lines, polylines, splines, and helixes, which is useful for linetypes with included text, or wide polylines with differing beginning and ending widths. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Modify tool group (expanded) ➤ Reverse Summary Vertices of selected objects are reversed.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Solid Creation flyout ➤ Revolve Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Revolve Summary Open profiles create surfaces and closed profiles can create either a solid or a surface. The MOde option controls is a solid of surface is created. When creating a surface, SURFACEMODELINGMODE (page 1453) system variable controls if a procedural or NURBS surface is created. When the Solid tab is active, the REVOLVE (page 900) command creates a solid.
Revolve path and profile curves can be: â– Open or closed â– Planar or non-planar â– Solid and surface edges â– A single object (to extrude multiple lines, convert them to a single object with the JOIN (page 534) command) â– A single region (to extrude multiple regions, convert them to a single object with the REGION (page 879) command) To automatically delete the profile, use the DELOBJ (page 1213) system variable.
You cannot revolve objects contained within a block or objects that will self-intersect. REVOLVE ignores the width of a polyline and revolves from the center of the path of the polyline. The right-hand rule determines the positive direction of rotation. For more information, see Understand the UCS in 3D. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Objects to Revolve Specifies the objects to be revolved about an axis. Mode Controls whether the revolve action creates a solid or a surface.
You can use lines, linear polyline segments, and linear edges of solids or surfaces as an axis. NOTE Select an edge subobject by pressing Ctrl while you select an edge. X (Axis) Sets the positive X axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction. Y (Axis) Sets the positive Y axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction. Z (Axis) Sets the positive Z axis of the current UCS as the positive axis direction.
Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the revolve angle. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations. See also: Create a Solid or Surface by Revolving REVSURF Creates a mesh by revolving a profile about an axis. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Revolved Meshes Summary Select a line, arc, circle, or 2D or 3D polyline to sweep in a circular path around a selected axis. The MESHTYPE (page 1369) system variable sets which type of mesh is created.
The density of the generated mesh is controlled by the SURFTAB1 (page 1454) and SURFTAB2 (page 1454) system variables. SURFTAB1 specifies the number of tabulation lines that are drawn in the direction of revolution. If the path curve is a line, arc, circle, or spline-fit polyline, SURFTAB2 specifies the number of tabulation lines that are drawn to divide it into equal-sized intervals.
The vector from the first to the last vertex of the polyline determines the rotation axis. Any intermediate vertices are ignored. The axis of revolution determines the M direction of the mesh. Start Angle If set to a nonzero value, starts the mesh of revolution at an offset from the generating path curve. Specifying a start angle starts the mesh of revolution at an offset from the generating path curve. Included Angle Specifies how far about the axis of revolution the mesh extends.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Move/Rotate/Scale tool group ➤ Rotate Menu: Modify ➤ Rotate Shortcut menu: Select the objects to rotate. Right-click in the drawing area and click Rotate. Summary You can rotate selected objects around a base point to an absolute angle. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
When you rotate a viewport object, the borders of the viewport remain parallel to the edges of the drawing area. See also: Rotate Objects ROTATE3D Moves objects about a 3D axis. Summary It is recommended that you use the gizmos available through the 3DMOVE (page 36) and 3DROTATE (page 48) commands to manipulate 3D objects. For more information about using gizmos, see Use Gizmos to Modify Objects. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The difference between the starting angle and the ending angle is the computed rotation angle. Circle Aligns the axis of rotation with the 3D axis of the circle (perpendicular to the plane of the circle and passing through the center of the circle). â– Rotation Angle (page 909) â– Reference (page 909) Arc Aligns the axis of rotation with the 3D axis of the arc (perpendicular to the plane of the arc and passing through the center of the arc).
â– Reference (page 909) X Axis, Y Axis, Z Axis Aligns the axis of rotation with one of the axes (X, Y, or Z) that pass through the selected point. â– Rotation Angle (page 909) â– Reference (page 909) 2 Points Uses two points to define the axis of rotation. â– Rotation Angle (page 909) â– Reference (page 909) See also: Rotate Objects RSCRIPT Repeats a script file.
NOTE Consider turning off UNDO (page 1089) and any log files if you anticipate running the script over a long period; otherwise, these log files continue to grow and take up increasing amounts of disk space. See also: Create Command Scripts RULESURF Creates a mesh that represents the surface between two lines or curves. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Ruled Mesh Summary Select two edges that define the mesh. The edges can be lines, arcs, splines, circles, or polylines.
and a closed polyline can be confusing. Substituting a closed semicircular polyline for the circle might be preferable. The ruled mesh is constructed as a 2 by N polygon mesh. RULESURF places half the mesh vertices at equal intervals along one defining curve, and the other half at equal intervals along the other curve. The number of intervals is specified by the SURFTAB1 (page 1454) system variable.
First defining curve Specifies an object and start point for the new mesh object. Second defining curve Specifies an object and start point for the sweep of the new mesh object. See also: Create Meshes from Other Objects S Commands SAVE Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name. Obsolete. The SAVE command is functionally identical to the QSAVE (page 860) command. The Save option on the File menu is QSAVE.
Summary The Save Drawing As standard file selection dialog box (page 720) is displayed. ™ Enter a file name and type. Saving a drawing to any DXF format affects performance. See Save Drawings to Previous Drawing File Formats for a description of the limitations that result from saving to an earlier version. The file is saved with the specified file name. If the drawing is already named, the drawing is saved with the new file name.
SAVEAS Command Prompts Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current file format: current Enter file format [2000(LT2000)/2004(LT2004)2007(LT2007)/2010(LT2010)/DXF/Template] <2010>: Enter an option or press Enter Save drawing as : Enter a name or press Enter See also: Save a Drawing SAVEIMG Saves a rendered image to a file. Summary The Render Output File dialog box (page 885) is displayed.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Move/Rotate/Scale tool group ➤ Scale Menu: Modify ➤ Scale Shortcut menu: Select the objects to scale. Right-click in the drawing area and click Scale. Summary To scale an object, specify a base point and a scale factor. The base point acts as the center of the scaling operation and remains stationary. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the object. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Specify scale factor (page 918) or [Copy (page 918)/Reference (page 918)]: Specify a scale, enter c, or enter r Scale Factor Multiplies the dimensions of the selected objects by the specified scale. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the objects. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the objects. You can also drag the cursor to make the object larger or smaller. Copy Creates a copy of the selected objects for scaling.
See also: Scale Views in Layout Viewports Edit Drawing Scales Dialog Box Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. List of Options The following options are displayed. Scale List Displays the list of currently defined scales. Also displays temporary scales that are imported when xrefs are attached. If a scale name is duplicated, but has a different value, a number is appended to the name. Add Creates a new scale in the scale list.
NOTE You cannot edit temporary scales. Reset Deletes all custom scales and unused scales and restores the default list of scales. See also: Scale Views in Layout Viewports -SCALELISTEDIT Controls the list of scales available for layout viewports, page layouts, and plotting. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter option [?/Add/Delete/Reset/Exit] : Enter an option or press Enter ? Displays a list of defined scales. Add Adds a new scale to the scale list.
Summary A script is a text file with an .scr file extension. Each line of the script file contains a command that can be completed at the Command prompt, including alternative versions of commands that normally display dialog boxes. The Select Script File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed. Enter the file name of a script to run that script. When FILEDIA (page 1296) is set to 0 (zero), SCRIPT displays the following command prompt.
Specify the first point on the sectioning plane using one of the following methods: â– Object (page 922) â– Z Axis (page 922) â– View (page 922) â– XY (page 923) â– YZ (page 923) â– ZX (page 923) â– 3points (page 923) Object Aligns the sectioning plane with a circle, ellipse, circular or elliptical arc, 2D spline, or 2D polyline segment. Z Axis Defines the sectioning plane by specifying a point on the sectioning plane and another point on the Z axis, or normal, of the plane.
XY Aligns the sectioning plane with the XY plane of the current UCS. YZ Aligns the sectioning plane with the YZ plane of the current UCS. ZX Aligns the sectioning plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS. 3points Uses three points to define the sectioning plane: See also: Create Section Objects SECTIONPLANE Creates a section object that acts as a cutting plane through 3D objects.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Section tool group ➤ Section Plane Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Section Plane Summary Section plane objects create sections of 3D solids, surfaces, and meshes. Use live sectioning with section plane objects to analyze a model, and save sections as blocks for use in layouts. List of Options The following options are displayed. Face or Any Point to Locate Section Line Specifies a face to establish the plane of the section object.
Orthographic Aligns the section object to an orthographic orientation relative to the UCS. A section object that contains all 3D objects is created with the specified orientation relative to the UCS (not the current view). This option creates a section object in the Section Plane state with live sectioning turned on. â– Align section to.
■Left ■Right See also: Create Section Objects SECTIONPLANEJOG Adds a jogged segment to a section object. Access Methods Ribbon: Mesh Modeling tab ➤ Section panel ➤ Section Plane Jog Shortcut menu: Select a section plane. Right-click in the drawing area and click Add Jog to Section. Summary You can insert a jog, or angle, into a section object as you create it. The jog is created on the section line. The jogged segment is created at a 90-degree angle to the section line.
Point on the section line to add jog Specifies the location of the jog. See also: Add Jogs to a Section SECTIONPLANESETTINGS Sets display options for the selected section plane. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Section tool group (expanded) ➤ Section Plane Settings Shortcut menu: Select a live section object. Right-click in the drawing area and click Live Section Settings. Summary The Section Settings dialog box (page 927) is displayed.
Summary Contains display settings for creating 2D and 3D sections from the Generate Section / Elevation dialog box (page 934) and for live sectioning. All settings are stored with the section object.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Section Plane If a section plane has not been selected, specifies a selection plane to be modified. Select Section Plane Temporarily closes the Section Settings dialog box so that you can select a section object in the drawing area. Setting Type Specifies which setting types are displayed in the properties list. 2D Section / Elevation Block Creation Settings Determines how a 2D section from a 3D object is displayed when generated.
â– Lineweight. Sets whether the lineweight is ByLayer, ByBlock, matches the default, or has a unique value. â– Division Lines. Sets whether division lines are displayed. (2D section blocks only) â– Show. Sets whether the intersection boundary is displayed. (3D section blocks only) Intersection Fill Sets the optional fill that is displayed inside the boundary area of the cut surface where the section object intersects the 3D object. â– Show. Sets whether the intersection fill is displayed. â– Face Hatch.
â– Layer. Sets the layer of the component. Select an existing layer, or select *LayerByObject* to split the block component onto a separate layer. If you want to add a customized prefix or suffix to the *LayerByObject* name, click New Layer Name Settings to open the New Layer Name dialog box (page 932). â– Linetype. Sets the linetype to be ByLayer, ByBlock, or Continuous. â– Linetype Scale. Sets the scale of the linetype. â– Plot Style. Displays the current plot style. â– Lineweight.
â– Layer. Sets the layer of the curve tangency lines. Select an existing layer, or select *LayerByObject* to split the block component onto a separate layer. If you want to add a customized prefix or suffix to the *LayerByObject* name, click New Layer Name Settings to open the New Layer Name dialog box (page 932). â– Linetype. Sets the linetype to be ByLayer, ByBlock, or Continuous. â– Linetype Scale. Sets the scale of the linetype. â– Plot Style. Displays the current plot style.
Access Methods Pointing device: In the Section Settings dialog box (page 927), Layer list, click New Layer Name Settings. Summary By default, all section block geometry is placed on Layer 0 (zero). However, you can specify suffix or prefix labels to help organize section block components, such as intersection boundaries and fill.
See also: Set Section Object States and Properties SECTIONPLANETOBLOCK Saves selected section planes as 2D or 3D blocks. Access Methods Shortcut menu: Select a live section object. Right-click in the drawing area and click Generate 2D/3D Section. Summary The Generate Section /Elevation dialog box (page 934) is displayed. See also: Save Sections as Blocks, Drawings, or Tools Generate Section /Elevation Dialog Box Saves 2D and 3D sections as blocks.
Summary Specifies the display settings for the cross sections that you save and reuse. List of Options The following options are displayed. Section Plane Select Section Plane Closes the dialog box so that you can select a section plane to modify or save as a block.
Creates and saves or inserts a block that represents a 2D cross section. 3D Section Creates and saves or inserts a cutaway 3D block. Hide/Show Advanced Settings Controls the display of the Source Geometry, Destination, and Section Settings options. Source Geometry Include All Objects Includes all 3D objects (3D solids, surfaces, and regions) in the drawing, including objects in xrefs and blocks.
Create Creates the section. See also: Create Section Objects SELECT Places selected objects in the Previous selection set. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Selection tool group ➤ Select Summary A small box, called the object selection target or pickbox, replaces the crosshairs on the graphics cursor. At the Select Objects prompt in a subsequent command, use the Previous option to retrieve the previous selection set.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
All Selects all objects in either model space or the current layout, except those objects on frozen or on locked layers. Fence Selects all objects crossing a selection fence. The Fence method is similar to CPolygon except that that the fence is not closed, and a fence can cross itself. Fence is not affected by the PICKADD (page 1392) system variable. WPolygon Selects objects completely inside a polygon defined by points. The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself.
Group Selects all objects within a specified group. Add Switches to the Add method: selected objects can be added to the selection set by using any of the object selection methods. Auto and Add are the default methods. Remove Switches to the Remove method: objects can be removed from the current selection set using any object selection method. An alternative to Remove mode is to hold down Shift while selecting single objects or use the Automatic option.
Subobject Allows you to select original individual forms that are part of composite solids or vertices, edges, and faces on 3D solids. You can select one of these subobjects, or create a selection set of more than one subobject. Your selection set can include more than one type of subobject. Pressing and holding the Ctrl key is the same as selecting the SELECT command’s Subobject option. Object Ends the ability to select subobjects. Allows you to use object selection methods.
List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select objects or [SEttings]: Use an object selection method and press Enter The Settings option displays the Select Similar Settings dialog box. See also: Select Objects by Properties Select Similar Settings Dialog Box Controls which properties must match for an object of the same type to be selected. List of Options The following options are displayed. Color Considers objects with matching colors to be similar.
SETVAR Lists or changes the values of system variables. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Set Variable Command entry: 'setvar for transparent use List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter variable name (page 943) or [? (page 943)] : Enter a variable name, enter ?, or press Enter Variable Name Specifies the name of the system variable you want to set.
Enter option [2D wireframe (page 944)/3D wireframe (page 944)/Hidden (page 944)/Flat (page 944)/Gouraud (page 944)/fLat+edges (page 944)/gOuraud+edges (page 944)] : 2D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries. Raster and OLE objects, linetypes, and lineweights are visible. 3D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent the boundaries. Material colors that you have applied to the objects are shown.
?—List Shapes Lists shapes and the files in which the shapes are defined. If you enter an asterisk (*), the program lists shape names. See also: Overview of Shape Files SHOWPALETTES Restores the display of hidden palettes. Access Methods Command entry: Tab Summary Restores the state of the display and position of palettes hidden by HIDEPALETTES (page 508). Press Tab to switch between HIDEPALETTES and SHOWPALETTES.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify Sketch (page 946) or [Type (page 946)/Increment (page 946)/toLerance (page 946)]: Sketch Creates a sketch. Type Specifies the object type for the sketch line. (SKPOLY (page 1436) system variable) â– Line (page 573) â– Polyline (page 785) â– Spline (page 988) Increment Defines the length of each freehand line segment. You must move the pointing device a distance greater than the increment value to generate a line.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group (expanded) ➤ Slice Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Slice Summary The cutting plane is defined with 2 or 3 points, by specifying a major plane of the UCS, or by selecting a surface object (but not a mesh). Either one or both sides of the sliced 3D solids can be retained. The sliced objects retain the layer and color properties of the original solids.
Objects that can be sliced Objects that can be used as cutting planes 3D polyline segments List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Objects to slice Specifies the 3D solid or surface object that you want to slice. If you select a mesh object, you can choose to convert it to a 3D solid or surface before completing the slice operation.
â– Select a circle, ellipse, arc, 2D-spline, or 2D-polyline. Specifies the object to use for alignment. Surface Aligns the cutting plane with a surface. â– Select a surface. Specifies a surface to be used for alignment. NOTE You cannot select meshes created with the EDGESURF (page 399), REVSURF (page 905), RULESURF (page 912), and TABSURF (page 1039) commands.
â– â– Point on desired side (page 951) â– Keep both sides (page 952) View Aligns the cutting plane with the current viewport's viewing plane. Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane. â– Specify a point on the current view plane. Sets a point on the object to start the slice. â– â– Point on desired side (page 951) â– Keep both sides (page 952) XY Aligns the cutting plane with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system (UCS).
â– Point on the YZ-plane. Sets the location of the slice. ZX Aligns the cutting plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS. Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane. â– Point on the ZX-plane. Sets the location of the slice. If a single object is sliced into more than two objects, one solid or surface is created from the objects on one side of the plane and another solid or surface is created from the objects on the other side. 3points Defines the cutting plane using three points.
Keep both sides Retains both sides of the sliced solids. Slicing a single solid into two pieces creates two solids from the pieces on either side of the plane. SLICE never creates more than two new composite solids for each selected solid. See also: Create 3D Solids or Surfaces by Slicing SNAP Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals.
On Activates Snap mode using the current settings of the snap grid. Off Turns off Snap mode but retains the current settings. Aspect Specifies different spacing in the X and Y directions. Style Specifies the format of the snap grid, which is Standard or Isometric. Standard Sets a rectangular snap grid that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS. X and Y spacing may differ. Spacing Specifies the overall spacing of the snap grid.
ISOPLANE (page 533) determines whether the crosshairs lie in the top isometric plane (30- and 150-degree angles), the left isoplane (90- and 150-degree angles), or the right isoplane (30- and 90-degree angles). Type Specifies the snap type, polar or rectangular. This setting is also controlled by the SNAPTYPE (page 1441) system variable. Polar Sets the polar angle increment. (POLARANG (page 1400) system variable) Grid Sets the snap to Grid.
direction. Silhouettes and edges are generated for all solids and portions of solids behind the cutting plane. For sectional views, cross-hatching is created using the current values of the HPNAME (page 1326), HPSCALE (page 1329), and HPANG (page 1319) system variables. Any existing profiles and sections in the selected viewport are deleted, and new ones are generated. All layers, except those required to display the profile or section, are frozen in each viewport.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. First point Sets the first point in the 2D solid. Second point Sets the first edge of the 2D solid. Third point Sets the corner that is opposite the second point. Fourth point or The fourth point is diagonally opposite the first point. Pressing Enter at the Fourth Point prompt creates a filled triangle. Specifying a fifth point creates a quadrilateral area.
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group (expanded) Summary You can extrude, move, rotate, offset, taper, copy, delete, and assign colors and materials to faces. You can also copy and assign colors to edges. You can imprint, separate, shell, clean, and check the validity of the entire 3D solid object (body). You cannot use SOLIDEDIT with mesh objects. However, if you select a closed mesh object, you will be prompted to convert it to a 3D solid.
â– Select faces. Specifies which faces to modify. â– Undo (page 958) â– Remove (page 958) Remove Removes previously selected faces from the selection set. â– Remove faces. Removes the selected face from the solid object. â– Undo (page 958) â– Add (page 959) â– All (page 959) Undo Cancels the selection of the faces you added most recently to the selection set and redisplays the prompt.
Add Adds faces you select to the selection set. â– Undo (page 958) â– Remove (page 958) â– All (page 959) All Selects all faces and adds them to the selection set. â– Select faces. Selects specific faces (instead of all of them).
Height of extrusion Sets the direction and distance of the extrusion. Entering a positive value extrudes the face in the direction of its normal. Entering a negative value extrudes the face in the direction opposite to its normal. â– Angle of taper for extrusion. Specify an angle between -90 and +90 degrees. Tapering the selected face with a positive angle tapers the face in, and a negative angle tapers the face out. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to its plane.
Lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, or splines can be paths. The path should not lie on the same plane as the face, nor should it have areas of high curvature. The extruded face starts from the plane of the profile and ends on a plane perpendicular to the path at the path's endpoint. One of the endpoints of the path should be on the plane of the profile; if not, the path is moved to the center of the profile.
Select faces Specifies the face to be moved. â– Base point of displacement. Sets the base point for the move. If you specify a single point, usually entered as a coordinate, and then press Enter, the coordinate is used as the new location. â– Second point of displacement. Sets a displacement vector that indicates how far the selected face is moved and in what direction. Face: Rotate Rotate Rotates one or more faces or a collection of features on a solid about a specified axis.
Pressing Enter at the main Rotate prompt displays the following prompts. Specifying a point at the main prompt skips the prompt for the first point: â– â– First point on the rotation axis. Sets the first point on the axis of revolution. Second point on the rotation axis. Sets the second point on the axis. Rotation angle (page 964) â– â– Reference (page 964) Axis by object Aligns the axis of rotation with an existing object.
â– â– Rotation angle (page 964) â– Reference (page 964) Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis Aligns the axis of rotation with the axis (X, Y, or Z) that passes through the selected point. â– Origin of rotation â– â– Rotation angle (page 964) â– Reference (page 964) Origin of rotation Sets the point of rotation. â– Rotation angle (page 964) â– Reference (page 964) Rotation angle Rotates the object about the selected axis the specified amount from the current orientation.
â– Specify the offset distance. Sets a positive value to increase the size of the solid or a negative value to decrease the size of the solid. Face: Taper Taper Tapers faces on a 3D solid at a specified angle. The rotation of the taper angle is determined by the selection sequence of the base point and second point along the selected vector. A positive angle tapers the face in, and a negative angle tapers the face out. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to its plane.
â– Remove (page 958) â– All (page 959) Select faces (taper) Specifies the faces to be tapered and then sets the slope of the taper. â– Base point. Sets the first point for determining the plane. â– Another point along the axis of tapering. Sets the orientation of the axis that determines the direction of the taper. â– Taper angle. Specify an angle between -90 and +90 degrees to set the slope of the taper from the axis. Face: Delete Delete Deletes or removes faces, including fillets and chamfers.
Creates a new object with the original orientation and profile of the face. The result can be used as a reference to create a new 3D solid. â– Select faces (copy) (page 967) â– Undo. Cancels the selection of the faces that you selected most recently. â– Remove (page 958) â– All (page 959) Select faces (copy) Specifies the face to be copied. â– Base point or displacement. Sets the first point to determine the distance and direction for the placement of the copied face (displacement).
â– Remove (page 958) â– All (page 959) Select faces (material) Specifies the faces to be modified. The Color Palette dialog box (page 198) is displayed. â– Enter new material name. Enter the name of the material to be assigned to the selected face. (The name of a material can be found by opening the Materials window and selecting the material swatch to display the name in the Name field.) â– ByLayer. Assigns the material based on the layer assignment.
â– Undo (page 969) â– Remove (page 969) Select Edges (copy) Specifies the edges to copy. Press Ctrl+click to select the edge. Then set the displacement: â– Base point of displacement. Sets the first point for determining where the new object is placed. â– Second point of displacement. Sets the relative direction and distance for the new object. Undo Cancels selection of the edges you added most recently to the selection set. The previous prompt is displayed.
Edge: Exit Exits the face-editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option prompt. Body Body Edits the entire solid object by imprinting other geometry on the solid, separating the solid into individual solid objects, shelling, cleaning, or checking the selected solid. Enter a body editing option [Imprint (page ?)/seParate solids (page ?)/Shell (page ?)/cLean (page ?)/Check (page ?)/Undo (page ?)/eXit (page ?)] : Body: Imprint Imprints an object on the selected solid.
A union or subtract operation can result in a single 3D solid that consists of more than one continuous volume. You can separate these volumes into independent 3D solids. NOTE Separating solids does not separate Boolean objects that form a single volume. Select a 3D solid Specifies the 3D solid object to separate. Press Ctrl+click to select the edge. Body: Shell Shelling creates a hollow, thin wall with a specified thickness. You can specify a constant wall thickness for all the faces.
â– Add. Press Ctrl+click an edge to indicate which faces to retain. â– All. Temporarily selects all faces for removal. You can then use Add to add the faces you want to retain. Enter the shell offset distance Sets the size of the offset. Specify a positive value to create a shell to the inside perimeter of the solid. Specify a negative value to create a shell on the outside perimeter of the solid.
Undo Undo Undoes the editing action. Exit Exit Exits the SOLIDEDIT command. See also: Clean and Check 3D Solids SOLPROF Creates 2D profile images of 3D solids for display in a layout viewport. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Setup ➤ Profile Summary The selected 3D solids are projected onto a 2D plane parallel with the current layout viewport. The resulting 2D objects are generated on separate layers for hidden and visible lines and are displayed only in that viewport.
PH-viewport handle for the hidden profile layer For example, if you create a profile in a viewport whose handle is 4B, the blocks containing the visible lines are inserted on layer PV-4B, and the block containing the hidden lines (if requested) is inserted on layer PH-4B. If these layers do not exist, the command creates them. If the layers do exist, the blocks are added to the information already on the layers.
No Creates the profile lines with 3D objects. The next prompt determines whether tangential edges are displayed. A tangential edge is the transition line between two tangent faces. It's the imaginary edge at which two faces meet and are tangent. For example, if you fillet the edge of a box, tangential edges are created where the cylindrical face of the fillet blends into the planar faces of the box. Tangential edges are not shown for most drafting applications.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Ucs (page ?)/Ortho (page ?)/Auxiliary (page ?)/Section (page ?)]: Enter an option or press Enter to exit the command SOLVIEW places the viewport objects on the VPORTS layer, which it creates if it does not already exist. The view-specific information that is saved with each viewport you create is used by SOLDRAW (page 954) to generate the final drawing view.
Named Uses the XY plane of a named UCS to create a profile view. Enter the name of the UCS you want to use and the scale of your view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The center is based on the current model space extents. World Uses the XY plane of the WCS to create a profile view. Enter the name of the UCS you want to use and the scale of your view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space.
Ortho Creates a folded orthographic view from an existing view. Once you select the side of the viewport you want to use for projecting the new view, a rubber-band line perpendicular to the side of the viewport helps you locate the center of the new view. Auxiliary Creates an auxiliary view from an existing view. An auxiliary view is one that is projected onto a plane perpendicular to one of the orthographic views and inclined in the adjacent view.
Two points define the inclined plane used for the auxiliary projection. Both points must be located in the same viewport. A rubber-band line perpendicular to the inclined plane helps you select the center of the new viewport. Section Creates a drafting sectional view of solids, complete with cross-hatching.
In the original viewport, specify two points to define the sectioning plane. Define the viewing side by specifying a point on one side of the cutting plane. Enter the scale of the new view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The default value is a 1:1 scale, which is equivalent to zoom 1.0xp. At the next prompt, specify the center of the new viewport.
Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Text tool group ➤ Check Spelling Menu: Tools ➤ Spelling Toolbar: Text Command entry: 'spell for transparent use Summary When you enter spell at the Command prompt, the Check Spelling dialog box (page 981) is displayed. Select the Start button to begin the spelling check. If Check Spelling is set to Entire Drawing, spelling is checked on the Model layout, then on named (paper space) layouts. If a flagged word is identified, the drawing area highlights and zooms to that word.
Summary Checks the spelling in single-line text, multiline text, multileader text, text within block attributes, text within xrefs, and text added to dimensions. In block attributes, only the attribute values are checked. The spelling in text objects within block references and nested block references is checked, but spell checking in block definitions is performed only if the associated block reference has been selected. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Select Objects Limits the spelling check to the selected single-line text, multiline text, dimension text, multileader text, text within block attributes, and text within xrefs. Not in Dictionary Displays the word identified as misspelled. Suggestions Displays a list of suggested replacement words from the current dictionary. You can select another replacement word from the list, or edit or enter a replacement word in the top Suggestions text area. Start Starts checking text for spelling errors.
Specifies to search external references for spelling errors. Options Ignore Capitalized Words Specifies to ignore capitalized words. Ignore Words with Mixed Cases Specifies to ignore words that contain uppercase and lowercase letters. Ignore Words in Uppercase Specifies to ignore words that are in all uppercase. Ignore Words with Numbers Specifies to ignore words that include numbers. Ignore Words Containing Punctuation Specifies to ignore words that contain punctuation.
Summary Specifies specific text options that will be checked in your drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Include Dimension Text Searches dimension text. Block Attributes Searches block attributes text for spelling errors. External References Specifies to search external references for spelling errors. Options Ignore Capitalized Words Specifies to ignore capitalized words. Ignore Words with Mixed Cases Specifies to ignore words that contain uppercase and lowercase letters.
Ignore Words in Uppercase Specifies to ignore words that are in all uppercase. Ignore Words with Numbers Specifies to ignore words that include numbers. Ignore Words Containing Punctuation Specifies to ignore words that contain punctuation. See also: Check Spelling SPHERE Creates a 3D solid sphere.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify center point (page ?) or [3P (page ?)/2P (page ?)/Ttr (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter an option Center Point Specifies the center point of the sphere. When you specify the center point, the sphere is positioned so that its central axis is parallel to the Z axis of the current user coordinate system (UCS). Latitudinal lines are parallel to the XY plane. Radius Defines the radius of the sphere. Diameter Defines the diameter of the sphere.
TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Defines the sphere with a specified radius tangent to two objects. The specified tangency points are projected onto the current UCS. See also: Create a Solid Sphere SPLINE Creates a smooth curve that passes through or near a set of fit points, or that is defined by the vertices in a control frame.
To display or hide the control vertices and control frame, select or deselect the spline, or use CVSHOW (page 247) and CVHIDE (page 242). For splines created with control vertices, you can display the control frame by selecting the spline. List of Prompts The prompts that display depend on whether you create a spline with fit points or with control vertices.
(cubic), and so on up to degree 10. Adjusting the shape of a spline by moving control vertices often provides better results than moving fit points. This is the preferred method if you are creating geometry to use with 3D NURBS surfaces. Object Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline-fit polylines to equivalent splines. The original polyline is retained or discarded depending on the setting of the DELOBJ (page 1213) system variable. Next Point Creates additional spline segments until you press Enter.
Options for Splines with Fit Points The following options are specific to the fit point method. Knots Specifies the knot parameterization, one of several computational methods that determines how the component curves between successive fit points within a spline are blended. (SPLKNOTS (page 1447) system variable) â– Chord (or Chord-Length method). Spaces the knots connecting each component curve to be proportional to the distances between each associated pair of fit points.
End Tangency Specifies a tangent condition on the ending point of the spline. Tolerance Specifies the distance by which the spline is allowed to deviate from the specified fit points. A tolerance value of 0 requires the resulting spline to pass directly through the fit points. The tolerance value applies to all fit points except the starting and ending fit points, which always have a tolerance of 0.
SPLINEDIT Modifies the parameters of a spline or converts a spline-fit polyline to a spline. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Spline Shortcut menu: Select a spline to edit. Right-click in the drawing area and click Spline. Summary Modifies the data that defines a spline, such as the number and weight of control vertices, the fit tolerance, and the starting and ending tangents.
Enter an option [Close (page ?)/Join (page ?)/Fit data (page ?)/Edit Vertex (page ?)/convert to Polyline (page ?)/Reverse (page ?)/Undo (page ?)] : Close/Open One of the following options displays, depending on whether the selected spline is open or closed. An open spline has two endpoints, while a closed spline forms a loop. Close Closes an open spline by defining the last point to be coincident with the first.
Close/Open One of the following options displays, depending on whether the selected spline is open or closed. An open spline has two endpoints, while a closed spline forms a loop. Close Closes an open spline by defining the last point to be coincident with the first. By default, closed splines are periodic, maintaining curvature continuity (C2) along the entire curve.
The System Default option calculates the default end tangents. Tolerance Refits the spline to the existing fit points using the new tolerance value. Exit Returns to the previous prompt. Edit Vertex Edits control frame data using the following options: Enter a vertex editing option [Add (page ?)/Delete (page ?)/Elevate order (page ?)/Move (page ?)/Weight (page ?)/eXit (page ?)] : Add Adds a new control vertex at the point you specify that is located between two existing control vertices.
New Weight Recalculates the spline based on the new weight value for the specified control vertex. A larger value pulls the spline closer to the control vertex. â– Next (page 995) â– Previous (page 995) â– Select Point (page 995) Exit Returns to the previous prompt. Convert to Polyline Converts the spline to a polyline. The precision value determines how closely the resulting polyline matches the spline. Valid values are any integer between 0 and 99.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Lights tool group ➤ Spotlight Menu: View ➤ Render ➤ Light ➤ New Spotlight Summary A spotlight distribution casts a focused beam of light like a flashlight, a follow spot in a theater, or a headlight. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Intensity/Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The range is 0.00 to the maximum value that is supported by your system. Hotspot Specifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light, which is known to lighting designers as the beam angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees or the equivalent values based on AUNITS (page 1177). Falloff Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light, which is also known as the field angle.
Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Shadow Makes the light cast shadows. Off Turns off display and calculation of shadows for the light. Turning shadows off increases performance. Sharp Displays shadows with sharp edges. Use this option to increase performance.
Attenuation Start Limit Specifies the point where light starts as an offset from the center of the light. The default is 0. Attenuation End Limit Specifies the point where light ends as an offset from the center of the light. No light is cast beyond this point. Setting an end limit increases performance where the effect of lighting is so minimal that the calculations are wasted processing time. Color/Filter Color Controls the color of the light. True Color Specifies a True Color.
In addition to overall drawing statistics and settings, the amount of installed memory free on your system, the amount of disk space available, and the amount of free space in the swap file are also listed. When used at the DIM prompt, STATUS reports the values and descriptions of all dimensioning system variables. In addition, STATUS displays the following information. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Current Linetype Sets the linetype of new objects. (CELTYPE (page 1186) system variable) Current Material Sets the material of new objects. (CMATERIAL (page 1192) system variable) Current Lineweight Sets the lineweight of new objects. (CELWEIGHT (page 1187) system variable) Current Plot Style Sets the current plot style of new objects. (CPLOTSTYLE (page 1202) system variable) Current Elevation Stores the current elevation of new objects relative to the current UCS.
The file is created with the .stl file name extension. The STL file format is compatible with stereolithography apparatus (SLA). The solid data is transferred to the SLA as a faceted representation of the model. The facets consist of a set of triangles (with outward pointing normals) that approximate the faces of the model. From the faceted data, the SLA workstation produces a set of contours that defines a series of layers representing the part to be built.
individually, are moved rather than stretched. Several objects such as circles, ellipses, and blocks, cannot be stretched. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select objects to stretch by crossing-window or crossing-polygon... Select objects: Use the cpolygon option or the crossing object selection method, and press Enter. Individually selected objects and objects that are completely enclosed by the crossing selection are moved rather than stretched.
If you enter a second point, the objects are stretched the vector distance from the base point to the second point. If you press Enter at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is treated as an X,Y,Z displacement. See also: Resize or Reshape Objects STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Text Style Command entry: 'style for transparent use Summary The Text Style dialog box (page 1006) is displayed.
Summary Creates, modifies, or sets named text styles. List of Options The following options are displayed. Preview Displays sample text that changes dynamically as you change fonts and modify the effects. Effects Modifies characteristics of the font, such as its height, width factor, and obliquing angle and whether it is displayed upside down, backwards, or vertically aligned. Annotative ( ) Specifies that the text is annotative. Click the information icon to learn more about the annotative objects.
Specifies that the orientation of the text in paper space viewports matches the orientation of the layout. This option is available when the Annotative option is selected. Upside Down Displays the characters upside down. Backwards Displays the characters backwards. Vertical Displays the characters aligned vertically. Vertical is available only if the selected font supports dual orientation. Vertical orientation is not available for TrueType fonts. Text Height Changes the size of the text.
Styles Displays the list of styles in the drawing. Style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters, numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (-). Family List Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all compiled shape (SHX) fonts in the Fonts folder. When you select a name from the list, the program reads the file for the specified font.
-STYLE Creates, modifies, or specifies text styles. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter name of text style (page 1010) or [? (page 1010)] : Enter a style name, enter ?, or press Enter Text Style Name Specifies the text style name. To define a style that uses Big Fonts, you can use long file names that do not contain commas. Commas are used to separate SHX files and Big Font files for defining a Big Font file. Enter a TrueType font family name or an SHX font file name.
At the Enter Text Style(s) to List prompt, entering the name of a style displays the name, font file, height, width factor, obliquing angle, and generation of the style and exits the command. Entering an asterisk (*) or pressing Enter displays the height, width factor, obliquing angle, and generation (whether text is drawn backwards, upside-down, vertically, or normally) of each style, and then exits the command.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group ➤ Booleans flyout ➤ Subtract Summary With SUBTRACT, you can create a 3D solid by subtracting one set of existing 3D solids from another, overlapping set. You can create a 2D region object by subtracting one set of existing region objects from another, overlapping set. You can select only regions for use with this command. NOTE Using SUBTRACT with 3D surfaces is not recommended. Use the SURFTRIM (page 1024) command instead.
Objects in the second selection set are subtracted from objects in the first selection set. A single new region is created. You can only subtract regions from other regions that are on the same plane. However, you can perform simultaneous SUBTRACT actions by selecting sets of regions on different planes. The program then produces separate subtracted regions on each plane. Regions for which there are no other selected coplanar regions are rejected. You cannot use SUBTRACT with mesh objects.
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Surfaces - Create tool group ➤ Surface Blend Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Blend Summary When you blend two surfaces together, you specify surface continuity and bulge magnitude. Set SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY (page 1452) to 1 to create a relationship between the blend surface and the originating curves. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Bulge Magnitude Sets the roundness of the blend surface edge where it meets the originating surface. The default is 0.5. Valid values are between 0 and 1. See also: Blend a Surface SURFEXTEND Lengthens a surface by a specified distance.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify Extension Distance Specifies the extension length. Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the length of the surface extension. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations. Modes â– Extend - Extrudes the surface in a way that tries to mimic and continue the shape of the surface. â– Stretch - Extrudes the surface without trying to mimic and continue the shape of the surface.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Surfaces - Edit tool group ➤ Surface Fillet Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Fillet Summary The fillet surface has a constant radius profile and is tangent to the original surfaces. The original surfaces are automatically trimmed to connect the edges of the fillet surface. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. First and Second Surface or Region Specifies the first and second surfaces or regions. Radius Specifies fillet radius.
See also: Fillet a Surface SURFNETWORK Creates a surface in the space between several curves in the U and V directions (including surface and solid edge subobjects). Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Surfaces - Create tool group ➤ Surface Network Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Network Summary A network surface can be created between a network of curves or between the edges of other 3D surfaces or solids.
Select Curves or Surface Edges in the First Direction Select a network of open curves, open surface edges, or region edges (not the surfaces or regions) for the U or V direction. Select Curves or Surface Edges in the Second Direction Select a network of open curves, open surface edges, or region edges (not the surfaces or regions) for the U or V direction. Bulge Magnitude Sets the roundness of the network surface edge where it meets the originating surface. Valid values are between 0 and 1.
List of Prompts The following prompts display. Specify Offset Distance Specifies the distance between the offset surface and the original surface. Flip Direction Reverses the offset direction shown by the arrows. Both Sides Offsets the surface in both directions (creates two new surfaces in instead of one). Solid Creates a solid from the offset. This is similar to the THICKEN (page 1052) command.
Connect Connects multiple offset surfaces, if the original surfaces are connected. Expression Enter a formula or equation to specify the distance of the surface offset. See Constrain a Design with Formulas and Equations. See also: Offset a Surface SURFPATCH Creates a new surface by fitting a cap over a surface edge that forms a closed loop.
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Surfaces - Create tool group ➤ Surface Patch Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Surfaces ➤ Patch Summary You can also add an additional curve over the closed loop to constrain and guide the patch surface. When you create a patch surface, you can specify surface continuity and bulge magnitude. If the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY (page 1452) system variable is set to 1, associativity is maintained between the patch surface and the originating edges or curves.
Press Enter to accept the patch surface or [Continuity (page 1023)/Bulge Magnitude (page 1023)/Guides (page 1023)]: Continuity Measures how smoothly surfaces flow into each other. The default is G0. See Understand Surface Continuity and Bulge Magnitude. Select a value or use the grip to change the continuity. Bulge Magnitude For best results, enter a value between 0 and 1 to set the roundness of the patch surface edge where it meets the originating surface. The default is 0.5.
NOTE The area enclosed by the surfaces must be watertight and the surfaces must have a continuity of G0 or the SURFSCULPT command cannot complete. The SURFSCULPT command also works with solid and mesh objects. If you are working with meshes, the operation uses the SMOOTHMESHCONVERT (page 1437) setting. See also: Convert a Group of Surfaces to a 3D Solid SURFTRIM Trims portions of a surface where it meets another surface or type of geometry.
If the SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY (page 1452) system variable is set to 1, the trimmed surface updates whenever the trimming edges are modified. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select Surfaces or Regions to Trim Select one or more surfaces or regions to trim.
â– When trimming a surface or region with a 3D curve in an angled, parallel or perspective view (for example, the default perspective view), the cutting geometry is projected onto the surface in a direction parallel to the Z direction of the current UCS. View Projects the geometry based on the current view. UCS Projects the geometry in the +Z and -Z axis of the current UCS. None The surface will only be trimmed if the cutting curve lies on the surface.
NOTE SURFUNTRIM does not restore areas removed by the SURFAUTOTRIM system variable and PROJECTGEOMETRY. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select Edges on Surfaces to Un-Trim [SURface] Select the edges of trimmed areas to replace or enter SUR to untrim surfaces. Select Surfaces to Un-Trim Select a surface to replace all trimmed areas. See also: Trim and Untrim Surfaces SWEEP Creates a 3D solid or surface by sweeping a 2D or 3D object or subobject along a path.
Summary Creates a solid or surface by sweeping an open or closed, planar or non-planar curve (profile) along an open or closed path. Open curves create surfaces and closed curves create solids or surfaces, depending on the specified mode. The sweep object is automatically aligned to the path object. Use SURFACEMODELINGMODE (page 1453) to set whether SWEEP creates a or a . The sweep object is automatically aligned to the path object.
Objects that Can Be Swept Objects that Can Be Used as a Sweep Path 3D solid face subobjects Helices Arcs Arcs Circles Circles Ellipses Ellipses Elliptical arcs Elliptical arcs Lines Lines Regions Solid, surface and mesh edge subobjects Trace NOTE Select face and edge subobjects by pressing Ctrl while you select them. To automatically delete the original geometry used to create the object, use the DELOBJ (page 1213) system variable.
Alignment Specifies whether the profile is aligned to be normal to the tangent direction of the sweep path. NOTE If the profile is not perpendicular (normal) to the tangent of the start point of the path, then the profile automatically aligns. Enter No at the alignment prompt to prevent this. Base Point Specifies a base point for the objects to be swept. Scale Specifies a scale factor for a sweep operation.
Summary A table is a compound object that contains data in rows and columns. It can be created from an empty table or a table style. When you create a table, the number of columns and rows created is determined by the two points picked to define the size of the table. If you enter -table at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 1036). List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Access Methods Toolbar: Table Cell visor (expanded) ➤ Manage Cell Contents List of Options The following options are displayed. Cell Content Lists all text and/or blocks in the selected cell in order of appearance. Text is indicated with the label Table Cell Text. Blocks are indicated with Block preceding the name of the block. Delete (-) Removes the selected content from the table cell. Options Changes the direction and spacing of the content in the cell.
Places cell content based on the width of the cell. Stacked Horizontally Places cell content horizontally, regardless of cell width. Stacked Vertically Places cell content vertically, regardless of cell height. Spacing Determines the spacing between text and/or blocks within the cell. See also: Create and Modify Tables Table Cell Format Dialog Box The options displayed here change based on the selected data type and format you select. List of Options The following options are displayed.
Preview Displays a preview of the option you selected in the Format list. Format Depending on the data type you select, displays a list of relevant format types. For example, if you selected Angle as the data type, options such as Decimal Degrees, Grads, Radians, and so on are displayed. Precision For Angle, Decimal Number, and Points data types only, sets the precision for applicable formats.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Value Displays the value in base drawing units, and reflects the value as it will appear once the conversion factor and other settings are applied. Conversion Specifies the conversion factor to use on the current value. The default is 1 for no conversion. Additional Text Specifies a prefix or a suffix for the value. Number Separators Specifies a decimal separator and the formatting for numbers over 1000.
Decimal Specifies the separator for decimal values. Select a period, a comma, or a space. Thousands Inserts a comma to group thousands in a field value. Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal values. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000. Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal values. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes 30.
Style Specifies a table style for the table. The specified table style must contain a starting table. Auto Specifies a size and a location for the table. When this option is selected, you can set the number of columns or the column width, but not both. The number of rows and the row height depend on the size of the window you specify. First Corner Specifies the location of the upper-left corner of the table.
The cell type is set in the Properties Inspector palette. The Data cell style uses the Data cell type property by default. Formulas Retains formulas found in the specified table style’s starting table. Fields Retains fields found in the specified table style’s starting table. For more information, see Use Fields in Text. Blocks Retains blocks found in the specified table style’s starting table. Cell Style Overrides Retains cell style overrides found in the specified table style’s starting table.
TABSURF Creates a mesh from a line or curve that is swept along a straight path. Access Methods Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Meshes ➤ Tabulated Mesh Summary Select a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or polyline to sweep in a straight path. Then select a line or polyline to determine the first and last points of a vector that indicates the direction and length of the polygon mesh. The MESHTYPE (page 1369) system variable sets which type of mesh is created. Mesh objects are created by default.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Object for path curve Specifies which object is swept along the path. The path curve defines the approximated surface of the polygon mesh. It can be a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or 2D or 3D polyline. The mesh is drawn starting at the point on the path curve closest to the selection point. Object for direction vector. Specifies a line or open polyline that defines the direction of the sweep.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Intensity Enter an intensity value in candelas, the perceived power in a luminous flux value, or illuminance value for the total luminous flux incident on a surface. â– Candela (symbol: cd) is the SI unit of luminous intensity (perceived power emitted by a light source in a particular direction). Cd/Sr â– Lux (symbol: lx) is the SI unit of illuminance. Lm/m^2 â– Foot-candle (symbol: fc) is the American unit of illuminance. Lm/ft^2 Enter f to specify the perceived power in a luminous flux value.
Attenuation Attenuation Type Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is from a point light, the darker the object appears. Attenuation is also known as decay. â– None. Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the point light are as bright as objects close to the light. â– Inverse Linear. Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance from the light.
TEXT Creates a single-line text object. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Text tool group ➤ Multiline Text flyout ➤ Single Line Menu: Draw ➤ Text ➤ Single Line Text Summary You can use single-line text to create one or more lines of text, where each text line is an independent object that you can move, format, or otherwise modify. Right-click in the text box to select options on the shortcut menu.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Current text style: Current text height: Annotative: Specify start point (page ?) of text or [Justify (page ?)/Style (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter an option Start Point Specifies a start point for the text object. Enter text in the In-Place Text Editor for single-line text. The SpecifyHeight prompt is displayed only if the current text style is not annotative and does not have a fixed height.
The height is the distance in drawing units that the uppercase letters extend from the baseline. Designated text height is the distance between the start point and a point you specify. The longer the text string, the narrower the characters. The height of the characters remains constant. Center Aligns text from the horizontal center of the baseline, which you specify with a point. The rotation angle specifies the orientation of the text baseline with respect to the center point.
TR (Top Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. ML (Middle Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only. MC (Middle Center) Centers the text both horizontally and vertically at the middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Style Specifies the text style, which determines the appearance of the text characters. Text you create uses the current text style. Entering ? lists the current text styles, associated font files, height, and other parameters. See also: Create Single-Line Text Text Shortcut Menu Displays options available for creating and modifying single-line text. List of Options The following options are displayed. Opaque Background When checked, makes the background of the editor opaque.
Special Unicode Characters When entering text, you can create special characters, including the degree symbol, plus/minus tolerance symbol, and the diameter symbol, by entering the following Unicode character strings. List of Options The following options are displayed. \U+00B0 Degrees symbol (°) \U+00B1 Tolerance symbol ( ) \U+2205 Diameter symbol ( ) See “Unicode Font Descriptions” in the Customization Guide.
%%u Toggles underscoring on and off. %%d Draws degrees symbol (°). %%p Draws plus/minus tolerance symbol ( ). %%c Draws circle diameter dimensioning symbol (ý). %%% Draws a single percent sign (%). This is valid for the TEXT command only. Overscoring and underscoring can be in effect at the same time. Both turn off automatically at the end of the text string. You can use the %%nnn control sequence to display special characters using the PostScript fonts.
® is set to 1, AutoLISP expressions are evaluated when the -TEXT command ends. AutoLISP expressions that are entered using this method must begin with an exclamation point or left parenthesis. The TEXT command checks the setting of the TEXTEVAL system variable setting only if it is used in a script or AutoLISP expression and all the TEXT command prompts are included within the script or AutoLISP expression.
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Move/Rotate/Scale tool group (expanded) ➤ Draw Order flyout ➤ Bring Text to Front, Bring Dimensions to Front Menu: Tools ➤ Draw Order ➤ Bring Text and Dimensions to Front ➤ Text and Dimension Objects List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Bring to front: [Text/Dimensions/Both] : Enter an option or press Enter Text Brings all text in front of all other objects in the drawing. Dimensions Brings all dimensions in front of all other objects in the drawing.
Summary A useful technique for modeling a complex 3D curved solid is to first create a surface and then convert it to a 3D solid by thickening it. Initially, the default thickness value is zero. During a drawing session, the default value for the thickness is the previously entered thickness value. The DELOBJ (page 1213) system variable controls whether the object(s) you select are automatically deleted when the surface is created or whether you are prompted to delete the object(s).
NOTE When the FILEDIA (page 1296) system variable is set to 0 (Off), command prompts are displayed. See also: Export Raster Files TIME Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Inquiry ➤ Time Command entry: 'time for transparent use Summary The Total Editing Time cannot be reset or stopped. Plotting time is not included in the total editing time, nor is the viewing time if the drawing is not saved.
Last Updated Displays the date and time of the latest update of the current drawing. This date and time is initially the drawing creation time. The time is revised whenever the drawing file is saved. Total Editing Time Displays the time spent editing the current drawing. This timer is updated by the program and cannot be reset or stopped. Plotting time is not included in the total editing time.
Insert Block in Table Cell Dialog Box Specifies options for inserting a block in a table cell. List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Specifies the block reference to insert. Browse Displays the Select Drawing File dialog box. Select the drawing file to insert as a block reference. Path Displays the location of the drawing file selected in the Select Drawing File dialog box. Scale Specifies the scale for the block reference.
block is center-, left-, or right-aligned with respect to the left and right borders of the cell. See also: Add Content to Tables TOLERANCE Creates geometric tolerances contained in a feature control frame. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Dimensions tool group (expanded) ➤ Tolerance Menu: Dimension ➤ Tolerance Summary The Geometric Tolerance dialog box (page 1058) is displayed. Geometric tolerances show acceptable deviations of form, profile, orientation, location, and runout.
Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box Specifies the symbols and values for a feature control frame. Summary After you select geometric characteristic symbols, the Geometric Tolerance dialog box closes and the following prompt is displayed: Enter tolerance location: Specify a location The feature control frame is placed at the specified location. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Sym Displays the geometric characteristic symbol, which you select from the Symbol dialog box (page 1060).
Inserts a diameter symbol in front of the tolerance value. Click the box to insert the diameter symbol. Second Box Creates the tolerance value. Enter a value in the box. Third Box Displays the Material Condition dialog box (page 1062), in which you select a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and the tolerance value of features that can vary in size. The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the first tolerance value in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box.
Datum 3 Creates the tertiary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same way as the primary datum reference. Height Creates a projected tolerance zone value in the feature control frame. A projected tolerance zone controls the variation in height of the extended portion of a fixed perpendicular part and refines the tolerance to that specified by positional tolerances. Projected Tolerance Zone Inserts a projected tolerance zone symbol after the projected tolerance zone value.
Summary The symbol is inserted into the Sym text box in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (page 1058). The following table describes the symbols.
Geometric characteristic symbols Symbol Characteristic Type Cylindricility Form Flatness Form Circularity or roundness Form Straightness Form Profile of a surface Profile Profile of a line Profile Circular runout Runout Total runout Runout See also: Overview of Geometric Tolerances Material Condition Dialog Box Specifies a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic and the tolerance value of features that can vary in size.
Summary The symbol is inserted into the MC box for the first or second tolerance value in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (page 1058). See also: Overview of Geometric Tolerances TOOLSETS Opens the Tool Sets palette. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Palettes ➤ Tool Sets Menu: Window ➤ Tool Sets See also: The Tool Sets Palette TOOLSETSCLOSE Closes the Tool Sets palette. See also: The Tool Sets Palette TORUS Creates a donut-shaped 3D solid.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Solid Primitives flyout ➤ Torus Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Torus Summary You can create a torus by specifying the center, then the radius or diameter of the torus, and then the radius or diameter of the tube that surrounds the torus. You can control the smoothness of curved 3D solids, such as a torus, in a shaded or hidden visual style with the FACETRES system variable. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
3P (Three Points) Defines the circumference of the torus with three points that you specify. The three specified points also define the plane of the circumference. 2P (Two Points) Defines the circumference of the torus with two points that you specify. The plane of the circumference is defined by the Z value of the first point. TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius) Defines the torus with a specified radius tangent to two objects. The specified tangency points are projected onto the current UCS.
Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Object ➤ Image ➤ Transparency List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Select image(s): Enter transparency mode [ON/OFF] : Enter an option or press Enter On Turns transparency on so that objects beneath the image are visible. Off Turns transparency off so that objects beneath the image are not visible. See also: Modify Color and Transparency for Bitonal Raster Images TREESTAT Displays information about the drawing's current spatial index.
and the current drawing has 50,000 objects with only 1,000 nodes in the index tree, increase the TREEDEPTH (page 1472) value to improve performance. Each node consumes about 80 bytes of memory. The fewer objects per node of the oct-tree, the better the performance. See also: Increase Performance with Large Referenced Drawings TRIM Trims objects to meet the edges of other objects.
Current settings: Projection = current, Edge = current Select cutting edges... Select objects or
Shift-Select to Extend Extends the selected objects rather than trimming them. This option provides an easy method to switch between trimming and extending. Fence Selects all objects that cross the selection fence. The selection fence is a series of temporary line segments that you specify with two or more fence points. The selection fence does not form a closed loop. Crossing Selects objects within and crossing a rectangular area defined by two points.
View Specifies projection along the current view direction. The command trims objects that intersect the boundary in the current view. Edge Determines whether an object is trimmed at another object's extrapolated edge or only to an object that intersects it in 3D space. Extend Extends the cutting edge along its natural path to intersect an object in 3D space. No Extend Specifies that the object is trimmed only at a cutting edge that intersects it in 3D space.
Erase Deletes selected objects. This option provides a convenient method to erase unneeded objects without leaving the TRIM command. Undo Reverses the most recent change made by TRIM. See also: Trim or Extend Objects U Commands U Reverses the most recent operation. Access Methods Menu: Edit ➤ Undo Shortcut menu: With no command active and no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and click Undo.
UCS Sets the origin and orientation of the current UCS. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Coordinates tool group ➤ World UCS Menu: Tools ➤ New UCS Shortcut menu: Right-click the UCS icon and click an option. Summary The UCS is the active coordinate system that establishes the XY plane (work plane) and Z-axis direction for drawing and modeling.
The three points specify an origin point, a point on the positive X axis, and a point on the positive XY plane. NOTE If you do not specify a Z coordinate value when entering a coordinate, the current Z value is used. TIP You can also select and drag the UCS icon origin grip directly to a new location, or choose Move Origin Only from the origin grip menu. Face TIP You can also select and drag the UCS icon (or choose Move And Align from the origin grip menu) to dynamically align the UCS with faces.
Named Saves or restores named UCS definitions. TIP You can also right-click the UCS icon and click Named UCS to save or restore named UCS definitions. Restore Restores a saved UCS definition so that it becomes the current UCS. Name Specifies the name of the UCS definition to restore. ?—List UCS definitions Lists details about the specified UCS definitions. Save Saves the current UCS to a specified name. Name Specifies the name for the UCS definition.
Previous Restores the previous UCS. You can steps back through the last 10 UCS settings in the current session. UCS settings are stored independently for model space and paper space. View Aligns the XY plane of the UCS to a plane perpendicular to your viewing direction. The origin point remains unchanged, but the X and Y axes become horizontal and vertical. World Aligns the UCS with the world coordinate system (WCS). The WCS is a fixed Cartesian coordinate system.
Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the Y axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis. Point your right thumb in the positive direction of the Z axis and curl your fingers. Your fingers indicate the positive rotation direction about the axis. You can define any UCS by specifying an origin and one or more rotations around the X, Y, or Z axis.
Z Axis Aligns the UCS to a specified positive Z axis. The UCS origin is moved to the first point and its positive Z axis passes through the second point. Object Aligns the Z axis tangent to the endpoint that is nearest to the specified point. The positive Z axis points away from the object. Apply Applies the current UCS setting to a specified viewport or all active viewports when other viewports have a different UCS saved in the viewport. (UCSVP (page 1481) system variable).
All Applies the current UCS to all active viewports. See also: Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) UCSSELECTMODE (page 1481) UCSICON Controls the visibility, placement, appearance, and selectability of the UCS icon. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Coordinates tool group (expanded) ➤ UCS Icon Properties Menu: View ➤ Display ➤ UCS Icon ➤ Properties Summary The UCS icon indicates the location and orientation of the current UCS. You can manipulate the UCS icon using grips.
â– 3D. A square is displayed in the XY plane at the origin if the current UCS is the same as the WCS, and you are viewing the UCS from above (the positive Z direction). The square is missing if you are viewing the UCS from below. The Z axis is solid when viewed from above the XY plane and dashed when viewed from below the XY plane. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Properties Displays the UCS Icon dialog box (page 1080), in which you can control the style, visibility, and location of the UCS icon. See also: Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon UCS Icon Dialog Box Controls the style, visibility, and location of the UCS icon. List of Options The following options are displayed. Style Specifies display of either the 2D or the 3D UCS icon and its appearance. 2D Displays a 2D icon without a representation of the Z axis. 3D Displays a 3D icon.
Line Width Controls the line width of the UCS icon if the 3D UCS icon is selected. Preview Displays a preview of the UCS icon in model space. Size Controls the size of the UCS icon as a percentage of viewport size. The default value is 50, and the valid range is from 5 to 95. Note that the size of the UCS icon is proportional to the size of the viewport in which it is displayed. Color Controls the colors of the UCS icon in model space viewports and in layout tabs.
Summary The UCS dialog box (page 1082) is displayed. See also: Work with the User Coordinate System (UCS) UCS Dialog Box Controls the UCS and UCS icon settings for viewports. Summary Lists, renames, and restores user coordinate system (UCS) definitions, and controls UCS and UCS icon settings for viewports. List of Tabs The UCS dialog box includes the following tabs: â– Named (page ?) â– Orthographic (page ?) â– Settings (page ?) Named Tab (UCS Dialog Box) Lists UCS definitions and sets the current UCS.
Current UCS Displays the name of the current UCS. If the UCS has not been saved and named, it is listed as UNNAMED. UCS Names List Lists the coordinate systems defined in the current drawing. If there are multiple viewports and multiple unnamed UCS settings, the list includes only the unnamed UCS of the current viewport. Unnamed UCS definitions that are locked to other viewports (UCSVP (page 1481) system variable = 1) are not listed in the current viewport. A pointer indicates the current UCS.
Current UCS Displays the name of the current UCS. If the UCS has not been saved and named, it is listed as UNNAMED. Orthographic UCS Names Lists the six orthographic coordinate systems defined in the current drawing. The orthographic coordinate systems are defined relative to the UCS specified in the Relative To list. â– Name. Specifies the name of the orthographic coordinate system. â– Depth.
World, the orthographic coordinate system name changes to UNNAMED to distinguish it from the predefined orthographic coordinate system. Options Manages the selected UCS in the dialog box. Set Current Restores the selected coordinate system. Reset Restores the origin of the selected orthographic coordinate system. The origin is restored to its default location (0,0,0) relative to the specified base coordinate system.
Icon Specifies the UCS icon display settings for the current viewport. On Displays the UCS icon in the current viewport. Display at UCS Origin Point Displays the UCS icon at the origin of the current coordinate system in the current viewport. If this option is cleared, or if the origin of the coordinate system is not visible in the viewport, the UCS icon is displayed at the lower-left corner of the viewport.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Depth Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system. Select New Origin Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can use the pointing device to specify a new depth location in the drawing. To reset the origin of the selected orthographic UCSs to the default location (0,0,0), click Options ➤ Reset.
Displays the values for the X axis relative to the UCS selected in Relative To. Y Axis Displays the values for the Y axis relative to the UCS selected in Relative To. Z Axis Displays the values for the Z axis relative to the UCS selected in Relative To. Relative To Sets a base coordinate system for calculating the values for Origin, X Axis, Y Axis, and Z Axis.
the command's group name, followed by another period (.). For example, the MTEXT command can be accessed with .acad_mtext.mtext. To determine command names and groups of an ObjectARX application, use the ARX (page 105) command, and choose the Commands option to see a listing of all currently loaded ObjectARX commands and their group names. See also: Use Built-in Commands in Macros UNDO Reverses the effect of commands.
UNDO Auto is not available if the Control option has turned off or limited the UNDO feature. Control Limits or turns off UNDO. All Turns on the full UNDO command. None Turns off the U and UNDO commands and discards any UNDO command information saved earlier in the editing session. The Undo button on the Standard toolbar is unavailable. The Auto, Begin, and Mark options are not available when None or One is in effect.
Mark, Back Mark places a mark in the undo information. Back undoes all the work done back to this mark. If you undo one operation at a time, you are informed when you reach the mark. You can place as many marks as necessary. Back moves back one mark at a time, removing the mark. If no mark is found, Back displays the following prompt: This will undo everything. OK? : Enteryornor press Enter Enter y to undo all commands entered in the current session. Enter n to ignore the Back option.
Summary UNGROUP removes all objects from the current group. The following prompts are displayed. Select group or [Name]: If a group contains sub-groups, you are prompted to Accept to ungroup the current selection or choose Next to cycle through the groups in the selection set. See also: Edit Groups UNION Combines selected 3D solids, surfaces, or 2D regions by addition.
Using the Union Command with Surfaces Although you can use the UNION command with surfaces, it will cause the surface to lose associativity. Instead, it is recommended that you use the surface editing commands: â– SURFBLEND (page 1013) â– SURFFILLET (page 1016) â– SURFPATCH (page 1021) Using the Union Command with Solids and Regions The selection set can contain objects that lie in any number of arbitrary planes. For mixed object types, selection sets are divided into subsets that are joined separately.
You cannot use UNION with mesh objects. However, if you select a mesh object, you will be prompted to convert it to a 3D solid or surface. List of Prompts The following prompt is displayed. Select objects Select the 3D solids, surfaces, or regions to be combined. See also: Create Composite Objects UNISOLATEOBJECTS Displays previously hidden objects. Access Methods Menu: Tools ➤ Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation Shortcut menu: Right-click in the drawing area and click Isolate ➤ End Object Isolation.
UNITS Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision. Access Methods Menu: Format ➤ Units Command entry: 'units for transparent use Summary The format, precision, and other conventions to be used in displaying coordinates, distances, and angles are set and saved in drawing template files. These settings can also be changed in the current drawing file. The Drawing Units dialog box (page 1095) is displayed. If you enter -units at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 1098).
List of Options The following options are displayed. Length Specifies the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current units. Type Sets the current format for units of measure. The values include Architectural, Decimal, Engineering, Fractional, and Scientific. The Engineering and Architectural formats produce feet-and-inches displays and assume that each drawing unit represents one inch. The other formats can represent any real-world unit.
Angle Specifies the current angle format and the precision for the current angle display. Type Sets the current angle format. Precision Sets the precision for the current angle display. The following conventions are used for the various angle measures: decimal degrees appear as decimal numbers, grads appear with a lowercase g suffix, and radians appear with a lowercase r suffix. The degrees/minutes/seconds format uses d for degrees, ' for minutes, and " for seconds; for example: 123d45'56.
Insertion Scale Controls the unit of measurement for blocks and drawings that are inserted into the current drawing. A block or a drawing that is created with units that are different from the units specified with this option is scaled when inserted. The insertion scale is the ratio of the units used in the source block or drawing and the units used in the target drawing. Select Unitless to insert the block without scaling it to match the specified units.
Report formats: (Examples) 1. Scientific 1.55E+01 2. Decimal 15.50 3. Engineering 1'-3.50" 4. Architectural 1'-3 1/2" 5.
See also: Determine the Units of Measurement UPDATEFIELD Manually updates fields in selected objects in the drawing. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Annotation tool set ➤ Fields tool group ➤ Update Fields Menu: Tools ➤ Update Fields Shortcut menu: With any text command active and a field selected, right-click and click Update Field. Summary You can update a field manually when you want to see the latest value. With Date fields, you must update them manually, they never update automatically.
NOTE The thumbnail previews displayed in the Sheet Set Manager are not available in AutoCAD for Mac. This command is made available for use in mixed environments. See also: Switch Between Open Drawings UPLOADTOWS Uploads the current drawing file to AutoCAD WS. Access Methods Menu: File ➤ Upload Drawing Online Summary If you are not logged into AutoCAD WS, the Login to AutoCAD WS dialog box (page 1101) is displayed prior to the drawing file being uploaded.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Email Enter the e-mail address associated with your AutoCAD WS account. First Time User? Create an Account Launches your default Web browser and displays the Create an AutoCAD WS Account page on www.autocadws.com. Password Enter the password for your account. Forgot Your Password? Launches your default Web browser and displays the AutoCAD WS Home page where you can request the password for your account.
Upload Complete Dialog Box Displays the current status of the drawing being uploaded to AutoCAD WS. List of Options The following options are displayed. User Name Displays the user name of the account currently logged in. Logout Logs the current user out and displays the Login to AutoCAD WS dialog box (page 1101). Upload Status Displays the current status of the drawing being uploaded: Upload Successful, Upload Failed, or Uploading.
V Commands VIEW Saves and restores named model space views, layout views, and preset views. Summary The options are displayed at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 1104). If you enter -view at the Command prompt, the options are displayed at the Command prompt as well. NOTE The VIEW command cannot be used transparently. See also: Save and Restore Views -VIEW List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
The view orientation of the specified orthographic view is based on the UCSBASE (page 1477) system variable, which is set to the world coordinate system by default. When one of the orthographic views is restored, the program zooms to the extents in the current viewport. Restore Restores the view you specify to the current viewport. If a UCS setting was saved with the view, it is also restored. The center point and magnification of the saved view are also restored.
UCS Determines whether the current UCS and elevation settings are saved when a view is saved. (UCSVIEW (page 1481) system variable) Visual Style Sets or updates a visual style for a view. Window Saves a portion of the current display as a view. Restoring such a view may display objects outside the window you specified because the shape of the window may differ from that of the viewport in which you are restoring the view.
List of Options The following options are displayed. View Specifies what is displayed. You can also right-click in the details area and click View Errors Only or View All to change this setting. All Displays information about all completed print and publish jobs and sheets within those jobs. Errors Lists errors that have occurred as jobs were printed or published. Copy to Clipboard Copies all highlighted text to the Clipboard. Details Area Lists details of completed print and publish jobs.
See also: Overview of Plotting VIEWRES Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport. Summary The model is regenerated. VIEWRES controls the appearance of circles, arcs, splines, and arced polylines using short vectors. The greater the number of vectors, the smoother the appearance of the circle or arc. For example, if you create a very small circle and then zoom in, it might appear to be a polygon.
VISUALSTYLES (-VISUALSTYLES) Creates and modifies visual styles from the command line. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [set Current (page ?)/Saveas (page ?)/Rename (page ?)/Delete (page ?)/? (page ?)]: Set Current These options are the same as the options in VSCURRENT (page 1124). Save As Saves the visual style with the name you specify. NOTE You must be in model space to save a visual style.
Summary You can either select an existing object to designate as the new boundary, or specify the points of a new boundary. The new boundary does not clip the old boundary, it redefines it. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Clipping Object Specifies an object to act as a clipping boundary. Objects that are valid as clipping boundaries include closed poly-lines, circles, ellipses, closed splines, and regions. Polygonal Draws a clipping boundary.
?—List Frozen Layers Displays the names of frozen layers in a selected viewport. Color Changes the color associated with a layer. True Color Specifies a true color to use for the selected object. Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to use for the selected object. All Applies the changes in all viewports. Select Applies the changes in selected viewports. Current Applies the changes in the current viewport only. Ltype Changes the linetype associated with a layer.
Transparency Changes the transparency level associated with a layer. â– All (page 1111) â– Select (page 1111) â– Current (page 1111) Freeze Freezes a layer or set of layers in one or more viewports. Objects on frozen layers are not displayed, regenerated, or plotted. â– All (page 1111) â– Select (page 1111) â– Current (page 1111) Thaw Thaws layers in specific viewports.
VPMAX Expands the current layout viewport for editing. Access Methods Toolbar: Status bar ➤ Maximize Viewport Pointing device: Viewport Control menu (+) ➤ Maximize Viewport Shortcut menu: Select a named layout viewport to maximize. Right-click and click Maximize Viewport. Pointing device: Double-click a named layout viewport. Summary The viewport is expanded to fill the screen and switched to model space for editing.
See also: Access Model Space from a Layout Viewport VPOINT Sets the viewing direction for a 3D visualization of the drawing. Access Methods Menu: View ➤ 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify a view point (page 1114) or [Rotate (page 1114)] : Specify a point, enter r, or press Enter to display a compass and axis tripod View Point Creates a vector that defines a direction from which the drawing can be viewed.
Compass and Axis Tripod Displays a compass and axis tripod, which you use to define a viewing direction in the viewport. The compass is a two-dimensional representation of a globe. The center point is the north pole (0,0,n), the inner ring is the equator (n,n,0), and the entire outer ring is the south pole (0,0,-n). As you move the crosshairs, the axis tripod rotates to conform to the viewing direction indicated on the compass.
Summary The Viewports dialog box (page 1116) is displayed. If you enter -vports at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 1119). See also: Set Model Space Viewports Viewports Dialog Box Creates new viewport configurations, or names and saves a model space viewport configuration. Summary The options available depend on whether you are configuring model space viewports (on the Model layout) or layout viewports (on a named (paper space) layout). List of Options The following options are displayed.
New Name Specifies a name for the new model space viewport configuration. If you do not enter a name, the viewport configuration is applied but not saved. If a viewport configuration is not saved, it cannot be used in a layout. Standard Viewports Lists and sets the standard viewport configurations, including CURRENT, which is the current configuration. Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each individual viewport in the configuration.
Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D, the new viewport configuration is initially created with the current view in all of the viewports. When you select 3D, a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the viewports in the configuration. Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the view you select from the list. You can choose a named view, or if you have selected 3D setup, you can select from the list of standard views.
New Viewports Tab—Layouts (Viewports Dialog Box) Standard Viewports Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and configures layout viewports. Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you select and the default views assigned to each individual viewport in the configuration. Viewport Spacing Specifies the spacing you want to apply between the layout viewports you are configuring. Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup.
-VPORTS - Model Space Viewports Creates multiple viewports in model space. Summary The number and layout of active viewports and their associated settings are called viewport configurations. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Save (page 1120)/Restore (page 1120)/Delete (page 1120)/Join (page 1120)/Single (page 1120)/? (page 1121)/2 (page 1121)/3 (page 1121)/4 (page 1121)] <3>: Enter an option Save Saves the current viewport configuration using a specified name.
?—List Viewport Configurations Displays the identification numbers and screen positions of the active viewports. The lower-left and upper-right corners of the viewport define its location. For these corners, values between 0.0,0.0 (for the lower-left corner of the drawing area) and 1.0,1.0 (for the upper-right corner) are used. The current viewport is listed first. 2 Divides the current viewport in half. 3 Divides the current viewport into three viewports.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify corner of viewport or [ON (page 1122)/OFF (page 1122)/Fit (page 1122)/Shadeplot (page 1122)/Lock (page 1122)/Object (page 1122)/Polygonal (page 1122)/Restore (page 1123)/LAyer (page 1123)/2 (page 1123)/3 (page 1123)/4 (page 1123)] : Specify a point or enter an option On Turns on a viewport, making it active and making its objects visible. Off Turns off a viewport.
It is important to create layout viewports on their own layer. When you are ready to plot, you can turn off the layer and plot the layout without plotting the boundaries of the layout viewports. Restore Restores a previously saved viewport configuration. Layer Resets layer property overrides for the selected viewport to their global layer properties. 2 Divides the current viewport in half. 3 Divides the current viewport into three viewports. Horizontal and Vertical split the area into thirds.
VSCURRENT Sets the visual style in the current viewport. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
Other Displays the following prompt: Enter a visual style name [?]: Enter the name of a visual style in the current drawing, or enter ? to display a list of names and repeat the prompt See also: Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model VSSAVE Saves a visual style. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Save current visual style as or [?] Enter a name or enter ? to list all the visual styles in the drawing. NOTE You must be in model space to save a visual style.
Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Block tool group (expanded) ➤ Write Block Summary The Write Block dialog box (page 1126) is displayed. Entering -wblock at the Command prompt displays a standard file selection dialog box in which to specify a name for the new drawing file, followed by command prompts (page 1129). If FILEDIA (page 1296) is set to 0, the standard file selection dialog box is suppressed.
Summary The Write Block dialog box displays different default settings depending on whether nothing is selected, a single block is selected, or objects other than blocks are selected. List of Options The following options are displayed. Save Location Specifies the new name and location of the file and the units of measurement to be used when the block is inserted.
Specifies a file name and path where the block or objects will be saved. Browse Displays a standard file selection dialog box (page 720). Preview Displays a preview of the objects selected to be written to a drawing file. Creation Specifies blocks and objects, saves them as a file, and specifies insertion points. Selected Objects Selects objects to save as a file. Specify a base point and select objects below. Entire Drawing Selects current drawing to save as another file.
X Specifies the X coordinate value for the base point. Y Specifies the Y coordinate value for the base point. Z Specifies the Z coordinate value for the base point. Extended Options Blocks Unit Specifies the unit value to be used for automatic scaling when the new file is inserted as a block in a drawing that uses different units. Select Unitless if you do not want to automatically scale the drawing when you insert it. See INSUNITS (page 1335).
[= (block=output file)/* (whole drawing)] : Existing Block Writes that block to a file. You cannot enter the name of an external reference (xref) or one of its dependent blocks. = Specifies that the existing block and the output file have the same name. * Writes the entire drawing to the new output file, except for unreferenced symbols. Model space objects are written to model space, and paper space objects are written to paper space.
Enter an option to change [Name (page ?)/Intensity factor (page ?)/Status (page ?)/Photometry (page ?)/weB (page ?)/shadoW (page ?)/filterColor (page ?)/eXit (page ?)] : NOTE The LIGHTINGUNITS system variable must be set to a value other than 0 to create and use weblights. Name Specifies the name of the light. Intensity Factor Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. Status Turns the light on and off. If lighting is not enabled in the drawing, this setting has no effect.
Color Specify the color of the light based on a color name or a Kelvin temperature. Enter ? to display a list of color names. Enter a text string using wild card characters to display a partial listing of color names, or an asterisk (*) to display all the possible choices. If you enter k, you can specify the color of the light based on a Kelvin temperature value. Exit Exits the command. Web Specifies the intensity for a light at points on a spherical grid.
Index Specifies an ACI (AutoCAD Color Index) color. HSL Specifies an HSL (hue, saturation, luminance) color. Color Book Specifies a color from a color book. Exit Exits the command. See also: Overview of Weblights WEDGE Creates a 3D solid wedge. Access Methods Button Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Create tool group ➤ Solid Primitive flyout ➤ Weblight Menu: Draw ➤ 3D Modeling ➤ Wedge Summary The direction of the taper is always in the positive X-axis direction of the UCS.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first corner or [Center (page ?)]: Specify a point or enter c for center Specify other corner or [Cube (page ?)/Length (page ?)]: Specify the other corner of the wedge or enteran option If the other corner of the wedge is specified with a Z value that differs from the first corner, then no height prompt is displayed.
Cube Creates a wedge with sides of equal length. Length Creates a wedge with length, width, and height values you specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis. 2Point Specifies that the height of the wedge is the distance between the two specified points. See also: Create a Solid Wedge WHOHAS Displays ownership information for opened drawing files. Summary You can use WHOHAS to track which users have certain drawing files open.
After you select a file, the ownership information is displayed at the Command prompt. The information includes the current user's computer name, login ID, and full name (if available) and the date and time the drawing file was opened. NOTE Similar information is displayed automatically when you try to open a drawing file that another user has already opened. The information displayed by WHOHAS is stored in a temporary DWL (drawing lock) file. A DWL file is deleted when the file is closed.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify first point (page 1137) or [Frames (page 1137)/Polyline (page 1137)] . First Point Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout object from a series of points. Frames Determines whether the edges of all wipeout objects are displayed or hidden. Polyline Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout objects from a selected polyline. Erase Polyline Enter y to erase the polyline that was used to create the wipeout object.
Summary When you attach a drawing file as an xref, you link that referenced drawing to the current drawing. Any changes to the referenced drawing are displayed in the current drawing when it is opened or reloaded. The Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)) is displayed. After you select the DWG files, the Attach External Reference dialog box (page 1138) is displayed.
List of Options The following options are displayed. Name Identifies the DWG you have selected to attach. Browse Displays the Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box (page 720)), in which you can select a new external reference for the current drawing. Reference Type Specifies whether the external reference is an attachment or an overlay.
Angle If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box. Path Type Select the full (absolute) path, the relative path to the external reference file, or No Path, the name of the external reference (the file must be located in the same folder as the current drawing file). Details Displays block and path information about the external reference being attached. Block Displays information about the block in the drawing. â– Unit.
Edit Reference in Place Edits the selected xref directly within the current drawing window. (REFEDIT (page 871)) Open Reference in New Window Opens the selected drawing reference (xref) in a new window. (XOPEN (page 1149)) Create Clipping Boundary Crops the display of the selected external reference to a specified boundary. (XCLIP (page 1144)) Delete the Clipping Boundary Removes the clipping boundary from the selected external reference.
See also: Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings (Bind) Bind External Definitions Dialog Box Adds xref-dependent named objects (such as blocks, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles) to your drawing. List of Options The following options are displayed. Xrefs Lists the xrefs currently attached to the drawing. Selecting an xref (double-clicking) displays the named object definitions in the attached xref.
Moves the xref-dependent named object definition selected in the Definitions to Bind list back to its xref-dependent definition table. See also: Archive Drawings That Contain Referenced Drawings (Bind) -XBIND Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed.
XCLIP Crops the display of a selected external reference or block reference to a specified boundary. Access Methods Menu: Modify ➤ Clip ➤ Xref Shortcut menu: Select an xref. Right-click in the drawing area and click Clip Xref. Summary The clipping boundary determines the portion of an xref or block instance that is hidden, either outside or inside the boundary. The visibility of the clipping boundary is controlled by the XCLIPFRAME (page 1524) system variable.
boundary and the clipdepth. The ERASE (page 406) command cannot be used to delete clipping boundaries. Generate Polyline Automatically draws a polyline coincident with the clipping boundary. The polyline assumes the current layer, linetype, lineweight, and color settings. Use this option when you want to modify the current clipping boundary using PEDIT (page 767) and then redefine the clipping boundary with the new polyline. To see the entire xref while redefining the boundary, use the Off option.
Toolbar: Modeling tool set ➤ Solids - Edit tool group (expanded) ➤ Extract Edges Menu: Modify ➤ 3D Operations ➤ Extract Edges Summary With the XEDGES command, you can create wireframe geometry by extracting all the edges from the following objects: ■3D solids ■3D solid history subobjects ■Meshes ■Regions ■Surfaces ■Subobjects (edges and faces) Press and hold Ctrl to select faces, edges and component objects, repeating if necessary.
Access Methods Button Toolbar: Drafting tool set ➤ Open Shapes tool group (expanded) ➤ Construction Line Menu: Draw ➤ Construction Line Summary Lines that extend to infinity, such as xlines, can be used to create construction and reference lines, and for trimming boundaries. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify a point (page ?) or [Hor (page ?)/Ver (page ?)/Ang (page ?)/Bisect (page ?)/Offset (page ?).
Hor Creates a horizontal xline passing through a specified point. The xline is created parallel to the X axis. Ver Creates a vertical xline passing through a specified point. The xline is created parallel to the Y axis. Ang Creates an xline at a specified angle. Angle of Xline Specifies the angle at which to place the line. Reference Specifies the angle from a selected reference line. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the reference line.
Offset Creates an xline parallel to another object. Offset Distance Specifies the distance the xline is offset from the selected object. Through Creates an xline offset from a line and passing through a specified point. See also: Draw Construction Lines (and Rays) XOPEN Opens a selected drawing reference (xref) in a new window. Summary Opens a selected drawing reference in a separate window for editing.
List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Enter an option [Individually (page ?)/Globally (page ?)]. Individually Applies changes to the selected objects one at a time. The following prompt is displayed for each object. All Sets the color, linetype, lineweight, and layer of the component objects after you explode them. The prompts associated with the Color, Linetype, Lineweight, and Layer options are displayed. Color Sets the color of the objects after you explode them.
Explode Breaks a compound object into its component objects exactly as the EXPLODE (page 407) command does. Globally Applies changes to all the selected objects. See also: Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode) XREF Starts the EXTERNALREFERENCES command. Summary The Reference Manager palette (page 414) is displayed. If you enter -xref at the Command prompt, options are displayed (page 1151).
Detach Detaches one or more DWG references from your drawing, erasing all instances of a specified xref and marking the xref definition for deletion from the definition table. Only the xrefs attached or overlaid directly to the current drawing can be detached; nested xrefs cannot be detached. Path Displays and edits the path name associated with a particular DWG reference. This option is useful if you change the location of or rename the drawing file associated with the xref.
â– Corner. Defines the X and Y scales at the same time, using the insertion point and another point as the corners of a box, and then defines the Z scale. Rotate Sets the angle of insertion for the xref. PScale Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the xref as it is dragged into position. PX, PY, and PZ Sets the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the xref as it is dragged into position. PRotate Sets the rotation angle of the xref as it is dragged into position.
NOTE You cannot use ZOOM transparently during VPOINT (page 1114) or DVIEW (page 385) or while ZOOM, PAN (page 763), or VIEW (page 1104) is in progress. List of Prompts The following prompts are displayed. Specify corner of window, enter a scale factor (nX or nXP), or [All (page 1154)/Center (page 1154)/Dynamic (page 1155)/Extents (page 1155)/Previous (page 1155)/Scale (page 1156)/Window (page 1156)/Object (page 1157)] All Zooms to display all visible objects and visual aids.
Dynamic Pans and zooms using a rectangular view box. The view box represents your view, which you can shrink or enlarge and move around the drawing. Positioning and sizing the view box pans or zooms to fill the viewport with the view inside the view box. Not available in perspective projection. â– To change the size of the view box, click, resize it, and click again to accept the new size of the view box. â– To pan with the view box, drag it to the location you want and press Enter.
NOTE If you change the visual style, the view is changed. If you enter ZOOM Previous, it restores the previous view, which is shaded differently but not zoomed differently. Scale Zooms to change the magnification of a view using a scale factor. â– Enter a value followed by x to specify the scale relative to the current view. â– Enter a value followed by xp to specify the scale relative to paper space units. For example, entering .5x causes each object to be displayed at half its current size on the screen.
Object Zooms to display one or more selected objects as large as possible and in the center of the view. You can select objects before or after you start the ZOOM command. Real Time Zooms interactively to change the magnification of the view. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus (-) signs. See Zoom Shortcut Menu (page 1157) for a description of the options that are available while zooming in real time.
Summary When the ZOOM command is active, you can exit ZOOM or switch to PAN (page 763) or 3DORBIT (page 40) using the options on the Zoom shortcut menu. To access the Zoom shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while ZOOM is active. List of Options The following options are displayed. Exit Cancels ZOOM or PAN. Pan Switches to PAN. Zoom Switches to ZOOM in real time. 3D Orbit Switches to 3DORBIT. Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular window.
Command Modifiers 3 Command Modifiers You can use command modifiers to help you locate points or select objects while a command is in progress. Use the Coordinate Filter, Direct Distance Entry, From, MTP, and Tracking command modifiers at any prompt that requires point specification. Use the Selection Mode command modifiers at any prompt that requires object selection. Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) Combines X, Y, and Z values from different points to specify a single point Command entry: Enter .
See also: Combine Coordinate Values (Coordinate Filters) Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor Command entry: At a prompt to locate a point, enter a numeric value With direct distance entry, you can quickly specify a point relative to the last point you entered. At any prompt for a point location, you move the cursor first to specify the direction, and then enter a numeric distance.
point. Enter the offset location from this base point as a relative coordinate, or use direct distance entry (page 1160). NOTE You cannot use this method during dragging in commands such as MOVE and COPY. Specifying an absolute coordinate, either by keyboard entry or with a pointing device, cancels the FROM command. See also: Offset from Temporary Reference Points MTP (Command Modifier) Locates the midpoint between two points.
Alternatively, tracking can establish a new point by combining the X and Y values of two specified points. You can specify these two points in any order, depending on the cursor direction after the first point. Direct distance entry specifies a distance in the direction of the current location of your cursor. Coordinate filters (page 1159) combine X, Y, and Z values from different points into a single point. Relative coordinate entry locates a point relative to the last point entered.
Use Running Object Snaps Using the OSNAP (page 743) or DSETTINGS (page 363) commands, you can specify a set of running object snaps. Running object snaps are one or more object snaps that remain in effect as you work. â– To turn running object snaps on and off, click the OSNAP button on the status bar or press F3. â– Press TAB to cycle through the object snap possibilities before you specify the point. â– To turn off running object snaps for the next point only, specify the None object snap.
1164
System Variables 4 System Variables AutoCAD for Mac® stores the values for its operating environment and some of its commands in system variables. You can examine any system variable and change any writable system variable directly at the command prompt by entering the system variable name or by using the SETVAR command or the AutoLISP® getvar and setvar functions.
1 Disables all 3D object snaps ZNON 2 Snaps to a vertex or a control vertex ZVER 4 Snaps to the midpoint on a face edge ZMID 8 Snaps to the center of a face ZCEN 16 Snaps to a spline or surface knot ZKNO 32 Snaps to a perpendicular face (planar faces only) ZPER 64 Snaps to an object nearest to a face ZNEA 126 Turns on all 3D object snaps To specify more than one object snap, enter the sum or their values. For example, entering 6 specifies the vertex (2) and midpoint (4) object snaps.
See also: Select Objects Individually A System Variables ACADLSPASDOC Controls whether the acad.lsp file is loaded into every drawing or just the first drawing opened in a session. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Loads acad.lsp into just the first drawing opened in a session 1 Loads acad.lsp into every drawing opened See also: AutoLISP and Visual LISP ACADPREFIX Stores the directory path, if any, specified by the ACAD environment variable, with path separators appended if necessary.
ACADVER Stores the AutoCAD version number. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies This variable differs from the DXF file $ACADVER header variable, which contains the drawing database level number. See also: Customize the Drawing Environment ACISOUTVER Controls the ACIS version of SAT files created using the ACISOUT command. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:70 ACISOUT only supports a value of 15 through 18, 20, 21, 30, 31, 40, 50, 60, and 70.
1 Invisible 2 Constant 4 Verify 8 Preset 16 Lock position in block 32 Multiple lines See also: Define Block Attributes ANGBASE Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Create Angular Dimensions ANGDIR Sets the direction of positive angles.
Angle values are measured from angle 0 relative to the orientation of the current UCS. 0 Counterclockwise 1 Clockwise See also: Create Angular Dimensions ANNOALLVISIBLE Hides or displays annotative objects that do not support the current annotation scale.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:-4 When the value is negative, the autoscale functionality is turned off, but the settings are maintained: 0 Newly set annotation scale is not added to annotative objects. 1 Adds the newly set annotation scale to annotative objects that support the current scale except for those on layers that are turned off, frozen, locked or that are set to Viewport > Freeze.
NOTE The ANNOTATIVEDWG system variable becomes read-only if the drawing contains annotative objects. See also: Create Annotative Blocks and Attributes APBOX Turns the display of the AutoSnap aperture box on or off. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 The aperture box is displayed in the center of the crosshairs when you snap to an object. 0 Off 1 On See also: Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap) APERTURE Sets the display size for the object snap target box, in pixels.
APERTURE controls the object snap target box, not the pickbox displayed at the Select Objects prompt. The object selection pickbox is controlled by the PICKBOX (page 1393) system variable. See also: Use Object Snaps APPAUTOLOAD Controls when plug-in applications are loaded.
Initial value:0 0 Off 1 On See also: Edit Associative Arrays AREA Stores the last area computed by the AREA command. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0.0000 This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. See also: Obtain Area and Mass Properties Information ARRAYTYPE Specifies the default array type.
See also: Work with Arrays ATTDIA Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box for attribute value entry. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Issues Command prompts 1 Uses a dialog box See also: Insert Blocks ATTIPE Controls if all formatting options are available with the in-place editor for modifying multiline attributes.
ATTMODE Controls display of attributes. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Off: Makes all attributes invisible 1 Normal: Retains current visibility of each attribute; visible attributes are displayed; invisible attributes are not 2 On: Makes all attributes visible See also: Define Block Attributes ATTMULTI Controls whether multiline attributes can be created. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Turns off all access methods for creating multiline attributes.
ATTREQ Controls whether INSERT uses default attribute settings during insertion of blocks. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Assumes the defaults for the values of all attributes 1 Turns on prompts or a dialog box for attribute values, as specified by ATTDIA (page 1175) See also: Insert Blocks AUDITCTL Controls whether AUDIT creates an audit report (ADT) file.
Initial value:0 0 Decimal degrees 1 Degrees/minutes/seconds 2 Gradians 3 Radians 4 Surveyor's units See also: Set the Unit Format Conventions AUPREC Sets the display precision for angular units and coordinates. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 However, the internal precision of angular values and and coordinates is always maintained, regardless of the display precision. AUPREC does not affect the display precision of dimension text (see DIMSTYLE (page 314)).
Initial value:0.3 The time delay setting in the AUTOCOMPLETEMODE (page 1179) system variable must be turned on for AUTOCOMPLETEDELAY to have an effect. Valid values are real numbers from 0 to 10, which represent seconds. See also: The Command Line Enter Commands on the Command Line AUTOCOMPLETEMODE Controls what types of automated keyboard features are available at the Command prompt.
AUTOSNAP Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:63 Also turns on polar and object snap tracking, and controls the display of polar tracking, object snap tracking, and Ortho mode tooltips. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Turns off the AutoSnap marker, tooltips, and magnet.
B System Variables BACKZ Stores the back clipping plane offset from the target plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 Meaningful only if clipping is specified in DVIEW (page 385). If there are several cameras, the value is the last back clipping plane that you set current. The distance of the back clipping plane from the camera point can be found by subtracting BACKZ from the camera-to-target distance.
BLIPMODE Controls whether marker blips are visible. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 Obsolete Marker blips have been removed from the product. This system variable has the same name as the BLIPMODE command. Use the SETVAR (page 943) command to access this system variable. 0 Turns off marker blips 1 Turns on marker blips See also: Erase Objects BLOCKEDITLOCK Disallows opening of the Block Editor and editing of block definitions.
BLOCKEDITOR Indicates whether or not the Block Editor is open. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Indicates that the Block Editor is not open 1 Indicates that the Block Editor is open See also: Create and Modify Blocks BTMARKDISPLAY Controls whether or not value set markers are displayed for dynamic block references.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Camera objects can only be created with the Windows releases of AutoCAD . 0 Camera glyphs are not displayed 1 Camera glyphs are displayed See also: Specify 3D Views CANNOSCALE Sets the name of the current annotation scale for the current space. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1:1 You can only enter a named scale that exists in the drawing’s named scale list.
CCONSTRAINTFORM Controls whether annotational or dynamic constraints are applied to objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Dynamic 1 Annotational When this system variable is set to 0, dynamic constraints are created, by default, when you use the DIMCONSTRAINT (page 284) command. See also: Apply Dimensional Constraints CDATE Stores the current date and time in decimal format.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value:BYLAYER Valid values include the following: â– BYLAYER or BYBLOCK â– AutoCAD Color Index (ACI): integer values from 1 to 255, or a color name from the first seven colors â– True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" â– Color Books: Text from standard PANTONE or custom color books, the DIC color guide, or RAL color sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43" See also: Change the Color of an Object CELTSCALE Sets the current object linetyp
See also: Set the Current Linetype CELWEIGHT Sets the lineweight of new objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-1 -1 Sets the lineweight to "BYLAYER." -2 Sets the lineweight to "BYBLOCK." -3 Sets the lineweight to "DEFAULT." "DEFAULT" is controlled by the LWDEFAULT (page 1365) system variable. Other valid values entered in hundredths of millimeters include 0, 5, 9, 13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, and 211.
CENTERMT does not apply to stretching multiline text by using the ruler in the In-Place Text Editor. 0 When you move a corner grip in centered multiline text, the center grip moves in the same direction, and the grip on the opposite side remains in place 1 When you move a corner grip in centered multiline text, the center grip stays in place, and both sets of side grips move in the direction of the stretch See also: Change Multiline Text CETRANSPARENCY Sets the transparency level for new objects.
See also: Display and Change the Properties of Objects CHAMFERA Sets the first chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Create Chamfers CHAMFERB Sets the second chamfer distance when CHAMMODE is set to 0. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Create Chamfers CHAMFERC Sets the chamfer length when CHAMMODE is set to 1. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.
CHAMFERD Sets the chamfer angle when CHAMMODE is set to 1. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Create Chamfers CHAMMODE Sets the input method for CHAMFER Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Requires two chamfer distances 1 Requires a chamfer length and an angle See also: Create Chamfers CIRCLERAD Sets the default circle radius. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0.0000 A zero indicates no default.
CLASSICKEYS Sets the behavior of the AutoCAD for Mac shortcut keys. Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 To copy, press Cmd-C 1 To cancel, press Cmd-C See also: Set Interface Options CLAYER Sets the current layer. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 See also: Change Layer Settings and Layer Properties CLEANSCREENSTATE Indicates whether the clean screen state is on or off.
See also: CLISTATE Indicates whether the Command Line is open or closed. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 0 Closed 1 Open See also: CMATERIAL Sets the material of new objects. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:BYLAYER Valid values are BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and the name of a material in the drawing. See also: Browse Material Library CMDACTIVE Indicates whether an ordinary command, transparent command, script, or dialog box is active.
Initial value:Varies The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 No active command 1 Ordinary command is active 2 Transparent command is active 4 Script is active 8 Dialog box is active 16 Not used 32 AutoLISP is active (only visible to an ObjectARX-defined command) 64 ObjectARX command is active See also: Enter Commands on the Command Line CMDDIA Controls the display of the In-Place Text Editor for the LEADER and QLEADER commands.
See also: Create and Modify Leaders CMDECHO Controls whether prompts and input are echoed during the AutoLISP command function. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 0 Turns off echoing 1 Turns on echoing See also: AutoLISP CMDINPUTHISTORYMAX Sets the maximum number of previous input values that are stored for a prompt in a command. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:20 Display of the history of user input is controlled by the INPUTHISTORYMODE (page 1333) system variable.
Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" For example, LINE'ZOOM indicates that the ZOOM command is being used transparently during the LINE command. This variable is designed for use with programming interfaces such as AutoLISP and DIESEL. The following is a simple example that demonstrates how to use DIESEL to display the current command at the status line. Command: modemacro New value for MODEMACRO, or .
1 Zero (Middle) 2 Bottom See also: Modify Multilines CMLSCALE Controls the overall width of a multiline. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0000 (imperial) or 20.0000 (metric) A scale factor of 2.0 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style definition. A zero scale factor collapses the multiline into a single line. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset lines (that is, the smallest or most negative is placed on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right).
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Dark 1 Light See also: Interface Themes and Background Color COMPASS Controls whether the 3D compass is on or off in the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Turns off the 3D compass 1 Turns on the 3D compass See also: Use 3D Navigation Tools CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY Controls the display of constraint bars after you apply constraints and when you select geometrically constrained drawings.
NOTE Constraint bars will always be displayed when CONSTRAINTBAR = Showall, even if you set the value of the CONSTRAINTBARDISPLAY system variable to 0. 1 Displays constraint bars for selected objects after applying constraints 2 Temporarily displays constraint bars for the selected geometrically constrained objects 3 Bits 1 and 2 are both turned on See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints CONSTRAINTBARMODE Controls the display of geometrical constraints on constraint bars.
128 Concentric 256 Colinear 512 Symmetric 1024 Equal 2048 Fix For example, set CONSTRAINTBARMODE to 12 (8+4) to display parallel and perpendicular constraints on the constraint bars. Set CONSTRAINTBARMODE to 4095 to display constraint bars for all constraint types. See also: Apply or Remove Geometric Constraints CONSTRAINTINFER Controls whether the geometric constraints are inferred while drawing and editing geometry.
CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT Controls the text format for dimensional constraints. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Name (for example, Width) 1 Value (for example, 4.0000) 2 Expression (for example, width = 4.0000) NOTE The CONSTRAINTNAMEFORMAT system variable is also applicable to the block constraint parameters in the Block Editor. See also: Apply Dimensional Constraints CONSTRAINTRELAX Indicates whether constraints are enforced or relaxed when editing an object.
CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE Controls constraint behavior when applying or editing constraints. Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Does not retain the size of the geometry when a constraint is applied or modified 1 Retains the size of the geometry when a constraint is applied or modified When the CONSTRAINTSOLVEMODE is set to 0, resizing a constrained line may result in unpredictable behavior.
COPYMODE Controls whether the COPY command repeats automatically. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Sets the COPY command to repeat automatically 1 Sets the COPY command to create a single copy See also: Copy Objects CPLOTSTYLE Controls the current plot style for new objects. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:ByColor If the current drawing you are working in is in color-dependent mode, CPLOTSTYLE is read-only and has a value of BYCOLOR.
CPROFILE Displays the name of the current profile. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:<> See also: Set Interface Options CROSSINGAREACOLOR Controls the color of the selection area during crossing selection. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:100 The valid range is 1 to 255. The SELECTIONAREA (page 1425) system variable must be on. See also: Customize Object Selection CSHADOW Sets the shadow display property for a 3D object.
2 Receives shadows 3 Ignores shadows See also: Display Backgrounds and Shadows CTAB Returns the name of the current layout in the drawing. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Model Provides a means for the user to determine which layout is active. See also: Set Model Space Viewports CTABLESTYLE Sets the name of the current table style.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 1 No subobject culling â– Rolling over 3D objects highlights all 3D subobjects, including hidden subobjects. â– Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects all 3D subobjects, including hidden subobjects. Apply subobject culling â– Rolling over 3D objects highlights only the subobjects that are normal in the current view. â– Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects only the subobjects that are normal in the current view.
â– Selecting 3D objects by dragging selects only the objects that are normal in the current view. See also: Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects CURSORSIZE Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of the screen size. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:5 Valid settings range from 1 to 100 percent. When set to 100, the crosshairs are full-screen and the ends of the crosshairs are never visible.
D System Variables DATE Stores the current date and time in Modified Julian Date format. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies This value is represented as a Modified Julian Date (MJD), which is the Julian day number and decimal fraction of a day in the format: . The Modified Julian Date, conventionally called UT1, is a worldwide scientific standard that assigns day numbers beginning at an essentially arbitrary date and time of 12:00 a.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 The system variable can accept the values of On and Off in place of 1 and 0. 0 Disabled 1 Enabled See also: Modify Objects DBMOD Indicates the drawing modification status.
DEFAULTGIZMO Sets the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo as the default during subobject selection. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 The 3D Move gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style. 1 The 3D Rotate gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style. 2 The 3D Scale gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style.
With the 3D Scale gizmo, you can resize selected objects uniformly, resize them along an X, Y, or Z axis, or resize them along a specified plane. To specify the scale limitations, hover the cursor over the gizmo. Highlight the solid area between the axes for uniform resizing. Highlight the double lines between the axes to specify resizing along a plane. Highlight an axis to specify resizing along an axis. No gizmo is displayed by default when an object is selected in a 3D visual style.
See also: Use the Gizmos DEFAULTLIGHTING Turns on and off default lighting in place of other lighting. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 Default lighting is provided by a set of distant lights that follow the view direction. When default lighting is on, the sun and other lights do not cast light, even if they are turned on. The setting of this system variable is viewport-specific.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 The default lighting provided in AutoCAD 2006 and earlier releases used one distant light. The new default lighting uses two distant lights to illuminate more of the model and also adjusts ambient light. The setting of this system variable is viewport-specific.
Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:ByColor When the drawing is opened and PSTYLEPOLICY (page 1410) is set to 1 (color-dependent plot style mode), DEFPLSTYLE is read-only and has a value of “BYCOLOR.” If PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 0 (named plot style mode), DEFPLSTYLE is writable and has a default value of “BYLAYER.” See also: Overview of Plot Styles DELOBJ Controls whether geometry used to create other objects is retained or deleted.
-1 Displays prompts to delete profile curves, including those used with the EXTRUDE, SWEEP, REVOLVE, and LOFT commands. Prompts to remove cross sections used with the LOFT command. The original geometry for CONVTOSOLID, CONVTOSURFACE, and CONVTOMESH commands is removed without prompting. -2 Displays prompts to delete all defining geometry, including paths and guide curves used with the SWEEP and LOFT commands.
2 Demand-loads the source application when you invoke one of the application's commands. This setting does not demand-load the application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects. 3 Demand-loads the source application when you open a drawing that contains custom objects or when you invoke one of the application's commands See also: Overview of Demand Loading DIASTAT Stores the exit method of the most recently used dialog box.
Initial value:0 -1 Angular dimensions display the number of decimal places specified by DIMDEC (page 1229). 0-8 Specifies the number of decimal places displayed in angular dimensions (independent of DIMDEC) See also: Create Angular Dimensions DIMALT Controls the display of alternate units in dimensions. Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Off See also DIMALTD (page 1216), DIMALTF (page 1217), DIMALTTD (page 1217), DIMALTTZ (page 1218), DIMALTZ (page 1219), and DIMAPOST (page 1220).
See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMALTF Controls the multiplier for alternate units. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:25.4000 (imperial) or 0.0394 (metric) If DIMALT is turned on, DIMALTF multiplies linear dimensions by a factor to produce a value in an alternate system of measurement. The initial value represents the number of millimeters in an inch. See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMALTRND Rounds off the alternate dimension units.
See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMALTTZ Controls suppression of zeros in tolerance values.
Initial value:2 1 Scientific 2 Decimal 3 Engineering 4 Architectural (stacked) 5 Fractional (stacked) 6 Architectural 7 Fractional 8 System Format See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMALTZ Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit dimension values. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 DIMALTZ values 0-3 affect feet-and-inch dimensions only.
3 Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet 4 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) 8 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) 12 Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5) See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMANNO Indicates whether or not the current dimension style is annotative.
Initial value:"" For instance, if the current units are Architectural, DIMALT (page 1216) is on, DIMALTF (page 1217) is 25.4 (the number of millimeters per inch), DIMALTD (page 1216) is 2, and DIMAPOST is set to "mm", a distance of 10 units would be displayed as 10"[254.00mm]. To turn off an established prefix or suffix (or both), set it to a single period (.). See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMARCSYM Controls display of the arc symbol in an arc length dimension.
Initial value:2 0 Creates exploded dimensions. There is no association between the various elements of the dimension. The lines, arcs, arrowheads, and text of a dimension are drawn as separate objects. 1 Creates non-associative dimension objects. The elements of the dimension are formed into a single object. If one of the definition points of the dimension moves, the dimension is updated. 2 Creates associative dimension objects.
DIMATFIT Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged when space is not sufficient to place both within the extension lines. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:3 0 Places both text and arrows outside extension lines 1 Moves arrows first, then text 2 Moves text first, then arrows 3 Moves either text or arrows, whichever fits best A leader is added to moved dimension text when DIMTMOVE (page 1247) is set to 1.
See also: Create Angular Dimensions DIMAZIN Suppresses zeros for angular dimensions. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Displays all leading and trailing zeros 1 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) 2 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) 3 Suppresses leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .
NOTE blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.
"_DATUMBLANK" datum triangle "_INTEGRAL" integral "_ARCHTICK" architectural tick See also: Customize Arrowheads DIMBLK1 Sets the arrowhead for the first end of the dimension line when DIMSAH is on. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of arrowheads, see DIMBLK. NOTE blocks cannot be used as custom arrowheads for dimensions or leaders.
See also: Customize Arrowheads DIMCEN Controls drawing of circle or arc center marks and centerlines by the DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS commands. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0900 (imperial) or 2.5000 (metric) For DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS, the center mark is drawn only if you place the dimension line outside the circle or arc.
Also controls the color of leader lines created with the LEADER command. Color numbers are displayed in the Color Palette dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256. See also: Control Dimension Lines DIMCLRE Assigns colors to extension lines, center marks, and centerlines. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Color numbers are displayed in the Color Palette dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:3 0 Does not display the lock icon next to the text for dimensional constraints 1 Displays the icon for dynamic constraints 2 Displays the icon for annotational constraints 3 Displays the icon for dynamic and annotational constraints See also: Apply Dimensional Constraints DIMDEC Sets the number of decimal places displayed for the primary units of a dimension.
Initial value:0.0000 See also: Control Dimension Lines DIMDLI Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline dimensions. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.3800 (imperial) or 3.7500 (metric) Each dimension line is offset from the previous one by this amount, if necessary, to avoid drawing over it. Changes made with DIMDLI are not applied to existing dimensions.
DIMEXE Specifies how far to extend the extension line beyond the dimension line. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.1800 (imperial) or 1.2500 (metric) See also: Control Extension Lines DIMEXO Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin points. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0625 (imperial) or 0.6250 (metric) With fixed-length extension lines, this value determines the minimum offset.
See also: Control the Display of Fractions DIMFXL Sets the total length of the extension lines starting from the dimension line toward the dimension origin. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0000 See also: Control Extension Lines DIMFXLON Controls whether extension lines are set to a fixed length. Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Off When DIMFXLON is on, extension lines are set to the length specified by DIMFXL.
Also sets the gap between annotation and a hook line created with the LEADER command. If you enter a negative value, DIMGAP places a box around the dimension text. DIMGAP is also used as the minimum length for pieces of the dimension line. When the default position for the dimension text is calculated, text is positioned inside the extension lines only if doing so breaks the dimension lines into two segments at least as long as DIMGAP.
1 Positions the text next to the first extension line 2 Positions the text next to the second extension line 3 Positions the text above and aligned with the first extension line 4 Positions the text above and aligned with the second extension line See also: Control the Location of Dimension Text DIMLDRBLK Specifies the arrow type for leaders. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" To return to the default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.).
values of DIMLFAC are applied to dimensions in both model space and paper space; negative values are applied to paper space only. DIMLFAC applies primarily to nonassociative dimensions (DIMASSOC set 0 or 1). For nonassociative dimensions in paper space, DIMLFAC must be set individually for each layout viewport to accommodate viewport scaling. DIMLFAC has no effect on angular dimensions, and is not applied to the values held in DIMRND (page 1238), DIMTM (page 1246), or DIMTP (page 1249).
See also: Control Extension Lines DIMLTEX2 Sets the linetype of the second extension line. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" The value is BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, or the name of a linetype. See also: Control Extension Lines DIMLTYPE Sets the linetype of the dimension line. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" The value is BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, or the name of a linetype. See also: Control Dimension Lines DIMLUNIT Sets units for all dimension types except Angular.
2 Decimal 3 Engineering 4 Architectural (always displayed stacked) 5 Fractional (always displayed stacked) 6 System Format See also: Control the Display of Dimension Units DIMLWD Assigns lineweight to dimension lines. Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-2 -3 Default (the LWDEFAULT (page 1365) value) -2 BYBLOCK -1 BYLAYER The integer represents 1/100th of a mm. See also: Control Dimension Lines DIMLWE Assigns lineweight to extension lines.
Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-2 -3 Default (the LWDEFAULT (page 1365) value) -2 BYBLOCK -1 BYLAYER The integer represents 1/100th of a mm. See also: Control Extension Lines DIMPOST Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the dimension measurement. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:None For example, to establish a suffix for millimeters, set DIMPOST to mm; a distance of 19.2 units would be displayed as 19.2 mm.
Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 For instance, if DIMRND is set to 0.25, all distances round to the nearest 0.25 unit. If you set DIMRND to 1.0, all distances round to the nearest integer. Note that the number of digits edited after the decimal point depends on the precision set by DIMDEC. DIMRND does not apply to angular dimensions. See also: Round Off Dimension Values DIMSAH Controls the display of dimension line arrowhead blocks.
Use MLEADERSCALE (page 1371) to scale multileader objects created with the MLEADER (page 651) command. 0.0 A reasonable default value is computed based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space. If you are in paper space or model space and not using the paper space feature, the scale factor is 1.0. >0 A scale factor is computed that leads text sizes, arrowhead sizes, and other scaled distances to plot at their face values.
DIMSD2 Controls suppression of the second dimension line and arrowhead. Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Off When turned on, suppresses the display of the dimension line and arrowhead between the second extension line and the text. Off Second dimension line is not suppressed On Second dimension line is suppressed See also: Control Dimension Lines DIMSE1 Suppresses display of the first extension line.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Off Off Extension line is not suppressed On Extension line is suppressed See also: Control Extension Lines DIMSOXD Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available inside the extension lines. Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Off Off Arrowheads are not suppressed On Arrowheads are suppressed If not enough space is available inside the extension lines and DIMTIX (page 1246) is on, setting DIMSOXD to On suppresses the arrowheads.
This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable. The DIMSTYLE system variable is read-only; to change the current dimension style, use the DIMSTYLE command. See also: Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions DIMTAD Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the dimension line. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 (imperial) or 1 (metric) 0 Centers the dimension text between the extension lines.
DIMTDEC Sets the number of decimal places to display in tolerance values for the primary units in a dimension. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:4 (imperial) or 2 (metric) This system variable has no effect unless DIMTOL is set to On. The default for DIMTOL is Off. See also: Display Lateral Tolerances DIMTFAC Specifies a scale factor for the text height of fractions and tolerance values relative to the dimension text height, as set by DIMTXT. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.
Initial value:0 0 No background 1 The background color of the drawing 2 The background specified by DIMTFILLCLR (page 1245) See also: Control the Appearance of Dimension Text DIMTFILLCLR Sets the color for the text background in dimensions. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Color numbers are displayed in the Color Palette dialog box. For BYBLOCK, enter 0. For BYLAYER, enter 256.
See also: Control the Location of Dimension Text DIMTIX Draws text between extension lines. Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Off Off For linear and angular dimensions, dimension text is placed inside the extension lines if there is sufficient room. On Draws dimension text between the extension lines even if it would ordinarily be placed outside those lines. For radius and diameter dimensions, DIMTIX on always forces the dimension text outside the circle or arc.
See also: Display Lateral Tolerances DIMTMOVE Sets dimension text movement rules. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Moves the dimension line with dimension text 1 Adds a leader when dimension text is moved 2 Allows text to be moved freely without a leader See also: Modify Dimension Text DIMTOFL Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the extension lines even when the text is placed outside.
See also: Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines DIMTOH Controls the position of dimension text outside the extension lines. Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value:On (imperial) or Off (metric) Off Aligns text with the dimension line On Draws text horizontally See also: Fit Dimension Text Within Extension Lines DIMTOL Appends tolerances to dimension text. Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Off Setting DIMTOL to on turns DIMLIM off.
Initial value:1 (imperial) or 0 (metric) This system variable has no effect unless DIMTOL is set to On. The default for DIMTOL is Off. 0 Bottom 1 Middle 2 Top See also: Display Lateral Tolerances DIMTP Sets the maximum (or upper) tolerance limit for dimension text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 DIMTP accepts signed values. If DIMTOL is on and DIMTP and DIMTM are set to the same value, a tolerance value is drawn.
Initial value:0.0000 0 Draws arrowheads. >0 Draws oblique strokes instead of arrowheads. The size of the oblique strokes is determined by this value multiplied by the DIMSCALE (page 1239) value. See also: Customize Arrowheads DIMTVP Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or below the dimension line. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 The DIMTVP value is used when DIMTAD is off. The magnitude of the vertical offset of text is the product of the text height and DIMTVP.
DIMTXT Specifies the height of dimension text, unless the current text style has a fixed height. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.1800 (imperial) or 2.5000 (metric) See also: Control the Appearance of Dimension Text DIMTXTDIRECTION Specifies the reading direction of the dimension text.
1 Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches 2 Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches 3 Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet 4 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5000) 8 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5) 12 Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for example, 0.5000 becomes .5) See also: Display Lateral Tolerances DIMUPT Controls options for user-positioned text.
DIMZIN Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit value. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 (imperial) or 8 (metric) Values 0-3 affect feet-and-inch dimensions only: 0 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches 1 Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches 2 Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches 3 Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet 4 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for example, 0.5000 becomes .
Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Off. Do not display the ViewCube tool when the 2D Wireframe visual style is applied 1 On. Display the ViewCube tool when the 2D Wireframe visual style is applied See also: Use ViewCube Tool DISPLAYVIEWCUBEIN3D Controls the display of the ViewCube tool when a 3D visual style is applied to a viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Off. Do not display the ViewCube tool when a 3D visual style is applied 1 On.
Initial value:0 0 Off. Do not display silhouette edges 1 On. Display silhouette edges When turned on, DISPSILH also suppresses the mesh displayed when using the HIDE command in the 2D Wireframe visual style. Use the REGEN command to display the results. See also: Control the Display of Edges DISTANCE Stores the distance computed by the DIST command. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0.
This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Box DIVMESHBOXLENGTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh box along the X axis. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH (page 617) command.
See also: Create a Mesh Box DIVMESHBOXWIDTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of a mesh box along the Y axis. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh boxes that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Box DIVMESHCONEAXIS Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cone base.
This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Cone DIVMESHCONEBASE Sets the number of subdivisions between the perimeter and the center point of the mesh cone base.
This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Cone DIVMESHCONEHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the point or top of the mesh cone.
This setting affects new mesh cones that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Cone DIVMESHCYLAXIS Sets the number of subdivisions around the perimeter of the mesh cylinder base.
This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Cylinder DIVMESHCYLBASE Sets the number of radial subdivisions from the center of the mesh cylinder base to its perimeter.
This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Cylinder DIVMESHCYLHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh cylinder. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh cylinders that are created with the MESH (page 617) command.
Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Pyramid DIVMESHPYRHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the base and the top of the mesh pyramid.
This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Pyramid DIVMESHPYRLENGTH Sets the number of subdivisions along each dimension of a mesh pyramid base. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh pyramids that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Pyramid DIVMESHSPHEREAXIS Sets the number of radial subdivisions around the axis endpoint of the mesh sphere.
Initial value:12 This setting affects new mesh spheres that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Sphere DIVMESHSPHEREHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions between the two axis endpoints of the mesh sphere. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:6 This setting affects new mesh spheres that are created with the MESH (page 617) command.
See also: Create a Mesh Sphere DIVMESHTORUSPATH Sets the number of subdivisions in the path that is swept by the profile of a mesh torus. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:8 This setting affects new mesh tori that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Torus DIVMESHTORUSSECTION Sets the number of subdivisions in the profile that sweeps the path of a mesh torus.
This setting affects new mesh tori that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Torus DIVMESHWEDGEBASE Sets the number of subdivisions between the midpoint of the perimeter of triangular dimension of the mesh wedge. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH (page 617) command.
See also: Create a Mesh Wedge DIVMESHWEDGEHEIGHT Sets the number of subdivisions for the height of the mesh wedge along the Z axis. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Wedge DIVMESHWEDGELENGTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the length of a mesh wedge along the X axis.
This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Wedge DIVMESHWEDGESLOPE Sets the number of subdivisions in the slope that extends from the apex of the wedge to the edge of the base.
This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Wedge DIVMESHWEDGEWIDTH Sets the number of subdivisions for the width of the mesh wedge along the Y axis. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:3 This setting affects new mesh wedges that are created with the MESH (page 617) command. See also: Create a Mesh Wedge DONUTID Sets the default for the inside diameter of a donut.
Initial value:0.5000 See also: Draw Donuts DONUTOD Sets the default for the outside diameter of a donut. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1.0000 The value must be nonzero. If DONUTID is larger than DONUTOD, the two values are swapped by the next command. See also: Draw Donuts DRAGMODE Controls the display of objects being dragged. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable.
See also: Set Up the Drawing Area DRAGP1 When hardware acceleration is used, controls how many vectors the system draws when you drag objects within a 2D viewport before it checks for a new input sample from the mouse. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:5000 A larger number results in more graphical vectors being displayed as objects are dragged. For best performance, it is recommended that you use hardware acceleration rather than software acceleration.
DRAGVS Sets the visual style that is displayed while creating 3D solid and mesh primitives and extruded solids, surfaces, and meshes. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" You can enter a period (.) to specify the current visual style. DRAGVS can only be set to a visual style that is saved in the drawing. DRAGVS has no effect when the current viewport's visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. The visual style specified for DRAGVS cannot be removed with the PURGE (page 849) command.
2 Turns on draw order inheritance: new objects created from another object using the commands listed above are assigned the draw order of the original object. 3 Provides full draw order display. Turns on the correct draw order of objects, and turns on draw order inheritance. NOTE Full draw order display may slow some editing operations. See also: Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed DRSTATE Indicates whether the Files Recovered dialog box is open or closed.
Obsolete command. Replaced by the TEXTED (page 1460) system variable. See also: Create Single-Line Text DWGCHECK Checks drawings for potential problems when opening them. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 If a drawing that you try to open has a potential problem, you are warned before the drawing is opened.
Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies See also: Use Unicode and Big Fonts DWGNAME Stores the name of the current drawing. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Drawing1.dwg If a new drawing has not been saved yet, DWGNAME defaults to Drawing1.dwg. Additional new drawings are named Drawing2.dwg, Drawing3.dwg, and so on. The location of the saved drawing file is stored in DWGPREFIX (page 1276). See also: Save a Drawing DWGPREFIX Stores the drive and folder prefix for the drawing.
(Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Drawing has not been named 1 Drawing has been named See also: Save a Drawing DYNCONSTRAINTMODE Displays hidden dimensional constraints when constrained objects are selected.
Initial value:31 The DYNDIVIS system variable must be set to 2, which displays all dynamic dimensions. The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 None 1 Resulting dimension 2 Length change dimension 4 Absolute angle dimension 8 Angle change dimension 16 Arc radius dimension The DYNMODE (page 1279) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off.
2 All dynamic dimensions, as controlled by the DYNDIGRIP (page 1277) system variable The DYNMODE (page 1279) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. See also: Use Dynamic Input DYNINFOTIPS Controls whether tips are displayed for using Shift and Ctrl when editing with grips. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 When dynamic input is turned on and you select a grip, a tip at the cursor lists the available grip options that you can cycle through using Shift or Ctrl..
When all features are on, the context governs what is displayed. When DYNMODE is set to a negative value, the Dynamic Input features are not turned on, but the setting is stored. Press the Dynamic Input button in the status bar to set DYNMODE to the corresponding positive value.
The DYNMODE (page 1279) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. See also: Use Dynamic Input DYNPIFORMAT Controls whether pointer input uses polar or Cartesian format for coordinates. Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 This setting applies only to a second or next point. 0 Polar 1 Cartesian The DYNMODE (page 1279) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. See also: Use Dynamic Input DYNPIVIS Controls when pointer input is displayed.
The DYNMODE (page 1279) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. See also: Use Dynamic Input DYNPROMPT Controls display of prompts in Dynamic Input tooltips. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Off 1 On The DYNMODE (page 1279) system variable turns Dynamic Input features on and off. When DYNMODE is set to 0 (off), prompts are not displayed regardless of the DYNPROMPT setting.
See also: Use Dynamic Input E System Variables EDGEMODE Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands determine cutting and boundary edges. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Uses the selected edge without any extensions 1 Extends or trims the selected object to an imaginary extension of the cutting or boundary edge Lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, rays, and polylines are objects eligible for natural extension.
See also: Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) Enter 3D Coordinates ERHIGHLIGHT Controls whether reference names or reference objects are highlighted when their counterparts are selected in the Reference Manager palette or in the drawing window. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Referenced objects are not highlighted. 1 Referenced objects are highlighted.
See also: Overview of AutoLISP ERSTATE Indicates whether the Reference Manager palette is open or closed. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies 0 Closed 1 Open See also: Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) EXPERT Controls whether certain prompts are issued. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Issues all prompts normally.
3 Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued by the LINETYPE (page 575) Command prompt (-LINETYPE) if you try to load a linetype that's already loaded or create a new linetype in a file that already defines that linetype. 4 Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued by UCS (page 1072) Save and VPORTS (page 1115) Save if the name you supply already exists.
EXTMAX Stores the upper-right point of the drawing extents. (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world coordinates for the current space. See also: Magnify a View (Zoom) EXTMIN Stores the lower-left point of the drawing extents. (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents.
Initial value:1 0 Uses AutoCAD R14 parameters, which limit names to 31 characters in length. Names can include the letters A to Z, the numerals 0 to 9, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (-). 1 Uses AutoCAD 2000 (and later releases) parameters. Names can be up to 255 characters in length, and can include the letters A to Z, the numerals 0 to 9, spaces, and any special characters not used by the operating system and AutoCAD for Mac for other purposes.
NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness. See also: Create Meshes by Conversion FACETERDEVSURFACE Sets how closely the converted mesh object adheres to the original shape of the solid or surface. Type: Real Saved in: User-settings Initial value:0.001 This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH (page 637) command.
This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH (page 637) command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh (page ?).) Permissible values range from 0 to 100, and set the height/width ratio of the face. Use this variable to prevent long, thin faces that can result from cylindrical object conversions. Smaller values result in more, better-formed faces, but can affect performance.
FACETERMAXGRID Sets the maximum number of U and V grid lines for solids and surfaces converted to mesh. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:4096 This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH (page 637) command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh (page ?).) Permissible values range from 0 to 4096. NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness.
See also: Create Meshes by Conversion FACETERMINUGRID Sets the minimum number of U grid lines for solids and surfaces that are converted to mesh. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:0 This setting affects mesh that is converted from another object using the MESHSMOOTH (page 637) command. (For a complete list of objects that can be converted to mesh, see Objects That Can Be Converted to Mesh (page ?).) Permissible values range from 0 to 1023. Setting 0 (zero) turns off the setting.
Permissible values range from 0 to 1023. Setting 0 (zero) turns off the setting. The value of this system variable cannot exceed the value of FACETERMAXGRID (page 1291)/FACETERMINUGRID (page 1292). NOTE The value of this system variable reflects the value for objects with no smoothness. See also: Create Meshes by Conversion FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE Specifies whether the smoothness settings for objects that are converted to a mesh.
Initial value:1 -1 or any negative number Does not smooth the object after conversion 0 Does not smooth the object after conversion 1 Applies smoothness level 1 after conversion 2 Applies smoothness level 2 after conversion 3 Applies smoothness level 3 after conversion This variable sets the default level of smoothness that is applied to mesh that is created as a result of conversion from another object with the MESHSMOOTH (page 637) command.
Initial value:0 0 Creates an N by 1 mesh for cylindrical and conic solids 1 Creates an N by M mesh for cylindrical and conic solids A setting of 1 increases the density of the mesh to improve the quality of rendered and shaded models. The faceting is visible only in the 2D Wireframe visual style. See also: Create 3D Solid Primitives FACETRES Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects and objects with hidden lines removed. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.
1 Fields are displayed with a gray background See also: Update Fields FIELDEVAL Controls how fields are updated. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:31 The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Not updated 1 Updated on open 2 Updated on save 4 Updated on plot 8 Not used 16 Updated on regeneration NOTE The Date field is updated by UPDATEFIELD (page 1100), but it is not updated automatically based on the setting of the FIELDEVAL system variable.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Does not display dialog boxes. You can still request a file dialog box to appear by entering a tilde (~) in response to the command's prompt. The same is true for AutoLISP and ObjectARX. 1 Displays dialog boxes. However, if a script or AutoLISP/ObjectARX ™ program is active, an ordinary prompt is displayed. See also: Switch Between Dialog Boxes and the Command Line FILLETRAD Stores the current fillet radius for 2D objects.
See also: Fillet a Surface Modify Edges on 3D Objects FILLMODE Specifies whether hatches and fills, 2D solids, and wide polylines are filled in. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Objects are not filled 1 Objects are filled See also: Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text FONTALT Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified font file cannot be located. Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:simplex.
FONTMAP Specifies the font mapping file to be used. Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:acad.fmp A font mapping file contains one font mapping per line; the original font used in the drawing and the font to be substituted for it are separated by a semicolon (;). For example, to substitute the Times TrueType font for the Roman font, the line in the mapping file would read as follows: romanc.shx;times.
2 Displays but does not plot the frame. 3 The individual setting varies for all external references in the current drawing (raster images and clipped xrefs all have different frame settings). See also: Show and Hide Raster Image Boundaries Update Referenced Drawing Attachments FRAMESELECTION Controls whether the frame of a raster image or clipped xref can be selected. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Hidden frames cannot be selected. 1 Hidden frames can be selected.
Initial value:0.0000 The front clipping and front clip not at eye bitcodes in VIEWMODE (page 1487) are on. The FRONTZ value is the last front clipping plane value set current with the DVIEW command. The distance of the front clipping plane from the camera point is found by subtracting FRONTZ from the camera-to-target distance. See also: Create a 3D Dynamic View (DVIEW) FULLPLOTPATH Controls whether the full path of the drawing file is sent to the plot spooler.
1 Geographic marker is visible GFANG Specifies the angle of a gradient fill. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 Valid values range from 0 to less than 360 (degrees). Negative values and values equal to or greater than 360 are accepted, but they are converted to the equivalent value between 0 and 360. See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill GFCLR1 Specifies the color for a one-color gradient fill or the first color for a two-color gradient fill.
GFCLR2 Specifies the second color for a two-color gradient fill.
Initial value:0 0 Two-color gradient fill 1 One-color gradient fill See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill GFNAME Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill.
GFSHIFT Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered or is shifted up and to the left. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Centered 1 Shifted up and to the left See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill GRIDDISPLAY Controls the display behavior and display limits of the grid.
NOTE Setting 4 is ignored unless setting 2 is specified. See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap GRIDMAJOR Controls the frequency of major grid lines compared to minor grid lines. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:5 Valid values range from 1 to 100. Grid lines are displayed in any visual style. See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap GRIDMODE Specifies whether the grid is turned on or off.
GRIDSTYLE Controls the style of grid displayed for 2D model space, Block Editor, 3D parallel projection, 3D perspective projection, and Sheet and Layout tabs. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 The setting is stored as an integer using the sum of the following values: 0 Displays lined grid for 2D model space, Block Editor, 3D parallel projection, 3D perspective projection, and Sheet and Layout. 1 Displays dotted grid for 2D model space. 2 Displays dotted grid for Block Editor.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Assigns a grip only to the insertion point of the block 1 Assigns grips to objects within the block See also: Control Grips in Blocks GRIPCOLOR Controls the color of unselected grips. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:150 The valid range is 1 to 255. See also: Use Object Grips GRIPCONTOUR Controls the color of the grip contour. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:251 The valid range is 1 to 255.
GRIPDYNCOLOR Controls the color of custom grips for dynamic blocks. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:140 The valid range is 1 to 255. See also: Work with Dynamic Blocks in Drawings GRIPHOT Controls the color of selected grips. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:12 The valid range is 1 to 255. See also: Use Object Grips GRIPHOVER Controls the fill color of an unselected grip when the cursor pauses over it.
GRIPMULTIFUNCTIONAL Specifies the access methods for multi-functional grip options.
GRIPS Controls the display of grips on selected objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Hides grips 1 Displays grips 2 Displays additional midpoint grips on polyline segments To adjust the size of the grips and the effective selection area used by the cursor when you snap to a grip, use GRIPSIZE (page 1311). See also: Use Object Grips GRIPSIZE Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:5 The valid range is 1 to 255.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Does not turn grips hot when subobjects are selected. 1 Turns the face, edge, or vertex grips hot when subobjects of 3D objects (solid, surface, or mesh) are selected. 2 Turns the grips hot when subobjects of 2D polyline objects (line or arc segments) are selected.
Choose a Method to Modify Objects GROUPDISPLAYMODE Controls the display and grips on groups, when group selection is on. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Displays grips on all objects in the selected group 1 Displays a single grip at the center of the grouped objects 2 Displays the group bounding box with a single grip at the center Group selection is enabled by setting the PICKSTYLE (page 1394) system variable to 1 or 3.
When deleting the referenced layers, you will be prompted on how to handle layers that contain objects on them. See also: The Layers Palette GROUPSONTOP Controls how layer groups are sorted in the Layers palette.
Initial value:1 0 Gizmos are not displayed automatically when you select objects before starting a command. 1 Gizmos are displayed automatically after you create a selection set. This system variable affects the display of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, and 3D Scale gizmos. Gizmos were previously known as “grip tools.
GTLOCATION Controls the initial location of the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo when you select objects before you start a command in a viewport with a 3D visual style. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Places the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo at the same location as the UCS icon. The gizmo orientation is aligned with the current UCS. 1 Places the 3D Move, 3D Rotate, or 3D Scale gizmo at the geometric center of the selection set.
See also: Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model HANDLES Reports whether object handles can be accessed by applications. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:On Because handles can no longer be turned off, has no effect except to preserve the integrity of scripts. See also: Overview of Command Scripts HELPPREFIX Sets the file path for the Help system.
Hides can be calculated in double precision or single precision. Setting HIDEPRECISION to 1 produces more accurate hides by using double precision, but this setting also uses more memory and can affect performance, especially when hiding solids. 0 Single precision; uses less memory 1 Double precision; uses more memory See also: Shade a Model and Use Edge Effects HIDETEXT Specifies whether text objects created by the TEXT or MTEXT command are processed during a HIDE command.
1 Turns on object selection highlighting See also: Customize Object Selection HPANG Sets the angle for new hatch patterns. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0.0000 See also: Overview of Hatch Patterns and Fills HPANNOTATIVE Controls whether a new hatch pattern is annotative. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Nonannotative 1 Annotative See also: Overview of Scaling Annotations HPASSOC Controls whether hatches and fills are associative.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Hatches and fills are not associated with their defining boundary objects 1 Hatches and fills are associated with their defining boundary objects and are updated when the boundary objects change See also: Specify Hatch and Fill Areas HPBACKGROUNDCOLOR Controls the background color for hatch patterns. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:None Valid values include the following: ■“None” or “.
Initial value:1 0 Creates a region 1 Creates a polyline A polyline or region object is created only if the HPBOUNDRETAIN system variable is turned on. See also: Specify Hatch and Fill Areas HPBOUNDRETAIN Controls whether boundary objects are created for new hatches and fills.
■ByLayer or ByBlock ■AutoCAD Color Index (ACI): integer values from 1 to 255, or a color name from the first seven colors ■True Colors: RGB or HSL values from 000 to 255 in the form "RGB:130,200,240" ■Color Books: Text from standard color books, guides, or sets, for example "DIC COLOR GUIDE(R)$DIC 43" Values other than the “.” (use current) value override the current color (CECOLOR).
Initial value:0 Doubling specifies a second set of lines drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines. 0 Turns off hatch pattern doubling 1 Turns on hatch pattern doubling See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill HPDRAWORDER Controls the draw order of hatches and fills. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:3 Controls whether hatch and fill objects are displayed in front or behind all other objects, or in front or behind their associated boundaries. 0 None.
HPGAPTOL Treats a set of objects that almost enclose an area as a closed hatch boundary. Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value:0.0000 The default value, 0, specifies that the objects enclose the area, with no gaps. Enter a value, in drawing units, from 0 to 5000 to set the maximum size of gaps that can be ignored when the objects serve as a hatch boundary.
Initial value:1 0 Normal. Hatches islands within islands. 1 Outer. Hatches only areas outside of islands. 2 Ignore. Hatches everything within the boundaries. An island is an enclosed area within the area to be hatched. See also: Specify Hatch and Fill Areas HPISLANDDETECTIONMODE Controls whether internal closed boundaries, called islands, are detected. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Off . 1 On (recommended). Hatches or ignores islands according to HPISLANDDETECTION.
Values other than the “.” (use current) value override the current layer (CELAYER). See also: Set Property Overrides for Hatches and Fills HPMAXAREAS Sets the maximum number of enclosed areas that a single hatch object can have and still automatically switch between solid and pattern hatches during zoom operations. Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value:100 Valid values are from 0 to10,000,000.
Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:ANSI31 (imperial) or ANGLE (metric) Valid names can contain up to 34 characters without spaces. The value "" indicates that there is no default. Enter a period (.) to reset HPNAME to the default value. See also: Choose a Hatch Pattern or Fill HPOBJWARNING Sets the number of hatch boundary objects that can be selected before displaying a warning message.
HPORIGINMODE Controls how the default hatch origin point is determined.
See also: Specify Hatch and Fill Areas HPQUICKPREVTIMEOUT Sets the maximum time for a hatch preview to generate before the preview is automatically cancelled. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 If the specified duration is reached, and the preview is not complete, the preview is cancelled, but the command remains active. The duration is measured in seconds. Valid values range from 1 to 300.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 A single hatch object is created 1 Separate hatch objects are created See also: Specify Hatch and Fill Areas HPSPACE Sets the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined patterns. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1.0000 See also: Control the Scale of Hatch Patterns HPTRANSPARENCY Sets the default transparency for new hatches and fills. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:use current Valid values include “use current” (or “.
I System Variables ICONSIZE Controls the size of the icons displayed on the Tool Sets palette and status bar. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:16 Valid values are from 16 to 32. See also: The Tool Sets Palette The Status Bar IMAGEFRAME Controls whether image frames are displayed and plotted. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 The FRAME (page 1299) system variable overrides the IMAGEFRAME setting.
IMAGEHLT Controls whether the entire raster image or only the raster image frame is highlighted. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Highlights only the raster image frame 1 Highlights the entire raster image See also: Improve the Display Speed of Raster Images IMPLIEDFACE Controls the detection of implied faces. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Implied faces cannot be detected. 1 Implied faces can be detected.
INDEXCTL Controls whether layer and spatial indexes are created and saved in drawing files.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:15 The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 No history of recent input is displayed. 1 History of recent input is displayed at the command line or in a dynamic prompt tooltip. Access with the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys at the Command prompt, or at an input prompt. 2 History of recent input for the current command is displayed in the shortcut menu under Recent Input.
INSNAME Sets a default block name for the INSERT command. Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" The name must conform to symbol naming conventions. Returns "" if no default is set. Enter a period (.) to set no default. See also: Insert Blocks INSUNITS Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of blocks, images, or xrefs when inserted or attached to a drawing.
7 Kilometers 8 Microinches 9 Mils 10 Yards 11 Angstroms 12 Nanometers 13 Microns 14 Decimeters 15 Dekameters 16 Hectometers 17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units 19 Light Years 20 Parsecs See also: Insert Blocks INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Sets source content units value when INSUNITS is set to 0.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 Valid range is 0 to 20.
17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units 19 Light Years 20 Parsecs See also: Insert Blocks INSUNITSDEFTARGET Sets target drawing units value when INSUNITS is set to 0. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 Valid range is 0 to 20.
8 Microinches 9 Mils 10 Yards 11 Angstroms 12 Nanometers 13 Microns 14 Decimeters 15 Dekameters 16 Hectometers 17 Gigameters 18 Astronomical Units 19 Light Years 20 Parsecs See also: Insert Blocks INTELLIGENTUPDATE Controls the graphics refresh rate.
The default value is 20 frames per second. If you encounter problems related to graphics generation or timing, turn off the variable by setting it to 0. INTELLIGENTUPDATE works by suppressing the graphics update until the timer expires. Subsequent updates reset the timer. The performance improvement significantly affects updates for scripts and AutoLISP graphics. Those using regular AutoCAD commands will not see a noticeable difference in performance.
The visual style specified for INTERFEREOBJVS cannot be removed with the PURGE (page 849) command. See also: Check 3D Models for Interferences INTERFEREVPVS Specifies the visual style for the viewport during interference checking. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Wireframe INTERFEREVPVS can only be set to a visual style that is saved in the drawing. The visual style specified for INTERFEREVPVS cannot be removed with the PURGE (page 849) command.
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY Controls the display of polylines at the intersection of 3D surfaces when the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. Type: Switch Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Off Off Turns off the display of intersection polylines On Turns on the display of intersection polylines See also: Control the Display of Edges ISAVEBAK Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for large drawings.
ISAVEPERCENT Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing file. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:50 The value of ISAVEPERCENT is an integer between 0 and 100. The default value of 50 means that the estimate of wasted space within the file does not exceed 50 percent of the total file size. Wasted space is eliminated by periodic full saves. When the estimate exceeds 50 percent, the next save will be a full save. This resets the wasted space estimate to 0.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Use legacy object size limits from AutoCAD 2009 and prior 1 Use AutoCAD 2010 object size limits See also: Save a Drawing LASTANGLE Stores the end angle of the last arc entered relative to the XY plane of the current UCS for the current space. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0.0000 See also: Draw Arcs LASTPOINT Stores the last point specified, expressed as UCS coordinates for the current space.
LASTPROMPT Stores the last string echoed to the Command prompt. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" This string is identical to the last line seen at the Command prompt and includes any user input. See also: Enter Commands on the Command Line LATITUDE Specifies the latitude of the drawing model in decimal format. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:37.7950 The default is the latitude of San Francisco, California. The valid range is -90 to +90.
The setting is stored in an integer using one of the following values: 0 Off 1 Detects when new xref layers have been added in the drawing 2 Detects when new layers have been added in the drawing and xrefs NOTE LAYEREVALCTL (page 1346) overrides the LAYEREVAL and LAYERNOTIFY (page 1347) setvars when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. It acts like a global off (but not a global on). There is no effect even if LAYEREVALCTL is turned on if LAYERNOTIFY = 0 or LAYEREVAL = 0.
NOTE LAYEREVALCTL overrides the LAYEREVAL (page 1345) and LAYERNOTIFY (page 1347) setvars when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. It acts like a global off (but not a global on). There is no effect even if LAYEREVALCTL is turned on if LAYERNOTIFY = 0 or LAYEREVAL = 0. LAYEREVALCTL must be set to 1 for LAYERNOTIFY and LAYEREVAL to function correctly. See also: LAYEREVAL (page 1345) LAYERNOTIFY (page 1347) LAYERMANAGERSTATE Indicates whether the Layers palette is open or closed.
1 Plot 2 Open 4 Load/Reload/Attach for xrefs 8 Restore layer state 16 Save 32 Insert NOTE LAYEREVALCTL (page 1346) overrides the LAYEREVAL (page 1345) and LAYERNOTIFY setvars when LAYEREVALCTL = 0. It acts like a global off (but not a global on). There is no effect even if LAYEREVALCTL is turned on if LAYERNOTIFY = 0 or LAYEREVAL = 0. LAYEREVALCTL must be set to 1 for LAYERNOTIFY and LAYEREVAL to function correctly.
The range for controlling the fading for objects on locked layers is from -90 to 90. 0 Locked layers are not faded >0 When the value is positive, controls the percent of fading up to 90 percent <0 When the value is negative, locked layers are not faded, but the value is saved for switching to that value by changing the sign NOTE The fading value is limited to 90 percent to avoid confusion with layers that are turned off or frozen.
1 A single layout viewport is created with each new layout. See also: Work on a Named Layout LAYOUTREGENCTL Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model layout and named layouts. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 For each layout, the display list is updated either by regenerating the drawing when you switch to that layout or by saving the display list to memory and regenerating only the modified objects when you switch to that layout.
If LAYOUTREGENCTL is set to 1 or 2 and performance seems slow in general or when you switch between layouts for which the display list is saved, consider changing to a setting of 0 or 1 to find the optimal balance for your work environment. Regardless of the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting, if you redefine a block or undo a layout switch, the drawing is regenerated the first time you switch to any layout that contains saved viewports.
LENSLENGTH Stores the length of the lens (in millimeters) used in perspective viewing. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:50.0000 See also: Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW) LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY Turns on and off the display of light glyphs. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 When this system variable is set to Off, the glyphs that represent lights in the drawing are not displayed. A light glyph is a symbolic representation of a point lights and spotlights.
When this system variable is set to 1 or 2, photometric lighting is enabled; otherwise standard (generic) lighting is used. 0 No lighting units are used and standard (generic) lighting is enabled. 1 American lighting units (foot-candles) are used and photometric lighting is enabled. 2 International lighting units (lux) are used and photometric lighting is enabled. See also: Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow LIGHTSINBLOCKS Controls whether lights contained in blocks are used when rendering.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Objects can be created outside the limits 1 Objects cannot be created outside the limits See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap LIMMAX Stores the upper-right grid limits for the current space, expressed as world coordinates. Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:12.0000,9.0000 (imperial) or 420.0000,297.0000 (metric) LIMMAX is read-only when paper space is active and the paper background or printable area is displayed.
LINEARBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness level of the viewport when using default lighting or generic lights. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Controls the brightness level of the viewport when standard lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS system variable is set to 0). Valid settings are integers from -10 to 10. The brightness level in photometric lighting can be controlled by the LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS systems variable.
Initial value:Varies by country/region This code appears as a three-letter abbreviation returned by the operating system. See also: Specify Search Paths and File Locations Organize Program and Support Files LOCALROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where local customizable files were installed.
LOFTANG2 Sets the draft angle through the last cross section in a loft operation. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:90 The 0 direction is measured outward from the curve on the plane of the curve. The positive direction is measured toward the previous cross section. Valid values include 0 to less than 360. See also: Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting LOFTMAG1 Sets the magnitude of the draft angle through the first cross section in a loft operation. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.
See also: Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting LOFTNORMALS Controls the normals of a lofted object where it passes through cross sections. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 This setting is ignored when specifying a path or guide curves.
The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 1 No twist (minimizes the twist between cross sections) 2 Align direction (aligns the start to end direction of each cross section curve) 4 Simplify (produces simple solids and surfaces, such as a cylinder or plane, instead of spline solids and surfaces) 8 Close (closes the surface or solid between the first and the last cross sections) See also: Create a Solid or Surface by Lofting LOGEXPBRIGHTNESS Controls the brightness le
Controls the contrast level of the viewport when photometric lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS (page 1352) system variable is set to 1 or 2). Valid range is from 0.0 to 100.0. The contrast level in standard lighting can be controlled by the LINEARCONTRAST (page 1355) systems variable. See also: Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow LOGEXPDAYLIGHT Controls if the exterior daylight flag is enabled when using photometric lighting.
Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0 Controls the mid tones level of the viewport when photometric lighting is enabled (LIGHTINGUNITS (page 1352) system variable is set to 1 or 2). Valid range from 0.01 to 20.0. See also: Standard and Photometric Lighting Workflow LOGEXPPHYSICALSCALE Controls the relative brightness of self-illuminated materials in a photometric environment. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1500.
See also: Set Interface Options LOGFILENAME Specifies the path and name of the command history log file for the current drawing. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies The initial value varies depending on the name of the current drawing and the installation folder. See also: Set Interface Options LOGFILEPATH Specifies the path for the command history log files for all drawings in a session.
Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies See also: Open a Drawing LONGITUDE Specifies the longitude of the drawing model in decimal format. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-122.3940 The default is the longitude of San Francisco, California. The valid range is -180 to +180. Positive values represent east longitudes. This value is affected by the settings of the LUPREC system variable. This value is not affected by the settings of the AUNITS and AUPREC system variables.
LUNITS Sets linear units. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:2 1 Scientific 2 Decimal 3 Engineering 4 Architectural 5 Fractional See also: Set the Unit Format Conventions LUPREC Sets the display precision for linear units and coordinates. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:4 However, the internal precision of distance, area, and volume values, and linear coordinates is always maintained, regardless of the display precision.
LWDEFAULT Sets the value for the default lineweight. Type: Enum Saved in: Registry Initial value:25 The default lineweight can be set to any valid lineweight value in hundredths of millimeters, including: 0, 5, 9, 13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, and 211. All values must be entered in hundredths of millimeters. (Multiply a value by 2540 to convert values from inches to hundredths of millimeters.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Inches 1 Millimeters See also: Display Lineweights M System Variables MATBROWSERSTATE Indicates whether the Materials Browser is open or closed. Type: Switch Saved in: User-settings Initial value:0 0 Materials Browser is closed. 1 Materials Browser is open. See also: Browse Material Library MAXACTVP Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be active at one time in a layout.
MAXACTVP has no effect on the number of viewports that are plotted. See also: Turn Layout Viewports On or Off MAXSORT Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block names sorted by listing commands. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1000 If the total number of items exceeds this value, no items are sorted. The value of MAXSORT is an integer between 0 and 32767. See also: Create and Use Blocks (Symbols) MBUTTONPAN Controls the behavior of the middle button or wheel on the pointing device.
MEASUREINIT Controls whether a drawing you start from scratch uses imperial or metric default settings. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:Varies by country/region Specifically, MEASUREINIT controls which hatch pattern and linetype files are used. The Drawing1.dwg that opens when you start the program is a drawing that is started from scratch.
MENUECHO Sets menu echo and prompt control bits. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 The value is the sum of the following: 1 Suppresses echo of menu items (^P in a menu item toggles echoing) 2 Suppresses display of system prompts during menu 4 Disables ^P toggle of menu echoing 8 Displays input/output strings; debugging aid for DIESEL macros See also: Create Macros MENUNAME Stores the customization file name, including the path for the file name.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Creates legacy polygon or polyface mesh when you use REVSURF (page 905), TABSURF (page 1039), RULESURF (page 912), or EDGESURF (page 399) 1 Creates full-featured mesh objects when you use REVSURF, TABSURF, RULESURF, or EDGESURF (recommended) This option does not affect mesh created using the 3DMESH (page 35) and PFACE (page 781) commands. See also: Create Meshes from Other Objects MIRRHATCH Controls how MIRROR reflects hatch patterns.
Initial value:0 0 Retains text direction 1 Mirrors the text See also: Mirror Objects MLEADERSCALE Sets the overall scale factor applied to multileader objects. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0000 Use DIMSCALE (page 1239) to scale leader objects created with the LEADER (page 567) command. 0.0 A reasonable default value is computed based on the scaling between the current model space viewport and paper space.
MSLTSCALE Scales linetypes displayed on the model tab by the annotation scale. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Linetypes displayed on the Model tab are not scaled by the annotation scale 1 Linetypes displayed on the Model tab are scaled by the annotation scale NOTE MSLTSCALE is set to 0 when you open drawings created in AutoCAD 2007 and earlier. See also: Display Annotative Objects MTEXTCOLUMN Sets the default column setting for an mtext object.
MTEXTFIXED Sets the display size and orientation of multiline text in the In-Place Text Editor. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 Changes to this system variable affect the Always Display as WYSIWYG setting of the In-Place Text Editor. 0 or 1 Zooms the drawing to the extents of the multiline text object's bounding box when the text in the In-Place Text Editor is difficult to read (very small or large, or is rotated).
The text string is displayed in the current text size and font. You can enter any string of up to ten letters or numbers or enter a period (.) to display no sample text. See also: Overview of Multiline Text MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX Stores the full path to the Documents folder for the user currently logged on.
See also: Use ViewCube Tool NAVVCUBELOCATION Identifies the corner in a viewport where the ViewCube tool is displayed. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Upper-right 1 Upper-left 2 Lower-left 3 Lower-right See also: Use ViewCube Tool NAVVCUBEOPACITY Controls the opacity of the ViewCube tool when inactive. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:50 Valid values are from 0 to 100 percent.
See also: Use ViewCube Tool NAVVCUBEORIENT Controls whether the ViewCube tool reflects the current UCS or WCS. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 ViewCube tool is oriented to reflect WCS 1 ViewCube tool is oriented to reflect the current UCS See also: Use ViewCube Tool NAVVCUBESIZE Specifies the size of the ViewCube tool.
See also: Use ViewCube Tool NOMUTT Suppresses the message display (muttering) when it wouldn't normally be suppressed. Type: Short Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 Displaying messages is the normal mode, but message display is suppressed during scripts, AutoLISP routines, and so on. 0 Resumes normal muttering behavior 1 Suppresses muttering indefinitely See also: Set Interface Options NORTHDIRECTION Specifies the angle of the sun from north. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.
See also: Guidelines for Lighting O System Variables OBJECTISOLATIONMODE Controls whether hidden objects remain hidden between drawing sessions. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:0 OJBECTISOLATIONMODE controls whether objects that are hidden using the ISOLATEOBJECTS (page 532) or HIDEOBJECTS (page 507) command remain hidden after saving and reopening the drawing.
The OBSCUREDCOLOR setting is visible only if the OBSCUREDLTYPE (page 1379) system variable is turned on by setting it to a value other than 0. See also: Control the Display of Edges OBSCUREDLTYPE Specifies the linetype of obscured lines. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 An obscured line is a hidden line made visible by changing its color and linetype. OBSCUREDLTYPE is available only in 2D views. In 3D views, the VSOBSCUREDLTYPE (page 1512) system variable is used.
7 Double Short Dash 8 Double Medium Dash 9 Double Long Dash 10 Medium Long Dash 11 Sparse Dot See also: Control the Display of Edges OFFSETDIST Sets the default offset distance. Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:-1.
OFFSETGAPTYPE Controls how potential gaps between segments are treated when polylines are offset. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Extends line segments to their projected intersections. 1 Fillets line segments at their projected intersections. The radius of each arc segment is equal to the offset distance. 2 Chamfers line segments at their projected intersections.
ORTHOMODE Constrains cursor movement to the perpendicular.
32 INTersection 64 INSertion 128 PERpendicular 256 TANgent 512 NEArest 1024 Clears all object snaps 2048 APParent Intersection 4096 EXTension 8192 PARallel To specify more than one object snap, enter the sum of their values. For example, entering 3 specifies the Endpoint (bitcode 1) and Midpoint (bitcode 2) object snaps. Entering 16383 specifies all object snaps.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Running object snap settings override keyboard coordinate entry 1 Keyboard entry overrides object snap settings 2 Keyboard entry overrides object snap settings except in scripts See also: Set Visual Aids for Object Snaps (AutoSnap) OSNAPNODELEGACY Controls whether the Node object snap can be used to snap to multiline text objects.
Initial value:0 0 Osnap uses the Z-value of the specified point 1 Osnap substitutes the Z-value of the specified point with the elevation (ELEV (page 401)) set for the current UCS See also: Use Object Snaps OSOPTIONS Automatically suppresses object snaps on hatch objects and geometry with negative Z values when using a dynamic UCS.
P System Variables PALETTEICONSTATE Indicates whether palettes are in icon state. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Palettes are expanded, not as icons 1 Palettes are collapsed as icons and displayed along the left side of the screen 2 Palettes are collapsed as icons and displayed along the right side of the screen See also: Specify the Behavior of Palettes PAPERSPACEVISOR Controls the display of the Layout visor when switching to a named layout.
PAPERUPDATE Controls the display of a warning dialog box when attempting to print a layout with a paper size different from the paper size specified by the default for the plotter configuration file.
The PARAMETERCOPYMODE system variable provides several options for handling these situations. 0 Do not copy any dimensional constraints or constraint parameters. Constraints are removed from copied objects. 1 Copy dimensional constraints and constraint parameters. Always replace expressions with numerical constants. Rename dimensional parameters if there is a naming conflict. 2 Copy dimensional constraints, constraint parameters, and user parameters.
Initial value:0 For information about values to enter, see the POINT (page 815) command. See also: Divide an Object into Equal Segments PDSIZE Sets the display size for point objects. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 0 Creates a point at 5 percent of the drawing area height >0 Specifies an absolute size <0 Specifies a percentage of the viewport size See also: Divide an Object into Equal Segments PEDITACCEPT Suppresses display of the Object Selected Is Not a Polyline prompt in PEDIT.
See also: Modify Polylines PELLIPSE Controls the ellipse type created with ELLIPSE. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Creates a true ellipse object. 1 Creates a polyline representation of an ellipse See also: Draw Ellipses PERIMETER Stores the last perimeter value computed by the AREA or LIST command. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0.
1 Perspective view turned on Perspective views are available only in model space, and only with 3D visual styles. NOTE PERSPECTIVE is set to 0 when the drawing file or DXF file is saved to a file format earlier than AutoCAD 2007. See also: Define a Perspective Projection (DVIEW) PERSPECTIVECLIP Determines the location of eyepoint clipping. Type: Real Saved in: Registry Initial value:5.0000 The value determines where the eye point clipping occurs as a percentage. Values can range between 0.01 and 10.0.
This system variable affects only legacy polyface meshes such as those created by PFACE (page 781). See also: Create Custom Mesh (Legacy) PICKADD Controls whether subsequent selections replace the current selection set or add to it. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:2 0 Turns off PICKADD. The objects and subobjects most recently selected become the selection set. Previously selected objects and subobjects are removed from the selection set.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Window selection is disabled. 1 Selects a clicked object or begins a selection window (for either a window or crossing selection) when the cursor is not on an object. 2 Selects a clicked object or begins a selection window whether the cursor is on an object or not. For PICKAUTO settings 0 and 1, object selection occurs when the mouse button is pressed. For PICKAUTO setting 2, object selection occurs when the mouse button is released.
Initial value:2 0 Create a selection window using two points. Click once to begin a selection window, click again to complete the selection. 1 Create a selection window clicking and dragging. Release the mouse button to complete the selection. 2 Create a selection window using either of the methods above. See also: Select Multiple Objects PICKFIRST Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb selection) or after you issue a command.
Initial value:1 0 No group selection or associative hatch selection 1 Group selection 2 Associative hatch selection 3 Group selection and associative hatch selection See also: Select Objects in Groups PLATFORM Indicates which platform is in use. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies See also: Set Interface Options PLINECONVERTMODE Specifies the fit method used in converting splines to polylines.
See also: Modify Splines PLINEGEN Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices of a 2D polyline. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Does not apply to polylines with tapered segments. 0 Generates polylines to start and end with a dash at each vertex 1 Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern around the vertices of the polyline See also: Display Linetypes on Short Segments and Polylines PLINETYPE Specifies whether optimized 2D polylines are used.
2 Polylines in AutoCAD Release 14 or older drawings are converted when opened; PLINE creates optimized polylines For more information on the two formats, see the CONVERT (page 220) command. PLINETYPE also controls the polyline type created with the following commands: BOUNDARY (page 149) (when object type is set to Polyline), DONUT (page 358), PEDIT (page 767) (when selecting a line or arc), POLYGON (page 821), and SKETCH (page 945) (when SKPOLY (page 1436) is set to 1).
See also: Adjust the Plot Offset of a Layout PLOTROTMODE Controls the orientation of plots. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Rotates the effective plotting area so the corner with the Rotation icon aligns with the paper at the lower left for 0, top left for 90, top right for 180, and lower right for 270. X and Y origin offsets are calculated relative to the lower-left corner. 1 Aligns the lower-left corner of the effective plotting area with the lower-left corner of the paper.
2 Plots object transparency Setting the PLOTTRANSPARENCYOVERRIDE system variable to 0 or 2 overrides the Print Transparency option in the Page Setup dialog box. WARNING Because this system variable can affect global plot performance, it is strongly advised that you leave the value set to 1 and manage plot transparency when plotting. See also: Work with Object Properties PLQUIET Controls the display of optional plot-related dialog boxes and nonfatal errors for scripts.
You can add up to 10 angles. Each angle can be separated with semicolons (;). The AUNITS system variable sets the format for display of angles.Unlike POLARANG, POLARADDANG angles do not result in multiples of their values. The bit value for the POLARMODE system variable must have 4 turned on for POLARADDANG to have an effect. When using fractions of an angle, set the AUPREC system variable (angular precision) to a higher value. Otherwise, the POLARADDANG value will be rounded off.
POLARMODE Controls settings for polar and object snap tracking.
POLYSIDES Sets the default number of sides for the POLYGON command. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:4 The range is 3 to 1024. See also: Draw Rectangles and Polygons POPUPS Displays the status of the currently configured display driver.
See also: Create Surfaces from Other Surfaces PREVIEWEFFECT Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Dashed lines (the default display for selected objects) 1 Thickened lines 2 Dashed and thickened lines See also: Customize Object Selection PREVIEWFACEEFFECT Specifies the visual effect used for previewing selection of face subobjects.
PREVIEWFILTER Excludes specified object types from selection previewing. Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value:7 The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Excludes nothing 1 Excludes objects on locked layers 2 Excludes objects in xrefs 4 Excludes tables 8 Excludes multiline text objects 16 Excludes hatch objects 32 Excludes objects in groups See also: Customize Object Selection PREVIEWTYPE Controls the view to use for the drawing thumbnail.
See also: Save a Drawing PRODUCT Returns the product name. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"AutoCAD" See also: Set Interface Options PROGRAM Returns the program name. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"acad" See also: Set Interface Options PROJECTNAME Assigns a project name to the current drawing. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:"" Used when an xref or image file is not found in its original path.
Project names make it easier for users to manage xrefs and images when drawings are exchanged between customers, or if users have different drive mappings to the same location on a server. If the xref or image file is not found at the original path, the project paths associated with the project name are searched. If the xref or image file is not found there, the folders defined under Support File Search Path in the Application Preferences dialog box are searched.
1 Saves image with the drawing See also: Work with Custom and Proxy Objects PROXYNOTICE Displays a notice when a proxy is created. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 A proxy is created when you open a drawing containing custom objects created by an application that is not present. A proxy is also created when you issue a command that unloads a custom object's parent application.
Graphic images are not displayed for all proxy objects See also: Work with Custom and Proxy Objects PROXYWEBSEARCH Specifies how the program checks for object enablers. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 Object enablers allow you to display and use custom objects in drawings even when the ObjectARX application that created them is unavailable.
linetype, the dash lengths of a line in a viewport are the same as the dash lengths of a line in paper space. You can still control the dash lengths with LTSCALE When you change PSLTSCALE or use a command such as ZOOM (page 1153) with PSLTSCALE set to 1, objects in viewports are not automatically regenerated with the new linetype scale. Use the REGEN (page 877) or REGENALL (page 877) command to update the linetype scales in each viewport.
See also: Create a 3D Solid from a Polyline PSTYLEMODE Indicates whether the current drawing is in a Color-Dependent or Named Plot Style mode.
See also: Overview of Plot Styles PSVPSCALE Sets the view scale factor for all newly created viewports. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 The view scale factor is defined by comparing the ratio of units in paper space to the units in newly created model space viewports. The view scale factor you set is used with the VPORTS command. A value of 0 means the scale factor is Scaled to Fit. A scale must be a positive real value.
Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Turns off Quick Text mode; displays characters 1 Turns on Quick Text mode; displays a box in place of text See also: Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights, and Text R System Variables RASTERDPI Controls paper size and plot scaling when changing from dimensional to dimensionless output devices, or vice versa. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:300 Converts millimeters or inches to pixels, or vice versa.
See also: Plot Files to Other Formats RASTERPREVIEW Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the drawing. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 No preview image is created 1 Preview image created See also: Save a Drawing RASTERTHRESHOLD Specifies a raster threshold in megabytes. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:20 If the plotted raster image exceeds this threshold, the availability of system memory is checked.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:6 Valid values are from 2 to 32767. See also: CVREBUILD (page 243) Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves REBUILD2DDEGREE Sets the global degree when rebuilding a spline. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:3 Valid values are 1 to 11. A curve with a degree of 1 is a straight line and a curve with a degree of 2 has one bend. A Bezier curve has a degree of 3. Higher degrees create more complex curves, but require computations.
Type: Switch Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Retains original curve 1 Deletes original curve See also: CVREBUILD (page 243) Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves REBUILDDEGREEU Sets the degree in the U direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:3 Valid values are 2to 11. See also: CVREBUILD (page 243) Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves REBUILDDEGREEV Sets the degree in the V direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface.
REBUILDOPTIONS Controls deletion and trimming options when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 Value When you use CVREBUILD: 0 The original surface is not deleted and trimmed areas are not applied to the rebuilt object. 1 The original surface is deleted and trimmed areas are not applied to the rebuilt object. 2 The original surface is not deleted and trimmed areas are applied to the rebuilt object.
See also: CVREBUILD (page 243) Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves REBUILDV Sets the number of grid lines in the V direction when rebuilding a NURBS surface. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:6 Valid values are 2 to 32767 to increase or decrease the number of grid lines in the V direction used to rebuild the NURBS surface. See also: CVREBUILD (page 243) Rebuild NURBS Surfaces and Curves RECOVERAUTO Controls the display of recovery notifications before or after opening a damaged drawing file.
2 Automatically recovers the damaged files and opens the drawing without displaying any task dialog. The information of the recovered files is displayed at the command prompt. See also: Repair a Damaged Drawing File REFEDITNAME Displays the name of the reference being edited. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" See also: Edit Selected Objects in Referenced Drawings and Blocks REGENMODE Controls automatic regeneration of the drawing.
RE-INIT Reinitializes the acad.pgp file. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 1 Not used 2 Not used 4 Not used 8 Not used 16 PGP file reinitialization (reload) See also: Digitizing Tablets REMEMBERFOLDERS Controls the default path displayed in standard file selection dialog boxes. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Restores the behavior of AutoCAD 2000 and previous releases.
See also: Open a Drawing RENDERUSERLIGHTS Controls whether to override the setting for viewport lighting during rendering. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 Provides a way of overriding the DEFAULTLIGHTING (page 1211) system variable for rendering while retaining the setting for working in a viewport. 0 The current lights in the viewport are used in the rendered scene, either default lights or user lights, as specified by the DEFAULTLIGHTING system variable.
See also: Recover from a System Failure ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX Stores the full path to the root folder where roamable customizable files were installed. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:Varies If you are working on a network that supports roaming, when you customize files that are in your roaming profile they are available to you regardless of which machine you are currently using.
S System Variables SAVEFIDELITY Controls whether the drawing is saved with visual fidelity. Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Saved without visual fidelity. 1 Annotation objects assigned annotative scales are saved to separate layers for each scale used. Only affects drawings when saving to AutoCAD 2007 or earlier file formats.
SAVEFILEPATH Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save files for the current session. Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:Varies You can also change the path in the Application Preferences dialog box. See also: Set Up the Drawing Area SAVENAME Displays the file name and directory path of the most recently saved drawing. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" See also: Obtain General Drawing Information SAVETIME Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes.
The SAVETIME timer starts as soon as you make a change to a drawing. It is reset and restarted by a manual QSAVE (page 860), SAVE (page 914), or SAVEAS (page 914). The current drawing is saved to the path specified by the SAVEFILEPATH (page 1423) system variable. The file name is stored in the SAVEFILE (page 1422) system variable. See also: Set Up the Drawing Area SCREENSIZE Stores current viewport size in pixels (X and Y).
SELECTIONAREA Controls the display of effects for selection areas. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 Selection areas are created by the Window, Crossing, WPolygon, and CPolygon options of SELECT (page 937). 0 Off 1 On See also: Customize Object Selection SELECTIONAREAOPACITY Controls the transparency of the selection area during window and crossing selection. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:25 The valid range is 0 to 100.
Initial value:0 0 Off 1 On See also: Select Objects Individually Use 3D Subobject Grips Modify 3D Subobjects SELECTIONPREVIEW Controls the display of selection previewing. Type: Bitcode Saved in: Registry Initial value:3 Objects are highlighted when the pickbox cursor rolls over them. This selection previewing indicates that the object would be selected if you clicked.
Type: Bitcode Saved in: User-settings Initial value:130 The default value is 130. Objects of the same type are considered similar if they are on the same layer, and, for referenced objects, have the same name.
1 Faces shaded, edges drawn in background color 2 Faces not filled, edges in object color 3 Faces in object color, edges in background color See also: Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model SHADEDIF Sets the ratio of diffuse reflective light to ambient light. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:70 The ratio is a percentage of diffuse reflective light when SHADEDGE (page 1427) is set to 0 or 1.
SHORTCUTMENU Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus are available in the drawing area. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:11 The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Disables all Default, Edit, and Command mode shortcut menus, restoring AutoCAD Release 14 behavior. 1 Enables Default mode shortcut menus. 2 Enables Edit mode shortcut menus. 4 Enables Command mode shortcut menus whenever a command is active.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:250 The value is expressed in milliseconds, and the valid range is 100 to 10,000. If the right button is held down for the same or longer duration than the value of this system variable, a shortcut menu is displayed. If the right button is held down for a shorter duration, the result is the same as if you press the Enter or Return key.
Initial value:0 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed See also: The Layers Palette SHOWGROUPS Controls the visibility of layer groups in the Layers list of the Layers palette. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed See also: The Layers Palette SHOWHIST Controls the Show History property for solids in a drawing. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Sets the Show History property to No (read-only) for all solids.
1 Does not override the individual Show History property settings for solids. 2 Displays the history of all solids by overriding the individual Show History property settings for solids. You can view the original objects that were used to create the solid. See also: Display Original Forms of Composite Solids SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS Specifies whether the Page Setup Manager is displayed when a new layout is created.
Initial value:1 0 Indicates that there are palettes hidden by the HIDEPALETTES command 1 Indicates that all palettes hidden by the HIDEPALETTES command were restored by the SHOWPALETTES command See also: Control the Drawing Area Interface SHOWUNRECONCILEDLAYERSGROUP Controls the visibility of the dynamic Unreconciled Layers layer group in the Layers palette.
1 Displayed See also: The Layers Palette SHOWXREFGROUPS Controls the visibility of layer groups that are saved in an attached external reference (xref) in the Layers palette. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed See also: The Layers Palette SHOWXREFLAYERS Controls the visibility of layers saved in an attached external reference (xref) in the Layers palette.
SHPNAME Sets a default shape name that must conform to symbol- naming conventions. Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" If no default is set, it returns "". Enter a period (.) to set no default. See also: Shape Descriptions SIGWARN Controls whether a warning is presented when a file with an attached digital signature is opened. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 If the system variable is on and you open a file with a valid signature, the digital signature status is displayed.
SKPOLY Determines whether the SKETCH command generates lines, polylines, or splines. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Generates lines 1 Generates polylines 2 Generates splines See also: Draw Freehand Sketches SKTOLERANCE Determines how closely the spline fits to the freehand sketch. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.5 Valid values are between 0 and 1. See also: Draw Freehand Sketches SKYSTATUS Determines if the sky illumination is computed at render time.
This has no impact on the viewport illumination or the background. It only makes the sky available as a gathered light source for rendering. 0 Sky off 1 Sky background 2 Sky background and illumination See also: Sun and Sky Simulation SMOOTHMESHCONVERT Sets whether mesh objects that you convert to 3D solids or surfaces are smoothed or faceted, and whether their faces are merged. Type: Bitcode Saved in: User-settings Initial value:0 0 Creates a smooth model. Coplanar faces are optimized, or merged.
SMOOTHMESHGRID Sets the maximum level of smoothness at which the underlying mesh facet grid is displayed on 3D mesh objects.
The initial value of this system variable is adjusted for best performance based on your system configuration. Permissible values are from 108 to 16,000,000. Use this limit to prevent creating extremely dense meshes that might affect program performance. See also: Change Mesh Smoothness Levels SMOOTHMESHMAXLEV Sets the maximum smoothness level for mesh objects. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:4 Permissible values are from 1 to 255. The recommended range is 1-5.
SNAPBASE Sets the snap and grid origin point for the current viewport relative to the current UCS. Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000,0.0000 See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap SNAPISOPAIR Controls the isometric plane for the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Left 1 Top 2 Right See also: Set Isometric Grid and Snap SNAPMODE Turns the Snap mode on and off.
1 Snap on for the current viewport See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap SNAPSTYL Sets the snap style for the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Standard (rectangular snap) 1 Isometric snap See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap SNAPTYPE Sets the type of snap for the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Grid, or standard snap. 1 PolarSnap. Snaps along polar angle increments. Use PolarSnap with polar and object snap tracking.
SNAPUNIT Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport. Type: 2D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.5000,0.5000 (imperial) or 10.0000,10.0000 (metric) If SNAPSTYL is set to 1, the X value of SNAPUNIT is adjusted automatically to accommodate the isometric snap. Changes to this system variable are not reflected in the grid until the display is refreshed. See also: Adjust Grid and Grid Snap SOLIDCHECK Turns 3D solid validation on and off for the current session.
When set to 1, all subsequently created composite solids retain a history of the original component objects. These component objects can be accessed to modify the solids 0 Sets the History property to None for new solids. No history is retained. 1 Sets the History property to Record for new solids. Solids retain a history of their original objects. See also: Display Original Forms of Composite Solids SORTENTS Controls object sorting in support of draw order for several operations.
See also: Control How Overlapping Objects Are Displayed SPACEPAN Controls whether pressing and holding the Spacebar starts the PAN command transparently. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 PAN command does not start transparently when the Spacebar is held. 1 PAN command starts transparently after the Spacebar is held for the duration specified in the SPACEPANTIMEOUT system variable.
SPLDEGREE Stores the last-used degree setting for splines and sets the default degree setting for the SPLINE command when specifying control vertices. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:3 Enter a value from 1 to 5. NOTE SPLDEGREE defaults to 3 when AutoCAD for Mac starts. See also: Modify Polylines SPLFRAME Controls the display of helixes and smoothed mesh objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 1 â– Does not display the control polygon for helixes.
See also: Overview of Creating Meshes SPLINESEGS Sets the number of line segments to be generated for each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of the PEDIT command. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:8 Enter a non-zero integer between -32768 to 32767. If you set SPLINESEGS to a negative value, segments are generated using the absolute value of the setting and then a fit-type curve is applied to those segments. Fit-type curves use arcs as the approximating segments.
SPLKNOTS Stores the default knot option for the SPLINE command when specifying fit points. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Chord distance 1 Square root of chord distance 2 Uniform distance NOTE SPLKNOTS always defaults to 0 when AutoCAD for Mac starts. See also: Modify Splines SPLMETHOD Stores whether the default method used for the SPLINE command is fit points or control vertices.
See also: Draw Splines SPLPERIODIC Controls whether closed splines and NURBS surfaces are generated with periodic properties to maintain the smoothest continuity at the closure point or seam. Type: Integer Saved in: User-settings Initial value:1 0 Creates closed splines and NURBS surfaces with the method used in AutoCAD for Mac 2011 and earlier releases. 1 Creates periodic closed splines and closed NURBS surfaces, for the smoothest (C2) continuity.
SUBOBJSELECTIONMODE Filters whether faces, edges, vertices or solid history subobjects are highlighted when you roll over them. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 In busy 3D environments with many objects, it can be helpful to filter certain subobjects out of the selection highlighting. 0 When subobject filtering is off, press Ctrl+click to select a face, edge, vertex or a history subobject.
When filtering is set for edges, you cannot select faces, vertices, or history subobjects. When filtering is set for faces, you cannot select edges, vertices, or history subobjects. When filtering is set for history subobjects, you can only select the wireframe representations of portions of objects removed during a union, subtract, or intersect operation.
Subobject Selection Filter Cursors When a subobject selection filter is set, the following images are displayed next to the cursor: Vertex filtering is on Edge filtering is on Face filtering is on History subobject filtering is on Subobject not eligible for selection See also: Cycle Through and Filter Subobjects LEGACYCTRLPICK (page 1351) SUNSTATUS Turns on and off the lighting effects of the sun in the current viewport.
Initial value:0 Only the lights from sources other than the sun affect the view in the current viewport. 0 Off 1 On See also: Sun and Sky Simulation SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY Controls whether surfaces maintain a relationship with the objects from which they were created. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 When associativity is on, surfaces automatically adjust to modifications made to other, related surfaces.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 Controls the preview behavior of surfaces and any associated surfaces when a selected surface is dragged. Disabling the preview can increase performance. 0 Displays no preview. The display refreshes after dragging is complete. 1 Previews only the movement of the first associated surface. All other associated surfaces do not move until after dragging is complete. 2 Previews the movement of all associated surfaces.
Type: Switch Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 Creates a procedural surface when creating surfaces. 1 Creates a NURBS surface when creating surfaces. See also: Create Solids and Surfaces from Lines and Curves Create Surfaces SURFTAB1 Sets the number of tabulations to be generated for the RULESURF and TABSURF commands. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:6 Also sets the mesh density in the M direction for the REVSURF and EDGESURF commands.
SURFTYPE Controls the type of surface-fitting to be performed by the Smooth option of the PEDIT command. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:6 5 Quadratic B-spline surface 6 Cubic B-spline surface 8 Bezier surface See also: Modify Polylines SURFU Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M direction and the U isolines density on surface objects. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:6 Valid values are 0 through 200.
Saved in: Drawing Initial value:6 Valid values are 0 through 200. Meshes are always created with a minimum surface density of 2. See also: Modify Polylines SYSCODEPAGE Indicates the system code page, which is determined by the operating system. (Read-only) Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:Varies To change the code page, see Help for your operating system.
See also: Create and Modify Tables TARGET Stores the location (as a UCS coordinate) of the target point for the current viewport. (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 See also: Overview of Parallel and Perspective Views TBSHOWSHORTCUTS Specifies if shortcut keys are displayed in tooltips. Type: String Saved in: Registry Initial value:yes no Display shortcut keys yes Do not display shortcut keys TDCREATE Stores the local time and date the drawing was created.
See also: Add Identifying Information to Drawings TDINDWG Stores the total editing time, which is the total elapsed time between saves of the current drawing. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies The format is: . To compute the number of seconds, multiply the decimal fraction in TDINDWG by 86400 seconds. See also: Add Identifying Information to Drawings TDUCREATE Stores the universal time and date that the drawing was created.
Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies See also: Add Identifying Information to Drawings TDUSRTIMER Stores the user-elapsed timer. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies See also: Add Identifying Information to Drawings TDUUPDATE Stores the universal time and date of the last update or save. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies See also: Add Identifying Information to Drawings TEMPOVERRIDES Turns temporary override keys on and off.
A temporary override key is a key that you can hold down to temporarily turn on or turn off one of the drawing aids that are set in the Drafting Settings dialog box; for example, Ortho mode, object snaps, or Polar mode. 0 Off 1 On See also: Override Object Snap Settings TEMPPREFIX Contains the directory name (if any) configured for placement of temporary files, with a path separator appended.
2 Displays the In-Place Text Editor when creating or editing single-line text. Repeats the command automatically. See also: Change Single-Line Text TEXTEVAL Controls how text strings entered with TEXT (using scripts or AutoLISP) or with -TEXT are evaluated. Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 0 All responses to prompts for text strings and attribute values are taken literally.
1 Displays text as filled images See also: Use TrueType Fonts TEXTOUTPUTFILEFORMAT Provides Unicode options for log files. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 ANSI format 1 UTF-8 (Unicode) 2 UTF-16LE (Unicode) 3 UTF-16BE (Unicode) See also: Share Drawing Files Internationally TEXTQLTY Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines.
Sets the resolution of TrueType fonts while plotting. Use integer values from 0 to 100. Lower values decrease resolution and increase plotting speed. Higher values increase resolution and decrease plotting speed. See also: Use TrueType Fonts TEXTSIZE Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with the current text style. Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.2000 (imperial) or 2.5000 (metric) TEXTSIZE has no effect if the current text style has a fixed height.
See also: Add 3D Thickness to Objects TILEMODE Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Makes the last active layout tab (paper space) active 1 Makes the Model tab active See also: Set Model Space Viewports TIMEZONE Sets the time zone for the sun in the drawing. Type: Enum Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-8000 The values in the table are expressed as hours and minutes away from Greenwich Mean Time.
-8000 Pacific Time (US & Canada), Tijuana -7000 Arizona -7000 Chihuahua, La Paz, Mazatlan -7000 Mountain Time (US & Canada) -7001 Arizona -7002 Mazatlan -6000 Central America -6001 Central Time (US & Canada) -6002 Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey -6003 Saskatchewan -5000 Eastern Time (US & Canada) -5001 Indiana (East) -5002 Bogota, Lima, Quito -4000 Atlantic Time (Canada) -4001 Caracas, La Paz -4002 Santiago -3300 Newfoundland -3000 Brasilia System Variables | 1465
-3001 Buenos Aires, Georgetown -3002 Greenland -2000 Mid-Atlantic -1000 Azores -1001 Cape Verde Is.
+2005 Jerusalem +3000 Moscow, St.
+7001 Krasnoyarsk +8000 Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi +8001 Kuala Lumpur, Singapore +8002 Taipei +8003 Irkutsk, Ulaan Bataar +8004 Perth +9000 Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo +9001 Seoul +9002 Yakutsk +9300 Adelaide +9301 Darwin +10000 Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney +10001 Guam, Port Moresby +10002 Brisbane +10003 Hobart +10004 Vladivostok +11000 Magadan, Solomon Is.
+12001 Fiji, Kamchatka, Marshall Is. +13000 Nuku’alofa See also: Specify Units and Unit Formats TOOLSETSSTATE Indicates whether the Tool Sets palette is open or closed. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 0 Closed 1 Open See also: The Tool Sets Palette TOOLTIPMERGE Combines drafting tooltips into a single tooltip.
See also: Set Interface Options TOOLTIPSIZE Sets the display size for drafting tooltips, and for automatic completion text at the Command prompt. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 Valid range is -3 to 6. Greater values result in larger drafting tooltips, and larger automatic completion text at the Command prompt. Negative values represent smaller sizes than the default. See also: Use Dynamic Input TOOLTIPTRANSPARENCY Sets the transparency for drafting tooltips.
Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Displays full-screen polar and object snap tracking paths 1 Displays full-screen polar tracking path; displays object snap tracking path only between the alignment point and the From point to the cursor location 2 Displays full-screen object snap tracking path; does not display polar tracking path 3 Does not display polar tracking path; displays object snap tracking path only between the alignment point and the From point to the cursor location See also: Use Pola
TREEDEPTH Specifies the maximum depth, that is, the number of times the tree-structured spatial index can divide into branches. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:3020 0 Suppresses the spatial index entirely, eliminating the performance improvements it provides in working with large drawings. This setting assures that objects are always processed in database order. >0 Turns on spatial indexing. An integer of up to five digits is valid.
have an oct-tree large enough to eventually consume more memory than is available to your computer. TREEMAX also provides a safeguard against experimentation with inappropriately high TREEDEPTH (page 1472) values. The initial default for TREEMAX is 10000000 (10 million), a value high enough to effectively disable TREEMAX as a control for TREEDEPTH (page 1472). The value to which you should set TREEMAX depends on your system's available RAM. You get about 15,000 oct-tree nodes per megabyte of RAM.
Type: Real Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1.0000 Valid values are 0.25 to 4.0. See also: Specify the Line Spacing Within Multiline Text TSPACETYPE Controls the type of line spacing used in multiline text. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 At Least adjusts line spacing based on the tallest characters in a line. Exactly uses the specified line spacing, regardless of individual character sizes.
2 Top aligned See also: Create Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text TSTACKSIZE Controls the percentage of stacked text fraction height relative to selected text's current height. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:70 Valid values are from 25 to 125. See also: Create Stacked Characters Within Multiline Text U System Variables UCS2DDISPLAYSETTING Displays the UCS icon when the 2D Wireframe visual style is current. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Off.
See also: The UCS Icon Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon UCS3DPARADISPLAYSETTING Displays the UCS icon when perspective view is off and a 3D visual style is current. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Off. The UCS icon is not displayed when perspective is turned off and a 3D visual style is current. 1 On. The UCS icon is displayed when perspective is turned off and a 3D visual style is current.
1 On. The UCS icon is displayed when perspective is turned on and a 3D visual style is current. NOTE The UCSICON (page 1078) command must also be set to ON to display the UCS icon. See also: The UCS Icon Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon UCSAXISANG Stores the default angle when rotating the UCS around one of its axes using the X, Y, or Z option of the UCS command.
UCSDETECT Controls whether dynamic UCS acquisition is active or not. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 Not active 1 Active See also: Use the Dynamic UCS with Solid Models UCSFOLLOW Generates a plan view whenever you change from one UCS to another. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 The UCSFOLLOW setting is saved separately for each viewport. If UCSFOLLOW is on for a particular viewport, a plan view is generated in that viewport whenever you change coordinate systems.
non-world UCS in paper space, the view remains in plan view to the world coordinate system. See also: Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) UCSICON Displays the UCS icon for the current viewport or layout. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:3 This system variable has the same name as a command. Use the SETVAR command to access this system variable.
Returns a null string if the current UCS is unnamed. See also: Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) UCSORG Stores the origin point of the current coordinate system for the current viewport in the current space. (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000,0.0000,0.0000 This value is always stored as a world coordinate.
UCSSELECTMODE Controls whether the UCS icon can be selected and manipulated with grips. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:1 0 The UCS icon is not selectable. 1 The UCS icon is selectable. See also: Overview of the User Coordinate System (UCS) UCSVIEW Determines whether the current UCS is saved with a named view.
The setting of this system variable is viewport specific. 0 Unlocked; UCS reflects the UCS of the current viewport 1 Locked; UCS stored in viewport, and is independent of the UCS of the current viewport See also: Assign UCS Definitions to Viewports UCSXDIR Stores the X direction of the current UCS for the current viewport in the current space. (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1.0000,0.0000,0.0000 The setting of this system variable is viewport specific.
UNDOCTL Indicates the state of the Auto, Control, and Group options of the UNDO command.
See also: Correct Mistakes UNITMODE Controls the display format for units. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 By default, the format for displaying measured values differs slightly from the format used for entering them. (You cannot include spaces when entering measured values.
2 Updates previews for layout views 4 Updates previews for layouts 8 Updates previews when layouts or views are created, modified, or restored 16 Updates previews when the drawing is saved See also: Set Interface Options USERI1-5 Provides storage and retrieval of integer values. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 There are five system variables: USERI1, USERI2, USERI3, USERI4, and USERI5.
USERS1-5 Provides storage and retrieval of text string data. Type: String Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:"" There are five system variables: USERS1, USERS2, USERS3, USERS4, and USERS5. See also: DIESEL Expressions in Menu Macros V System Variables VIEWCTR Stores the center of view in the current viewport. (Read-only) Type: 3D-point Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies Expressed as a UCS coordinate.
See also: Change to a View of the XY Plane VIEWMODE Stores the View mode for the current viewport. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 The setting is stored as a bitcode using the sum of the following values: 0 Turned off. 1 Perspective view active. 2 Front clipping on 4 Back clipping on. 8 UCS Follow mode on. 16 Front clip not at eye. If on, the front clip distance ( FRONTZ (page 1300)) determines the front clipping plane.
(Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:Varies See also: Save and Restore Views VIEWTWIST Stores the view rotation angle for the current viewport measured relative to the WCS. (Read-only) Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0.0000 See also: Rotate Views in Layout Viewports VISRETAIN Controls the properties of xref-dependent layers. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 Controls visibility, color, linetype, lineweight, and plot styles.
1 Xref-dependent layer changes made in the current drawing take precedence. Layer settings are saved with the current drawing's layer table and persist from session to session. See also: Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) VPCONTROL Controls whether the menus for viewport tools, views, and visual styles that are located in the upper-left corner of every viewport are displayed. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:ON (or 1) OFF (or 0) Hides viewport controls.
See also: Parts of the User Interface VPLAYEROVERRIDES Indicates if there are any layers with viewport (VP) property overrides for the current layout viewport.
See also: Override Layer Properties in Viewports VPMAXIMIZEDSTATE Indicates whether the viewport is maximized or not. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:0 The maximized viewport state is canceled if you start the PLOT command. 0 Not maximized 1 Maximized See also: Access Model Space from a Layout Viewport VPROTATEASSOC Controls whether the view within a viewport is rotated with the viewport when the viewport is rotated.
See also: Rotate Views in Layout Viewports VSACURVATUREHIGH Sets the value at which a surface displays as green during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE (page 62)). Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 The default value for this system variable is 1. See also: ANALYSISOPTIONS (page 64) ANALYSISOPTIONS - Curvature Tab (page 65) VSACURVATURELOW Sets the value at which a surface displays as blue during curvature analysis (ANALYSISCURVATURE (page 62)).
Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 0 Gaussian curvature (evaluates areas of high and low curvature) 1 Mean curvature (evaluates the mean curvature of the U and V surface curvature values) 2 Maximum curvature (evaluates the maximum curvature of the U and V surface curvature values) 3 Minimum curvature (evaluates the minimum curvature of the U and V surface curvature values) See also: ANALYSISOPTIONS (page 64) ANALYSISOPTIONS - Curvature Tab (page 65) VSADRAFTANGLEHIGH Sets the value at which a model
See also: ANALYSISOPTIONS (page 64) ANALYSISOPTIONS - Draft Analysis Tab (page 66) VSADRAFTANGLELOW Sets the value at which a model displays as blue during draft analysis (ANALYSISDRAFT (page 63)). Type: Real Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-3 Draft angle is the angle in degrees between the surface normal and the UCS plane. Low value set by this system variable. -90 Surface is parallel to the UCS with surface normal facing the opposite direction as the construction plane.
Values for RGB True Color are represented as a comma-separated string of integers 000 to 255. The default value is RGB:255,255,255. NOTE When a color book is installed, any colors defined in the book can be used. See also: ANALYSISOPTIONS (page 64) ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Analysis Tab (page 64) VSAZEBRACOLOR2 Sets the second (contrasting) color of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA).
Initial value:90 0 Horizontal 90 Vertical NOTE Enter a value between 0 and 90 degrees to set Zebra stripes at an angle. See also: ANALYSISOPTIONS (page 64) ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Analysis Tab (page 64) VSAZEBRASIZE Controls the width of the zebra stripes displayed during zebra analysis (ANALYSISZEBRA). Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:45 Valid values are from 1 to 100.
1 Cylinder See also: ANALYSISOPTIONS (page 64) ANALYSISOPTIONS - Zebra Analysis Tab (page 64) VSBACKGROUNDS Controls whether backgrounds are displayed in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Off 1 On NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color. True Colors and Color Book colors are also available. Valid values for True Colors are a string of integers each from 0 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by RGB. The True Color setting is entered as follows: RGB:000,000,000 If you have a color book installed, you can specify any colors that are defined in the book.
3 High NOTE Negative numbers store the value but turn off the effect. Plot styles are not available for objects with the Jitter edge modifier applied. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSEDGELEX Makes edges on 3D objects extend beyond their intersection for a hand-drawn effect.
VSEDGEOVERHANG Makes edges on 3D objects extend beyond their intersection for a hand-drawn effect. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-6 The amount of overhang can be set between 1 and 100 pixels. Negative numbers store the value but turn off the effect. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
isolines displayed facet edges displayed 0 No edges are displayed 1 Isolines are displayed 2 Facet edges are displayed NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
VSEDGESMOOTH Specifies the angle at which crease edges are displayed. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 The range is 0 to 180. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSFACECOLORMODE Controls how the color of faces is calculated.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Shade and Color Faces VSFACEHIGHLIGHT Controls the display of specular highlights on faces without materials in the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:-30 The range is -100 to 100. The higher the number, the larger the highlight.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Shade and Color Faces VSFACESTYLE Controls how faces are displayed in the current viewport.
See also: Shade and Color Faces VSHALOGAP Sets the halo gap in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 The range is 0 to 100. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
See also: Shade and Color Faces VSINTERSECTIONCOLOR Specifies the color of intersection polylines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:7 The initial value is 7, which is a special value that inverts the color (black or white) based on the background color. Value 0 designates ByBlock, value 256 designates ByLayer, and value 257 designates ByEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color.
NOTE INTERSECTIONDISPLAY (page 1342) controls the color of intersection polylines when the visual style is set to 2D Wireframe. 0 Off 1 On NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSINTERSECTIONLTYPE Sets the linetype for intersection lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
8 Double Medium Dash 9 Double Long Dash 10 Medium Long Dash 11 Sparse Dot NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSISOONTOP Displays isolines on top of shaded objects in the visual style applied to the current viewport.
VSLIGHTINGQUALITY Sets the lighting quality in the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Faceted. A single color is computed for each face of a surface or 3D solid. 1 Smooth. The colors are computed as a gradient between the vertices of the faces. 2 Smoothest. If the Per-Pixel Lighting setting is turned on in the Manual Performance Tuning dialog box, then the colors are computed for individual pixels. If not, the Smooth setting is used instead.
After turning them off, you can restore the display of materials and textures. 0 No materials are displayed 1 Materials are displayed, textures are not displayed 2 Materials and textures are displayed NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
See also: Save and Restore Model Layout Viewport Arrangements VSMONOCOLOR Sets the color for monochrome and tint display of faces in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:255,255,255 The initial value is white. NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSOBSCUREDEDGES Controls whether obscured (hidden) edges are displayed. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Off 1 On NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable.
The range is 1 to 11.
The initial value of VSOBSCUREDLTYPE varies on the current visual style. Visual Style (VSCURRENT) Initial Value 2D Wireframe 1 Conceptual 1 Hidden 2 Shaded 1 Shaded with Edges 2 Shades of Gray 1 Sketchy 1 Wireframe 1 X-ray 1 Realistic 1 NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
Type: String Saved in: Drawing Initial value:ByEntity Valid values include ByLayer (256), ByBlock (0), ByEntity (257), and any AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) color (an integer from 1 to 255). You can also specify a true color or a color book color. Valid values for true colors are a string of integers each from 1 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by RGB.
VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE Specifies the linetype of occluded (hidden) lines in the visual style applied to the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 The range is 1 to 11.
10 Medium Long Dash 11 Sparse Dot The initial value of VSOCCLUDEDLTYPE varies on the current visual style. Visual Style (VSCURRENT) Initial Value 2D Wireframe 1 Conceptual 1 Hidden 2 Shaded 1 Shaded with Edges 2 Shades of Gray 1 Sketchy 1 Wireframe 1 X-ray 1 Realistic 1 NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style.
VSSHADOWS Controls whether a visual style displays shadows. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:0 Displaying shadows can slow performance. You can turn off shadows in the current visual style while you work and turn them back on when you need them. Ground shadows are shadows that objects cast on the ground, not on other objects.
1 On The initial value of VSSILHEDGES depends on the current visual style.
Visual Style (VSCURRENT) Initial Value Wireframe 0 X-ray 0 Realistic 0 NOTE Existing visual styles are not changed when you enter a new value for this system variable. Any new value entered for this system variable temporarily creates an unsaved new visual style. See also: Control the Display of Edges VSSILHWIDTH Specifies the width in pixels of silhouette edges in the current viewport. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:5 The range is 1 to 25.
Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:750 The valid range is 0 to 5000. See also: Pan or Zoom a View VTENABLE Controls when smooth view transitions are used. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:3 Smooth view transitions can be on or off for panning and zooming, for changes of view angle, or for scripts. The valid range is 0 to 7.
See also: Pan or Zoom a View VTFPS Sets the minimum speed of a smooth view transition, in frames per second. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:7 When a smooth view transition cannot maintain this speed, an instant transition is used. The valid range is 1 to 30. See also: Pan or Zoom a View W System Variables WHIPARC Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is smooth.
WINDOWAREACOLOR Controls the color of the transparent selection area during window selection. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:150 The valid range is 1 to 255. SELECTIONAREA (page 1425) must be on. See also: Customize Object Selection WORLDUCS Indicates whether the UCS is the same as the WCS.
1 UCS changes to the WCS for the duration of the command; the command input is relative to the current UCS See also: Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles WRITESTAT Indicates whether a drawing file is read-only or can be revised. (Read-only) Type: Integer Saved in: Not-saved Initial value:1 For developers who need to determine write status through AutoLISP.
The FRAME (page 1299) system variable overrides the XCLIPFRAME setting.Use the XCLIPFRAME system variable after the FRAME system variable to reset the clipped xref frame settings 0 The frame is not visible and it is not plotted. The frame temporarily reappears during selection preview or object selection.
XEDIT Controls whether the current drawing can be edited in-place when being referenced by another drawing. Type: Integer Saved in: Drawing Initial value:1 0 Cannot use in-place reference editing 1 Can use in-place reference editing See also: Update Referenced Drawing Attachments XFADECTL Controls the amount of fading within a reference being edited in place. This setting affects only the objects that are not being edited in the reference.
XLOADCTL Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls whether it opens the referenced drawing or a copy. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 Turns off demand-loading; the entire drawing is loaded. 1 Turns on demand-loading. Referenced drawings are kept open and locked. 2 Turns on demand-loading.
XREFCTL Controls whether external reference log (XLG) files are created. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Does not write log files 1 Writes log files See also: Track External Reference Operations (Log File) XREFNOTIFY Controls the notification for updated or missing xrefs. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:2 0 or 1 Disables xref notification 2 Enables xref notification and balloon messages.
Initial value:Varies 0 Closed 1 Open See also: Attach Drawing References (Xrefs) XREFTYPE Controls the default reference type when attaching or overlaying an external reference. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Attachment is the default 1 Overlay is the default See also: Nest and Overlay Referenced Drawings Z System Variables ZOOMFACTOR Controls how much the magnification changes when the mouse wheel moves forward or backward.
Accepts an integer between 3 and 100 as a valid value. The higher the number, the more the change. See also: Pan or Zoom a View ZOOMWHEEL Toggles the direction of transparent zoom operations when you scroll the middle mouse wheel. Type: Integer Saved in: Registry Initial value:0 0 Moves wheel forward zooms in; moving wheel backwards zooms out. 1 Move wheel forward zooms out; moving wheel backwards zooms in.
Index 3D command 7 3D Edit Bar shortcut menu 30 3D Free Orbit cursor icons 34 3D Move Gizmo shortcut menu 39 3D Object Snap tab (Drafting Settings dialog box) 374 3D Rotate Gizmo shortcut menu 50 3D Scale Gizmo shortcut menu 53 3DALIGN command 19 3DARRAY command 21 3DCONFIG command 22 3DDISTANCE command 25 3DEDITBAR command 25 3DFACE command 31 3DFORBIT command 33 3DMESH command 35 3DMOVE command 36 3DORBIT command 40 3DORBIT shortcut menu 41 3DORBITCTR command 44 3DOSMODE system variable 1166 3DOSNAP comma
ARRAYPATH command 96 Path Array visor 94 ARRAYPOLAR command 100 Polar Array visor 95 ARRAYRECT command 103 Rectangular Array visor 96 ARRAYTYPE system variable 1175 ARX command 105 ATTACH command 106 Attach External Reference dialog box 1138 Attach Image dialog box 514 Attachment tab (Leader Settings dialog box) 858 ATTDEF command 107 ATTDIA system variable 1175 ATTDISP command 115 ATTEDIT command 116 ATTEXT command 121 ATTIPE system variable 1175 ATTIPEDIT command 122 ATTMODE system variable 1176 ATTMULTI
CAMERADISPLAY system variable 1184 CANNOSCALE system variable 1184 CANNOSCALEVALUE system variable 1184 CCONSTRAINTFORM system variable 1185 CDATE system variable 1185 CECOLOR system variable 1186 Cell Border Properties dialog box 836 CELTSCALE system variable 1186 CELTYPE system variable 1187 CELWEIGHT system variable 1187 CENTERMT system variable 1188 CETRANSPARENCY system variable 1189 CHAMFER command 182 CHAMFERA system variable 1189 CHAMFERB system variable 1189 CHAMFERC system variable 1189 CHAMFERD s
CONTENTCLOSE command 220 CONTENTSTATE system variable 1201 CONVERT command 220 CONVTOMESH command 221 CONVTONURBS command 222 CONVTOSOLID command 223 CONVTOSURFACE command 226 Coordinate Filters command modifier 1159 COPY command 229 COPYBASE command 231 COPYCLIP command 231 COPYHIST command 232 COPYMODE system variable 1202 CPLOTSTYLE system variable 1202 CPROFILE system variable 1203 Create New Dimension Style dialog box 317 Create New Multileader Style dialog box 666 CROSSINGAREACOLOR system variable 120
DIMALT system variable 1216 DIMALTD system variable 1217 DIMALTF system variable 1217 DIMALTRND system variable 1217 DIMALTTD system variable 1218 DIMALTTZ system variable 1218 DIMALTU system variable 1219 DIMALTZ system variable 1220 DIMANGULAR command 275 DIMANNO system variable 1220 DIMAPOST system variable 1221 DIMARC command 278 DIMARCSYM system variable 1221 DIMASSOC system variable 1222 DIMASZ system variable 1222 DIMATFIT system variable 1223 DIMAUNIT system variable 1224 DIMAZIN system variable 122
New Dimension Style dialog box 318 Override Dimension Style dialog box 318 DIMSTYLE system variable 1243 DIMTAD system variable 1243 DIMTDEC system variable 1244 DIMTEDIT command 350 DIMTFAC system variable 1244 DIMTFILL system variable 1245 DIMTFILLCLR system variable 1245 DIMTIH system variable 1246 DIMTIX system variable 1246 DIMTM system variable 1247 DIMTMOVE system variable 1247 DIMTOFL system variable 1248 DIMTOH system variable 1248 DIMTOL system variable 1248 DIMTOLJ system variable 1249 DIMTP syst
DRAGP2 system variable 1272 DRAGVS system variable 1273 Drawing Units dialog box 1096 DRAWINGRECOVERY command about 361 Files Recovered dialog box 361 DRAWORDER command 363 DRAWORDERCTL system variable 1274 DRSTATE system variable 1274 DSETTINGS command about 364 Dimension Input Settings dialog box 383 Pointer Input Settings dialog box 382 Tooltip Appearance dialog box 384 DVIEW command 385 DWGCHECK system variable 1275 DWGCODEPAGE system variable 1276 DWGNAME system variable 1276 DWGPREFIX system variable
FACETERPRIMITIVEMODE system variable 1293 FACETERSMOOTHLEV system variable 1294 FACETRATIO system variable 1295 FACETRES system variable 1295 FIELD command 429 Field dialog box 429 FIELDDISPLAY system variable 1296 FIELDEVAL system variable 1296 FILEDIA system variable 1297 Files Recovered dialog box 361 FILL command 431 FILLET command 432 FILLETEDGE command 436 FILLETRAD system variable 1297 FILLETRAD3D system variable 1298 FILLMODE system variable 1298 Find and Replace dialog box (mtext) 687 Find and Repl
GROUPDISPLAYMODE system variable 1313 GROUPEDIT command about 471 GROUPLAYERDELETABLE system variable 1314 GROUPSONTOP system variable 1314 GTAUTO system variable 1315 GTDEFAULT system variable 1315 GTLOCATION system variable 1316 H HALOGAP system variable 1317 HANDLES system variable 1317 Hatch and Gradient dialog box 473 HATCH command about 472 Hatch and Gradient dialog box 473 Hatch Library dialog box 489 Hatch Library palette 489 Hatch visor 484 Hatch Edit dialog box 497 Hatch Library dialog box 489 Ha
IMPORT command 518 Import Page Setups dialog box 760 IMPRINT command 519 In-Place Text Editor about 675 Index Color tab (Select Color dialog box) 199 INDEXCTL system variable 1333 INETLOCATION system variable 1333 INPUTHISTORYMODE system variable 1334 INSBASE system variable 1334 Insert Block in Table Cell dialog box 1056 INSERT command 520 Insert dialog box 521 INSNAME system variable 1335 Inspection Dimension dialog box 294 INSUNITS system variable 1336 INSUNITSDEFSOURCE system variable 1338 INSUNITSDEFTA
LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable 1351 LAYULK command 566 LAYUNISO command 567 LEADER command 567 Leader Format tab (Modify Multileader Style dialog box) 662 Leader Line & Arrow tab (Leader Settings dialog box) 858 Leader Settings dialog box 855 Leader Structure tab (Modify Multileader Style dialog box) 663 LEGACYCTRLPICK system variable 1351 LENGTHEN command 570 LENSLENGTH system variable 1352 LIGHT command 572 LIGHTGLYPHDISPLAY system variable 1352 Lighting Properties dialog box 837 LIGHTINGUNITS system vari
Manage Content Libraries dialog box 219 MASSPROP command 597 MATBROWSERCLOSE command 601 MATBROWSEROPEN command 602 MATBROWSERSTATE system variable 1366 MATCHCELL command 605 MATCHPROP command 606 Material Condition dialog box 1063 MATERIALASSIGN command 609 Materials Browser about 603 MATERIALS command about 610 MATERIALSCLOSE command 610 MAXACTVP system variable 1367 MAXSORT system variable 1367 MBUTTONPAN system variable 1367 MEASURE command 611 MEASUREGEOM command 613 MEASUREINIT system variable 1368 ME
N Named UCSs tab (UCS dialog box) 1082 Named Viewports tab (Viewports dialog box) 1118 NAVVCUBE command 708 NAVVCUBEDISPLAY system variable 1375 NAVVCUBELOCATION system variable 1375 NAVVCUBEOPACITY system variable 1376 NAVVCUBEORIENT system variable 1376 NAVVCUBESIZE system variable 1377 NEW command about 711 New Dimension Style dialog box 318 New Dynamic Group dialog box 546 New Layer Name dialog box 933 New Page Setup dialog box 753 New Viewports tab (Viewports dialog box) 1116 NOMUTT system variable 137
Pan shortcut menu 765 PAPERSPACEVISOR system variable 1386 PAPERUPDATE system variable 1387 Paragraph dialog box 682 PARAMETERCOPYMODE system variable 1388 PARAMETERS command 766 PASTECLIP command 767 Path Array visor 94 PCX Image Options dialog box 887 PDMODE system variable 1389 PDSIZE system variable 1389 PEDIT command 767 PEDITACCEPT system variable 1390 PELLIPSE system variable 1390 PERIMETER system variable 1390 PERSPECTIVE system variable 1391 PERSPECTIVECLIP system variable 1391 PFACE command 781 PF
Cell Border Properties dialog box 836 Lighting Properties dialog box 837 Properties palette 832 Properties Inspector palette about 833 general properties 834 Properties palette about 832 Properties tab (Attribute Editor dialog box) 134 Properties tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor) 397 PROPERTIESCLOSE command 844 Property Settings dialog box 607 PROXYGRAPHICS system variable 1407 PROXYNOTICE system variable 1407 PROXYSHOW system variable 1408 PROXYWEBSEARCH system variable 1408 PSETUPIN command 844 PSLTSCALE sy
REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable 1420 RENAME command 880 Rename dialog box 881 RENDER command about 883 BMP Image Options dialog box 886 JPEG Image Options dialog box 889 PCX Image Options dialog box 887 PNG Image Options dialog box 890 Render Output File dialog box 885 Targa Image Options dialog box 887 TIFF Image Options dialog box 888 Render Environment dialog box 894 Render Output File dialog box 885 RENDERENVIRONMENT command 893 RENDEROUTPUTSIZE command 894 RENDERUSERLIGHTS system variable 1420 RENDERWI
SHADEDGE system variable 1428 SHADEDIF system variable 1428 SHADEMODE command 943 SHADOWPLANELOCATION system variable 1428 SHAPE command 944 SHORTCUTMENU system variable 1429 SHORTCUTMENUDURATION system variable 1430 SHOWALLUSEDLAYERSGROUP system variable 1430 SHOWEMPTYGROUPS system variable 1431 SHOWGROUPS system variable 1431 SHOWHIST system variable 1432 SHOWPAGESETUPFORNEWLAYOUTS system variable 1432 SHOWPALETTES command 945 SHOWPALETTESTATE system variable 1433 SHOWUNRECONCILEDLAYERSGROUP system variab
SUBTRACT command 1012 Sun & Sky Properties display 842 SUNSTATUS system variable 1452 SURFACEASSOCIATIVITY system variable 1452 SURFACEASSOCIATIVITYDRAG system variable 1453 SURFACEAUTOTRIM system variable 1453 SURFACEMODELINGMODE system variable 1454 SURFBLEND command 1014 SURFEXTEND command 1015 SURFFILLET command 1017 SURFNETWORK command 1018 SURFOFFSET command 1019 SURFPATCH command 1022 SURFSCULPT command 1023 SURFTAB1 system variable 1454 SURFTAB2 system variable 1454 SURFTRIM command 1024 SURFTYPE sy
Symbol dialog box 1061 Tolerances tab (New Dimension Style dialog box) 342 Tool Sets tab (Customize dialog box) 238 TOOLSETS command 1063 TOOLSETSCLOSE command 1063 TOOLSETSSTATE system variable 1469 Tooltip Appearance dialog box 384 TOOLTIPMERGE system variable 1470 TOOLTIPSIZE system variable 1470 TOOLTIPTRANSPARENCY system variable 1470 TORUS command 1064 Tracking command modifier 1161 TRACKPATH system variable 1471 TRANSPARENCY command 1066 TRANSPARENCYDISPLAY system variable 1471 transparent commands 3
VIEWCTR system variable 1486 ViewCube Settings dialog box 709 VIEWDIR system variable 1487 VIEWMODE system variable 1487 VIEWPLOTDETAILS command about 1106 Plot and Publish Details dialog box 1107 Viewports dialog box 1116 VIEWRES command 1108 VIEWSIZE system variable 1488 VIEWTWIST system variable 1488 VISRETAIN system variable 1489 VISUALSTYLES command 1109 VPCLIP command 1110 VPCONTROL system variable 1489 VPCOORDDISPLAY system variable 1490 VPLAYER command 1110 VPLAYEROVERRIDES system variable 1490 VPLA
VSSHADOWS system variable 1518 VSSILHEDGES system variable 1520 VSSILHWIDTH system variable 1520 VTDURATION system variable 1521 VTENABLE system variable 1522 VTFPS system variable 1522 W WBLOCK command 1126 WEBLIGHT command 1130 WEDGE command 1133 WHIPARC system variable 1522 WHOHAS command 1135 wildcard characters command line prompts 5 WINDOWAREACOLOR system variable 1523 WIPEOUT command 1136 WORLDUCS system variable 1523 WORLDVIEW system variable 1524 Write Block dialog box 1127 WRITESTAT system variab
1552
